advertisement
•
15W0102B500
•
SINUS PENTA
PENTA MARINE
IRIS BLUE
SOLARDRIVE PLUS
USER MANUAL
- Motor Drives Accessories -
Issued on 05/06/2019
R.01
E n g l i s h
• as they provide important hints for use and maintenance safety.
•
This device is to be used only for the purposes it has been designed to. Other uses should be considered improper and dangerous. The manufacturer is not responsible for possible damages caused by improper, erroneous and irrational uses.
•
Enertronica Santerno S.p.A. is responsible for the product in its original setting.
•
Any changes to the structure or operating cycle of the product must be performed or authorized by
Enertronica Santerno S.p.A..
•
Enertronica Santerno S.p.A. assumes no responsibility for the consequences resulting by the use of non-original spare-parts.
•
Enertronica Santerno S.p.A.reserves the right to make any technical changes to this manual and to the product without prior notice. If printing errors or similar are detected, the corrections will be included in the new releases of the manual.
•
The information contained herein is the property of Enertronica Santerno S.p.A. and cannot be reproduced. Enertronica Santerno S.p.A. enforces its rights on the drawings and catalogues according to the law.
Enertronica Santerno S.p.A.
Via della Concia, 7 – 40023 Castel Guelfo (BO) Italy
Tel. +39 0542 489711 – Fax +39 0542 489722 santerno.com
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
REVISION INDEX
The following subjects covered in this User Manual (ID number 15W0102B500 , revision R.01) have been added, changed or suppressed with respect to the previous version of this User Manual (ID number
15W0102B500, revision R.00).
The ENERTRONICA GROUP logo has been added.
The nameplates for BU200 and BU600 have been edited.
A note reading “Decisive voltage class C according to EN 61800-5-1” has been added for BU600.
The operating conditions of the available Braking Resistors have been made clearer.
IP23 Box Resistors, 4 kW to 64 kW: Part Numbers have been split between 1 kV and 3 kV.
The NEMA 1 GLANDKIT section has been added.
Input inductors: a note concerning the dedicated transformer featuring Vdc=5% or higher has been added.
The Output Toroidal Filters section has been added.
Option Boards For Fieldbus (Slot B): compatibility to firmware version has been added.
Option Boards For Fieldbus (Slot B): CClink and Powerlink removed (not available).
The meaning of the LEDs for each field bus has been made clearer in Status LEDs on the B40 Series
The BRIDGE MINI (SLOT B) section has been added.
The ES851 Datalogger Board (SLOT B) has been removed.
In ES847 I/O Expansion Board (Slot C), inputs XAIN1, XAIN2, XAIN3, XAIN6 have been removed (not
available).
SANTERNO USER MANUALS MENTIONED IN THIS GUIDE
The following Santerno User Manuals are mentioned throughout this User Manual:
User Manual Part Number
User Manual Sinus Penta Penta Marine Iris Blue
Programming Guide
15R0102B200 SINUS
PENTA Programming
Guide
15R0102B200 SINUS
PENTA Programming
Guide
15R1102B200 IRIS
BLUE Programming
Guide
Solardrive Plus
15P00SDB100
SOLARDRIVE PLUS
Installation and
Programming Guide
15P00SDB100
SOLARDRIVE PLUS
Installation and
Programming Guide
Installation Guide
15P0102B1 SINUS
PENTA Installation
Guide
Guide to the Regenerative
Application
15Q0102B00 SINUS
PENTA – Guide to the
Regenerative
Application
Guide to the
Synchronous Motor
Application
15Q0102B200 SINUS
PENTA
– Guide to the
Synchronous Motor
Application
15P0102B1 SINUS
PENTA Installation
Guide
15P1102B100 IRIS
BLUE Installation
Guide
15Q0102B00 SINUS
PENTA – Guide to the
Regenerative
Application
15Q0102B200 SINUS
PENTA - Guide to the
Synchronous Motor
Application
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
PROFIdrive
COMMUNICATIONS
BOARD – Installation and
Programming Guide
15G0010B1
PROFIdrive
COMMUNICATIONS
BOARD
– Installation and Programming
Guide
BRIDGE MINI
Manual
– User
15P4600B100
BRIDGE MINI
– User
Manual
15G0010B1
PROFIdrive
COMMUNICATIONS
BOARD - Installation and Programming
Guide
15P4600B100
BRIDGE MINI
– User
Manual
15G0010B1
PROFIdrive
COMMUNICATIONS
BOARD - Installation and Programming
Guide
15P4600B100
BRIDGE MINI
– User
Manual
15G0010B1
PROFIdrive
COMMUNICATIONS
BOARD - Installation and Programming
Guide
15P4600B100
BRIDGE MINI
– User
Manual
2/ 312
USER MANUAL
User Manual
Sine Filters – User
Manual
Sinus Penta
User Manual Part Number
Penta Marine Iris Blue
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Solardrive Plus
15N0040B100 Sine
Filters – User Manual
15N0040B100 Sine
Filters – User Manual
15N0040B100 Sine
Filters – User Manual
15N0040B100 Sine
Filters – User Manual
Assembly Instructions for
Through-panel Kit S22
15W0102B100 SINUS
PENTA - Assembly
Instructions for
Through-panel Kit S22
15W0102B100 SINUS
PENTA - Assembly
Instructions for
Through-panel Kit S22
N/A
Assembly Instructions for
Through-panel Kit S32
15W0102B200 SINUS
PENTA - Assembly
Instructions for
Through-panel Kit S32
15W0102B200 SINUS
PENTA - Assembly
Instructions for
Through-panel Kit S32
N/A
15W0102B100 SINUS
PENTA - Assembly
Instructions for
Through-panel Kit S22
15W0102B200 SINUS
PENTA - Assembly
Instructions for
Through-panel Kit S32
Safe Torque Off Function
– Application Manual
15W0102B300 Safe
Torque Off Function –
Application Manual
15W0102B300 Safe
Torque Off Function –
Application Manual
15W0102B300 Safe
Torque Off Function –
Application Manual
15W0102B300 Safe
Torque Off Function –
Application Manual
AC/DC Units
RemoteDrive
BU600 – Programming
Guide
15P0102B300 AC/DC
UNIT 465
– AC/DC
UNIT 1050
15P0102B300 AC/DC
UNIT 465
– AC/DC
UNIT 1050
N/A
16B0901B1 Remote
Drive REMOTE
CONTROL – User
Manual
16B0901B1 Remote
Drive DRIVE REMOTE
CONTROL – User
Manual
N/A
15R0102B500 BU600
–
Programming Guide
15R0102B500 BU600
– Programming Guide
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
3/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SANTERNO USER MANUALS MENTIONED IN THIS GUIDE .................................... 2
POWER SUPPLY UNIT FOR DRIVES S41..S52 (SU465) ......................................16
INSTALLING AND OPERATING THE SU465 ........................................................ 17
SU465 OPERATION AS A 12-PULSE SUPPLY UNIT ................................................ 18
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE SU465 INSTALLATION, STORAGE
POWER TERMINALS AND SIGNAL TERMINALS LAYOUT ...................................... 25
CROSS-SECTIONS OF THE POWER CABLES AND SIZES OF THE PROTECTIVE
DEVICES WHEN THE SU465 IS INSTALLED ....................................................... 30
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE OF THE SU465 ..................................................... 31
INDUCTORS TO BE APPLIED TO THE DRIVE AND THE SU465 – 12-PULSE
INDUCTORS TO BE APPLIED TO THE DRIVE AND THE SU465 – 18-PULSE
BRAKING RESISTORS TO BE SUPPLIED TO THE DRIVES EQUIPPED WITH
APPLICATIONS WITH DUTY CYCLE 10% - CLASS 2T ............................................ 35
APPLICATIONS WITH DUTY CYCLE 20% - CLASS 2T ............................................ 36
APPLICATIONS WITH DUTY CYCLE 50% - CLASS 2T ............................................ 37
APPLICATIONS WITH DUTY CYCLE 10% - CLASS 4T ............................................ 38
APPLICATIONS WITH DUTY CYCLE 20% - CLASS 4T ............................................ 39
APPLICATIONS WITH DUTY CYCLE 50% - CLASS 4T ............................................ 40
4/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
APPLICATIONS WITH DUTY CYCLE 10% - CLASS 5T ............................................ 41
APPLICATIONS WITH DUTY CYCLE 20% - CLASS 5T ............................................ 42
APPLICATIONS WITH DUTY CYCLE 50% - CLASS 5T ............................................ 43
APPLICATIONS WITH DUTY CYCLE 10% - CLASS 6T ............................................ 44
APPLICATIONS WITH DUTY CYCLE 20% - CLASS 6T ............................................ 45
APPLICATIONS WITH DUTY CYCLE 50% - CLASS 6T ............................................ 46
BRAKING UNIT (BU200 2T-4T) FOR S41-S51 AND S60-S60P............................. 47
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE OF THE BU200 ......................................................... 56
BRAKING UNITS FOR S41..S52 AND THEIR PARALLEL CONFIGURATION AND
OPERATING MODE OF THE BU600 CONNECTED TO DRIVES S41..S52 AND THEIR
OPERATING MODE OF THE BU600 WHEN CONNECTED TO S60 AND S60P
DRIVES OR A DC-BUS MADE UP OF SINUS PENTA /PENTA MARINE DRIVES
BU600 USED AS A GENERAL-PURPOSE BRAKING UNIT TO BE CONNECTED TO A
PROTECTING THE BRAKING RESISTORS .............................................................. 74
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE OF THE BU600 ......................................................... 74
BRAKING RESISTORS TO BE APPLIED TO BU600 4T ........................................... 75
BRAKING RESISTORS TO BE APPLIED TO BU600 5T-6T ...................................... 78
BRAKING UNIT BU1440 FOR MODULAR INVERTERS (BU1440 4T AND BU1440
5/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE OF THE BU1440 ....................................................... 97
BRAKING RESISTORS FOR BU1440 5T-6T ............................................................ 100
AVAILABLE BRAKING RESISTORS ................................................................... 104
OVERALL DIMENSIONS WHEN INSTALLING AN INVERTER WITH THE NEMA 1
REMOTING THE KEYPAD ON THE CABINET .................................................... 122
OUTPUT INDUCTORS (DU/DT FILTERS) ........................................................... 126
APPLYING THE INDUCTOR TO THE INVERTER ............................................... 127
CLASS 5T-6T – AC AND DC INDUCTORS .............................................................. 129
CLASS 2T-4T – AC 3-PHASE INDUCTORS ............................................................. 130
CLASS 5T-6T – AC 3-PHASE INDUCTORS ............................................................. 130
CLASS 2T, 4T, 5T, 6T – 3-PHASE DU/DT INDUCTORS ......................................... 134
CLASS 2T – 3-PHASE AC INDUCTORS IN IP54 CABINET ................................ 135
CLASS 4T – 3-PHASE AC INDUCTORS IN IP54 CABINET ................................ 136
CLASS 5T-6T – 3-PHASE AC INDUCTORS IN IP54 CABINET ........................... 138
OUTPUT SINGLE-PHASE INDUCTORS FOR MODULAR INVERTERS S75, S80,
AC SINGLE-PHASE INDUCTORS – CLASS 4T-5T-6T ............................................ 140
ES836/2 ENCODER BOARD (SLOT A) ................................................................143
6/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................. 144
INSTALLING ES836/2 ENCODER BOARD ON THE INVERTER (SLOT A)......... 145
TERMINALS IN ENCODER BOARD .................................................................... 146
CONFIGURATION DIP-SWITCHES .................................................................... 146
JUMPER SELECTING THE TYPE OF ENCODER SUPPLY ................................ 147
ENCODER WIRING AND CONFIGURATION ...................................................... 148
ES913 LINE DRIVER ENCODER BOARD (SLOT A) ............................................154
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................. 154
INSTALLING THE LINE DRIVER BOARD ON THE INVERTER (SLOT A) .......... 156
TERMINALS IN THE LINE DRIVER ENCODER BOARD ..................................... 157
CONFIGURATION DIP-SWITCHES .................................................................... 157
ENCODER SUPPLY SELECTION JUMPER ........................................................ 158
ES860 SIN/COS ENCODER BOARD (SLOT A) ...................................................160
INSTALLING ES860 BOARD ON THE INVERTER (SLOT A) .............................. 162
ES860 CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING MODES ....................................... 165
CONFIGURING AND ADJUSTING THE ENCODER SUPPLY VOLTAGE ............... 166
CONNECTING THE ENCODER CABLE .............................................................. 167
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................. 168
ES822 ISOLATED SERIAL BOARD (SLOT B) .............................................170
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................. 170
INSTALLING ES822 BOARD ON THE INVERTER (SLOT B) .............................. 172
JUMPER FOR RS232/RS485 SELECTION ......................................................... 173
DIP-SWITCH FOR RS485 TERMINATOR ........................................................... 173
OPTION BOARDS FOR FIELDBUS (SLOT B) .............................................174
INSTALLING THE FIELDBUS BOARD ON THE INVERTER (SLOT B) ............... 176
STATUS LEDS ON THE B40 SERIES BOARDS ................................................. 178
7/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
NSTA/MSTA LEDS LEDS - MODBUS/TCP .............................................................. 179
STATUS LEDS ON THE ANYBUS-S BOARDS ................................................... 182
LEDS FOR FIELDBUS INTERFACE CPU DIAGNOSTICS ...................................... 182
LEDS FOR PROFIBUS-DP ® BOARD DIAGNOSTICS .............................................. 183
LEDS FOR DEVICENET ® BOARD DIAGNOSTICS .................................................. 183
LEDS FOR CANOPEN ® BOARD DIAGNOSTICS ..................................................... 184
LEDS FOR ETHERNET BOARD DIAGNOSTICS ..................................................... 184
B40 SERIES BOARD FOR PROFIBUS-DP® ....................................................... 185
PROFIBUS® FIELDBUS CONNECTOR ................................................................... 186
B40 SERIES BOARDS FEATURING ETHERNET INTERFACE (PROFINET IRT,
MODBUS/TCP, ETHERCAT, ETHERNET/IP) ...................................................... 188
CONFIGURING B40 SERIES BOARDS WITH ETHERNET INTERFACE ............... 190
B40 SERIES BOARD FOR DEVICENET ® ............................................................ 193
FIELDBUS DEVICENET TERMINAL BOARD ........................................................... 193
ANYBUS-S PROFIBUS-DP ® BOARD .................................................................. 195
PROFIBUS® FIELDBUS CONNECTOR ................................................................... 196
CONFIGURATION OF THE PROFIBUS-DP COMMUNICATIONS BOARD ............ 196
ANYBUS-S DEVICENET ® BOARD ............................................................. 199
DEVICENET ® FIELDBUS TERMINALS........................................................ 200
BOARD CONFIGURATION .......................................................................... 200
CONNECTION TO THE FIELDBUS ............................................................. 201
ANYBUS-S CANOPEN ® FIELDBUS BOARD .............................................. 202
CANOPEN ® FIELDBUS CONNECTOR ........................................................ 203
BOARD CONFIGURATION .......................................................................... 203
CONNECTION TO THE FIELDBUS ............................................................. 204
ANYBUS-S ETHERNET BOARD FOR MODBUS/TCP ............................... 205
ETHERNET CONNECTOR ........................................................................... 206
CONNECTION TO THE NETWORK ............................................................ 206
8/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
CONFIGURATION OF THE ETHERNET BOARD FOR MODBUS/TCP ...... 208
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS COMMON TO ALL BOARDS ......... 215
ES919 COMMUNICATIONS BOARD (SLOT B) ...........................................216
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS COMMON TO ALL BOARDS .................. 216
ELECTRICAL FEATURES COMMON TO ALL BOARDS ..................................... 217
INSTALLING THE ES919 BOARD ON THE DRIVE (SLOT B) ............................. 217
LEDS ON THE ASP485 PROTOCESSOR MODULE ............................................... 219
ES919 BOARD FOR BACNET/ETHERNET ......................................................... 220
LEDS ON THE FFP485 PROTOCESSOR MODULE ................................................ 221
ES919 BOARD FOR BACNET/RS485 ................................................................. 224
INSTALLING THE BOARD ON THE INVERTER (SLOT B) .................................. 227
ES847 I/O EXPANSION BOARD (SLOT C) ..................................................228
INSTALLING ES847 BOARD ON THE INVERTER (SLOT C) .............................. 229
CONFIGURATION DIP-SWITCHES .................................................................... 233
POSSIBLE SETTINGS FOR DIP-SWITCHES SW1 AND SW2 ............................ 234
CONNECTION OF “FAST” DIFFERENTIAL ANALOG INPUTS ............................... 236
CONNECTION OF “FAST” CURRENT INPUTS ....................................................... 237
CONNECTING “SLOW” ANALOG INPUTS TO VOLTAGE SOURCES ................... 237
CONNECTING “SLOW” ANALOG INPUTS TO CURRENT SOURCES ................... 238
CONNECTING “SLOW” ANALOG INPUTS TO THERMISTOR PT100 .................... 238
CONNECTING ISOLATED DIGITAL INPUTS ........................................................... 239
CONNECTION TO AN ENCODER OR A FREQUENCY INPUT .............................. 240
CONNECTION TO ISOLATED DIGITAL OUTPUTS ................................................. 241
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................. 242
9/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
ES870 RELAY I/O EXPANSION BOARD (SLOT C) .....................................247
INSTALLING ES870 BOARD ON THE INVERTER (SLOT C) .............................. 248
CONNECTION TO AN ENCODER OR A FREQUENCY INPUT .......................... 250
I/O EXPANSION BOARD 120/240VAC ES988 (SLOT C) ............................251
INSTALLING THE ES988 OPTION BOARD ON THE DRIVES (SLOT C) ............ 252
DIGITAL INPUT TERMINALS AND RELAY OUTPUT .......................................... 255
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ....................................................................... 258
ES861 RESOLVER AND INCREMENTAL ENCODER BOARD (SLOT C) ...261
INSTALLING ES861 BOARD ON THE INVERTER (SLOT C) .............................. 263
INCREMENTAL ENCODER AND DIGITAL LINES CONNECTORS ........................ 266
ES861 CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING MODES ....................................... 267
CONFIGURING AND ADJUSTING THE ENCODER SUPPLY VOLTAGE ........... 267
CONNECTING THE RESOLVER CABLE ............................................................ 269
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................. 270
ES950 BISS/ENDAT ENCODER BOARD (SLOT C) ....................................272
INSTALLING ES950 BOARD ON THE INVERTER (SLOT C) .............................. 275
BISS/ENDAT ENCODER CONNECTOR .................................................................. 277
INCREMENTAL ENCODER AND DIGITAL LINE CONNECTORS ........................... 278
ES950 CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING MODES ....................................... 279
CONFIGURING AND ADJUSTING THE ENCODER SUPPLY VOLTAGE ............... 280
CONNECTING THE ENCODER CABLE .............................................................. 282
10/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
ES966 ENCODER BOARD HIPERFACE (SLOT C) .....................................286
INSTALLING THE ES966 BOARD ON THE INVERTER (SLOT C) ...................... 288
HIPERFACE® ENCODER CONNECTOR ............................................................ 291
INCREMENTAL ENCODER CONNECTORS AND DIGITAL LINES .................... 292
OPERATING MODE AND CONFIGURATION OF HIPERFACE ENCODER BOARD
HIPERFACE® OPERATING MODE ..................................................................... 294
CONFIGURING AND ADJUSTING THE ENCODER SUPPLY VOLTAGE ........... 295
TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONFIGURATION .................................................... 297
CONNECTING THE ENCODER CABLE .............................................................. 297
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................................ 299
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS................................................................ 299
ES914 POWER SUPPLY UNIT BOARD .......................................................301
“LOC-0-REM” KEY SELECTOR SWITCH AND EMERGENCY PUSH-BUTTON
WIRING IP54 INVERTER S WITH OPTIONAL “LOC-0-REM” KEY SELECTOR
SWITCH AND EMERGENCY PUSH-BUTTON .................................................... 310
11/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
Index of Figures
12/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
13/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES USER MANUAL
ACCESSORIES
14/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Index of Tables
15/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
1. OVERVIEW
This manual covers the specifications and installation instructions for the option boards and external accessories available for the following products manufactured by Santerno:
-
Sinus Penta
-
Penta Marine
Iris Blue
-
Solardrive Plus
The accessory-product compatibility is stated in the Compatibility Table at the beginning of each section in this manual.
2. POWER SUPPLY UNIT FOR DRIVES S41..S52 (SU465)
Product-Accessory Compatibility
Product
Sinus Penta
Penta Marine
Iris Blue
Solardrive Plus
Power Supply Unit SU465
√
√
-
-
Comments
Table 1: Product – Power Supply Unit SU465 compatibility
The power supply for the S41..S52 drives (see the 12-pulse Connection for Modular Inverters in the
Installation Guide) requires the SU465.
The SU465 must be installed next to the inverter and is to be connected as described below.
Instructions on how to transport, handle and unpack the product, please refer to the general instructions given in the Transport and Handling and Unpacking in the Installation Guide.
The SU465 may be utilized as a 12-pulse rectifier for the following drive sizes:
1. S41
2. S42
3. S51
4. S52
Alternatively, it may be used as a standard rectifier.
The voltage input must range from 200Vac to 690Vac; the maximum allowable current for the SU465 is
465A.
An 18-pulse connection may be obtained by using N.2 supply units SU465.
The SU465 is an Open Type device featuring IP00 degree of protection suitable for installation inside a cabinet featuring at least IP3X degree of protection.
16/ 312
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
2.1. Delivery Check
Make sure that the equipment is not damaged and that it complies with the equipment you ordered by referring to the nameplate located on the inverter front part. The inverter nameplate is described below. If the equipment is damaged, contact the supplier or the insurance company concerned. If the equipment does not comply with the one you ordered, please contact the supplier as soon as possible.
If the equipment is stored before being started, make sure that the ambient conditions do not exceed the acceptable ratings (temperature: –25°C to +70°C; relative humidity <95%, no condensation). The equipment guarantee covers any manufacturing defect. The manufacturer has no responsibility for possible damages occurred when shipping or unpacking the inverter. The manufacturer is not responsible for possible damages or faults caused by improper and irrational uses; wrong installation; improper conditions of temperature, humidity, or the use of corrosive substances. The manufacturer is not responsible for possible faults due to the inverter operation at values exceeding the inverter ratings and is not responsible for consequential and accidental damages. The equipment is covered by 2-year guarantee starting from the date of delivery.
2.2. Installing and Operating the SU465
Please refer to the general instructions given in section Installing and Operating the Equipment in the
2.3. SU465 Nameplate
1
1. Model:
2. Input voltage:
3. Input frequency:
4. Input current:
5. Output voltage:
6. Output current:
7. Nominal power:
8. Degree of protection:
Figure 1: Nameplate for SU465
SU465
200-690 Vac
50-60 Hz
380 A nominal current
282-975 Vdc
465 A nominal 580 A maximum
453 kVA
IP00 \ IP21
17/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
2.4. SU465 Operating Mode
USER MANUAL
The SU465 may operate as follows:
•
In parallel to a 12-pulse converter (this solution reduces the harmonic contents to the power supply mains):
Figure 2: The SU465 in 12-pulse configuration
•
As a supply unit for a conversion unit:
Figure 3: The SU465 as a supply unit of a conversion unit
2.4.1. SU465 Operation as a 12-pulse Supply Unit
The 12-pulse supply unit is controlled directly by the drive. When operating as an additional rectifier bridge for the 12-pulse connection, the following diagnostics functions are performed by the driver board of the drive:
•
Phase detection and measurement
•
Heatsink overtemperature measurement and alarm
•
Precharge control
18/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
2.5. System Requirements
As the input current is automatically controlled, the system must meet the following requirements:
•
•
The three-phase transformer must be: o Symmetrical o With Dy11d0 or Dy5d0 vector unit o The secondary output voltages must range:
▪ Within 5% of relative variation at full load
▪ Within 0.5% under no-load conditions o The short-circuit current must be Vsc>4%
•
Wiring to the transformer, the supply unit and the drive shall be as close as possible in terms of cable length and cable cross-section.
2.6. Technical Specifications
Electrical specifications:
Overvoltage category III (according to EN 61800-5-1)
MODEL
Rated input current (A)
Supply voltage
SU465 380
Mechanical specifications:
200-690Vac
Rated output current (A)
Maximum output current (A)
465 580
Output voltage
0-975Vdc
Dissipated power
(at rated current)
(W)
1160
MODEL
Degree of protection
Sound pressure
(dB)
SU465
(*) NEMA1 when using the special optional kit
IP00(*) 57
19/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
2.7. Installing the SU465
USER MANUAL
2.7.1. Environmental Requirements for the SU465 Installation, Storage and
Transport
Maximum surrounding air temperature
–10 to +40°C with no derating from +40°C to +55°C with 2% derating of the rated current for each degree beyond +40°C
Ambient temperatures for storage and transport
–25°C to +70°C.
Installation environment
Pollution degree 2 or better (according to EN 61800-5-1).
Do not install in direct sunlight and in places exposed to conductive dust, corrosive gases, vibrations, water sprinkling or dripping (depending on IP ratings); do not install in salty environments.
Max. altitude for installation 2000 m a.s.l. For installation above 2000 m and up to 4000 m, please contact Enertronica Santerno S.p.A..
Altitude
Operating ambient humidity
Storage ambient humidity
Ambient humidity during transport
Above 1000 m, derate the rated current by 1% every 100 m.
From 5% to 95%, from 1g/m 3 to 29g/m 3 , non-condensing and nonfreezing (class 3K3 according to EN 61800-5-1).
From 5% to 95%, from 1g/m 3 to 29g/m 3 , non-condensing and nonfreezing (class 1K3 according to EN 61800-5-1).
Max. 95%, up to 60g/m 3 ; condensation may appear when the equipment is not running (class 2K3 according to EN 61800-5-1).
Storage and operating atmospheric pressure
From 86 to 106 kPa (classes 3K3 and 1K4 according to EN 61800-5-1).
Atmospheric pressure during transport
From 70 to 106 kPa (class 2K3 according to EN 61800-5-1) .
Ambient conditions strongly affect the inverter life. Do not install the equipment in places that do not have the above-mentioned ambient conditions.
CAUTION
20/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
2.7.2. Mounting the SU465
The SU465 must be installed on the left of the drive in upright position inside a cabinet. The mechanical dimensions and fixing points are given in the figures below.
If the braking unit or an additional supply unit is installed, those units may be installed side by side.
The minimum allowable side clearance is 150mm and 100mm top and bottom.
Dimensions (mm)
W
257
H
550
D
398.5
X
170
Fixing point distance (mm)
Y
515
D1
12
D2
6
Type of screws
M8-M10
Weight
(kg)
36.6
Figure 4: Dimensions and fixing points for the SU465
21/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
2.7.3. IP21 Kit
The SU465 may be provided with a special safety kit against top-down water dripping to get IP21 degree of protection. Consequently, the side dimensions become 30mm.
22/ 312
Figure 5: Overall dimensions when using IP21 kit
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
2.7.4. Through-panel Kit
The supply unit may be provided with the special through-panel kit for the segregation of the air flows.
Dimensions (mm)
W
325
H
683
D
398.5
X
250
Fixing point distance (mm)
Y
650
X1
293
Y1
400
Type of screws
M8-M10
Weight
(kg)
2
Part Number
ZZ0119280
Figure 6: Dimensions and fixing points when using the through-panel kit for the SU465
23/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
2.7.5. NEMA1 Kit
The SU465 may be provided with the special NEMA1 kit against accidental contacts.
This optional kit is to be installed directly on the supply unit case and provides protection against accidental contacts with the power terminals in the supply unit.
Figure 7: NEMA1 kit and kit installation on the SU465
Part Number
ZZ0119270
The NEMA1 kit is provided with N.3 removable plates that may be drilled to sui t the installer’s needs in terms of cable paths to the mains and the unit to be power supplied.
The installer is responsible for the utilization of safe materials able to preserve the equipment’s degree of protection. It is recommended that the cables do not enter into contact with sharp metal parts that may jeopardize isolation.
Type of
Kit dimensions (mm)
SU465 length +
NEMA1 kit screws for mounting
Weight
(kg)
W
187
H
298
D
248
H
765
M8 3.4
24/ 312
Figure 8: Overall dimensions when installing the NEMA1 kit
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
2.7.6. Power Terminals and Signal Terminals Layout
Power Wiring
The SU465 is to be connected to the drive as follows:
Decisive voltage class C according to EN 61800-5-1
Terminal Type
Tightening
Torque
(Nm)
Connection cable cross-section mm 2
(AWG/kcmils)
R
S
T
+
–
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
30
30
30
30
30
NOTES
240mm 2 (500kcmils) To be connected to phase R of the transformer
240mm 2 (500kcmils) To be connected to phase S of the transformer
240mm 2 (500kcmils) To be connected to phase T of the transformer
240mm 2 (500kcmils) To be connected to terminal 47/+ of the drive
240mm 2 (500kcmils) To be connected to terminal 49/ – of the drive
Figure 9: Power terminals
CAUTION
When the SU465 is used as a 12-pulse rectifier, bars 47/D and 47/+ in drives
S41-42-51-52 are to be short-circuited.
CAUTION
DANGER
When the SU465 is used as a supply unit, bars 47/D and 47/+ in the drive are to be disconnected by removing the default bridge.
DUAL POWER SUPPLY: The SU465 may be both AC supplied (input) and
DC supplied (output) thanks to the parallel connection to the drive.
Disconnect both sources (input AC power supply and parallel connection to the drive) before operating on the equipment.
25/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
DANGER
Once both AC power supply and DC power supply have been isolated, wait at least 20 minutes before operating on the DC-links to give the capacitors time to discharge.
2.7.7. Signal Connections
Each supply unit is provided with two DB9 connectors for the connection of the control signals. By way of
signals from the drive to be power supplied. Connector CN2 features a similar signal set for the cascade connection of an additional supply unit.
Connector CN1 – Connect terminal board M1 to the drive via a shielded DB9 cable, AWG26, provided with male DB9 terminal on the drive side and female DB9 terminal on the SU465.
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
N. Name Description I/Os
1 12PHU 12-ph UNIT FITTED 0-24V
NOTES
+24V available
0V n/available
2
3
4
PREC_M
Vrs
Vst
Thyristor firing precharge (master)
Vrs phase readout
Vst phase readout
0-24V
5V analog
5V analog
+24V firing failed;
0V: firing successful
Vrs/200 for 2T-4T
Vrs/250 for 5T-6T
Vrs/200 for 2T-4T
Vrs/250 for 5T-6T
5 VBOK
ON/OFF command for thyristor firing
0-24V +24V for thyristor firing
6 +24V 24Vdc power supply
20W (in common with the drive 24V power
7
8
0V
PT_M
0V
Thermoswitch
(master)
NTC readout (master) supply)
Control board zero volt
0-24V
+24V thermoswitch open;
0V: thermoswitch OK
NTC 10k polarized at 5V with 6k81 9 NTC_M
Connector CN2 – If required, connect terminal board M2 to the additional shielded DB9 connector, at least
AWG26, with a male DB9 connector on the first SU465 and a DB9 female on the second SU465.
26/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
N.
1
2
3
4
5
Name
18PHU
PREC_S
-
-
VBOK
Description
18-ph UNIT FITTED
Thyristor firing precharge (slave)
ON/OFF command for thyristor firing
0-24V
0-24V
0-24V
I/Os NOTES
+24V available
0V n/available
+24V firing failed;
0V: firing successful
Not connected
Not connected
+24V for thyristor firing
6 +24V 24Vdc power supply
ON/OFF command for thyristor firing
24Vdc power supply 7
8
0V
PT_S
0V
Thermoswitch (slave) 0-24V
+24V thermoswitch open;
0V: thermoswitch OK
NTC 10k polarized at 5V with 6k81 9 NTC_S NTC readout (slave)
In the event of a 18-pulse or more connection, an external 24V supply unit connected to pins 6 and 7 is required. 20W power is required for each additional unit.
The connection in parallel of more than one supply unit requires configuring the ES840/1 control board by changing the default settings of special-purpose jumpers. Those settings are given in the table below, based on the position of the supply unit in the device chain (first position, intermediate position, end position).
SU465
in first position
SU465 in intermediate position
SU465 in end position
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
27/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
Figure 10: Position of the jumpers in the ES840/1 board
The configuration of jumpers J7-J8 depends on the operating voltage of the SU465.
J7
J8
2T-4T
1-2
1-2
5T-6T
2-3
2-3
28/ 312
Figure 11: Signal terminal board
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 12: Example of a 9-pin shielded cable for signal connection
2.7.8. Wiring the SU465
Figure 13: S41 –S52 connections with 12- and 18-pulse SU465
29/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
2.8.
USER MANUAL
Cross-sections of the Power Cables and Sizes of the Protective Devices when the SU465 is Installed
The minimum requirements of the inverter cables and the protective devices needed to protect the system against short-circuits are given in the tables below. It is however recommended that the applicable regulations in force be observed; also check if voltage drops occur for cable links longer than 100m.
For the largest inverter sizes, special links with multiple conductors are provided for each phase. For example, 2x150 in the column relating to the cable cross-section means that two 150mm 2 parallel conductors are required for each phase.
Multiple conductors shall have the same length and must run parallel to each other, thus ensuring even current delivery at any frequency value. Paths having the same length but a different shape deliver uneven current at high frequency.
Also, do not exceed the tightening torque for the terminals to the bar connections. For connections to bars, the tightening torque relates to the bolt tightening the cable lug to the copper bar. The cross-section values given in the tables below apply to copper cables.
The links between the motor and the drive must have the same lengths and must follow the same paths. Use
3-phase cables where possible.
Dimensioning depends on the configuration of the SU465 (12-pulse connection or power supply unit – rectifier).
2T-4T
2T-4T
5T-6T
5T-6T
S41
S51
S42
S52
Drive
Model
0180
0202
0217
0260
0313
0367
0402
0181
0201
0218
0259
0290
0314
0368
0401
165
180
200
225
250
280
320
150
175
190
225
240
275
340
155
Rated
Inverter
Current
Tightening
Torque
Cable Crosssection to
Mains and
Motor Side
A Nm mm 2
(AWG/kcmils)
95 (4/0AWG) 10
10
10
10
10
95 (4/0AWG)
120 (250kcmils)
120 (250kcmils)
120 (250kcmils)
25-30 150 (300kcmils)
25-30 240 (500kcmils)
30 95 (4/0AWG)
30 95 (4/0AWG)
30 120 (250kcmils)
30
30
30
30
30
120 (250kcmils)
150 (300kcmils)
185 (400kcmils)
240 (500kcmils)
240 (500kcmils)
Fast Fuses
(700V) +
Disc.
Switch
A
200
250
250
315
400
400
450
200
250
250
315
400
400
500
200
Magnetic
Circuit
Breaker
A
200
250
250
400
400
400
400
160
200
250
400
400
400
400
200
AC1
Contactor
A
250
250
250
275
400
400
450
160
250
250
275
275
400
450
250
NOTE
[*] These rated current values apply to the 12-pulse configuration only; configurations other than the 12-pulse configuration have different rated current values.
30/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
2.9. Earth Bonding of the SU465
For the earth bonding of the SU465 and the transformer for the 12-pulse application, please refer to the
2.10. Scheduled Maintenance of the SU465
For the SU465 scheduled maintenance, please refer to the general instructions given in section Inverter
Scheduled Maintenance in the Installation Guide.
2.11. Inductors to be Applied to the Drive and the SU465
– 12-pulse Connection
Voltage
Class
2T-4T
2T-4T
5T-6T
5T-6T
Drive Size
S41
S51
S42
S52
Drive Model
0180
0202
0217
0260
0313
0367
0402
0181
0201
0218
0259
0290
0314
0368
0401
INPUT THREE-PHASE
AC INDUCTOR
IM0126244
0.09mH
–252Arms
IM0126282
0.063mH
–360Arms
IM0127274
0.12mH
–325Arms
IM0127330
0.096mH
–415Arms
31/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
2.12.
USER MANUAL
Inductors to be Applied to the Drive and the SU465 – 18-pulse connection
Voltage
Class
2T-4T
2T-4T
5T-6T
5T-6T
Drive Size
S41
S51
S42
S52
Drive Model
0180
0202
0217
0260
0313
0367
0402
0181
0201
0218
0259
0290
0314
0368
0401
INPUT THREE-PHASE
AC INDUCTOR
IM0126204
0.16mH
–145Arms
IM0126244
0.09mH
–252Arms
IM0127202
0.29mH
–140Arms
IM0127227
0.19mH
–210Arms
IM0127274
0.12mH
–325Arms
32/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3. RESISTIVE BRAKING
Product-Accessory Compatibility
Product
Sinus Penta
Penta Marine
Iris Blue
Power Supply Unit SU465
√
√
-
Comments
Solardrive Plus -
Table 2: Product – Resistive braking compatibility
When a large braking torque is required or the load connected to the motor is pulled (as for instance in lifting applications), the power regenerated by the motor is to be dissipated. This can be obtained in two ways:
• by dissipating energy to braking resistors (in that case a braking module is required); or
• by powering the inverter via the DC-bus using a system able to deliver energy to the mains. Both solutions are available.
Both solutions are available: The first solution is described below; for the second solution, please refer to the
technical documentation pertaining to the Regenerative Inverter (see the Guide to the Regenerative
From size S05 to size S32, the products are supplied with a built-in braking module. The braking resistor is to be connected outside the inverter to terminal B and terminal + (see Power Terminals for S05-S52 in the
in this manual also for the description of the suitable braking resistors.
When choosing the braking resistor, consider the following:
• drive supply voltage (voltage class),
• the braking resistor Ohm value
• the rated power of the resistor.
The voltage class and the Ohm value determine the instant power dissipated in the braking resistor and are relating to the motor power (see note below); the rated power determines the mean power to be dissipated in the braking resistor and is relating to the duty cycle of the equipment, i.e. to the resistor activation time in respect to the duty cycle full time (the duty cycle of the resistor is equal to the motor braking time divided by the equipment duty cycle).
It is not possible to connect resistors with a Ohm value lower than the min. value acknowledged by the inverter.
The braking power required to reduce the speed of a rotating body is
NOTE proportional to the total moment of inertia of the rotating mass, to the speed variation, to the absolute speed and is inversely proportional to the deceleration time required.
The following pages contain application tables stating the resistors to be used depending on the inverter model, the application requirements and the supply voltage.
NOTE
The braking resistor power is given as an approximate empirical value; the correct dimensioning of the braking resistor is based on the equipment duty cycle and the power regenerated during the braking stage.
33/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
3.1 Braking Resistors to be Supplied to the Drives Equipped with Internal Braking
Unit
NOTE
The wire cross-sections given in the table relate to one wire per braking resistor.
NOTE
The Part Numbers of the braking resistors in the tables are given in the
Available Braking Resistors section.
HOT
SURFACE
The braking resistor case may reach 200°C based on the operating cycle.
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
The cables of the braking resistors shall have insulation features and heatresistance features suitable for the application. The minimum rated voltage of the cables must be 450/700 V for inverters 2T, 0.6/1kV for inverters
4T/5T/6T.
The power dissipated by the braking resistors may be the same as the rated power of the connected motor multiplied by the braking duty-cycle; use a proper air-cooling system. Do not install braking resistors near heatsensitive equipment or objects.
Do not connect to the inverter any braking resistor with an Ohm value lower than the value given in the tables.
CAUTION
Never exceed the maximum operating time of the resistor as given in the
Available Braking Resistors section
.
34/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.1.1. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 10% - Class 2T
Size Model
S05
S12
S15
S20
S30
0049
0060
0067
0074
0086
0113
0129
0150
0162
0007
0008
0010
0013
0015
0016
0020
0023
0033
0037
0040
Min.
Applicable
Resistor (
)
25.0
25.0
25.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
15.0
10.0
10.0
7.5
5.0
5.0
5.0
4.2
4.2
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
Type
56
-350W
2*56
-350W
2*56
-350W
2*56
-350W
2*56
-350W
3*56
-350W
3*56
-350W
15
-1100W
10
-1500W
10
-1500W
2*15
-1100W
5
-4000W
5
-4000W
5
-4000W
5
-4000W
5
-4000W
3.3
-8000W
3.3
-8000W
3.3
-8000W
3.3
-8000W
BRAKING RESISTORS
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
IP55
IP55
IP55
IP55
IP55
IP55
IP55
IP55
IP54
IP54
IP55
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
A
B
B
B
Value
(
)
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
56
28
28
28
28
18.7
18.7
15
10
10
7.5
Wire crosssection mm2 (AWG)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
4(12)
4(12)
4(12)
4(12)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
35/ 312
0040
0049
0060
0067
0074
0086
0113
0129
0150
0162
0007
0008
0010
0013
0015
0016
0020
0023
0033
0037
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.1.2. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 20% - Class 2T
Size
S05
S12
S15
S20
S30
Model
BRAKING RESISTORS
7.5
5
5.0
5.0
4.2
4.2
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
Min.
Applicable
Resistor
(
)
25.0
25.0
25.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
15.0
10.0
10.0
Type
2*100
-350W
2*56
-350W
2*56
-350W
4*100
-350W
4*100
-350W
25
-1800W
25
-1800W
15
-2200W
2*25
-1800W
2*25
-1800W
2*15
-2200W
5
-4000W
5
-8000W
5
-8000W
5
-8000W
5
-8000W
3.3
-12000W
3.3
-12000W
3.3
-12000W
3.3
-12000W
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
IP55
IP55
IP55
IP55
IP55
IP54
IP54
IP54
IP54
IP54
IP54
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
A
A
A
B
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
A
A
B
B
B
B
Value
(
)
7.5
5
5
5
5
5
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
50
28
28
25
25
25
25
15
12.5
12.5
USER MANUAL
Wire crosssection mm 2 (AWG)
2.5(14)
6(10)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
4(12)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
36/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.1.3. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 50% Class 2T
BRAKING RESISTORS
Size Model Min. Applicable
Resistor (
)
Type
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
Value
(
)
Wire crosssection mm 2 (AWG)
2.5(14)
S05
S12
S15
S20
S30
0007
0008
0010
0013
0015
0016
0020
0023
0033
0037
0040
0049
0060
0067
0074
0086
0113
0129
0150
0162
25.0
25.0
25.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
15.0
10.0
10.0
6.6
6.6
5.0
5.0
4.2
4.2
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
50
-1100W
25
-1800W
25
-1800W
25
-4000W
25
-4000W
25
-4000W
20
-4000W
20
-4000W
10
-8000W
10
-8000W
6.6
-12000W
6.6
-12000W
6.6
-12000W
2*10
-8000W
2*10
-8000W
2*10
-8000W
2*6.6
-12000W
2*6.6
-12000W
3*10
-12000W
3*10
-12000W
IP55
IP54
IP54
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
50
25
25
25
25
25
20
20
10
10
6.6
6.6
6.6
5
5
5
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
4(12)
6(10)
10(8)
10(8)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
16(6)
16(6)
10(8)
10(8)
Type of connection:
A One resistor
B Two or multiple parallel-connected resistors
CAUTION
The cable cross-sections given in the table relate to the cable connecting each individual braking resistor. For example, if a braking resistor is connected to N.2 parallel-connected resistors, the cable cross-section in the table is the one for each resistor connected to the braking unit.
37/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.1.4. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 10% - Class 4T
BRAKING RESISTORS
Size Model Min. Applicable
Resistor (
)
Type
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
S05
S12
S15
S20
0060
0067
0074
0086
0113
0129
S30
0150
0162
Type of connection:
A - One resistor
0005
0007
0009
0011
0014
0016
0017
0020
0025
0030
0034
0036
0040
0049
20
20
20
20
15
10
50
40
40
40
50
50
50
50
6
6
5
5
10
10
7.5
7.5
75
-550W
75
-550W
50
-1100W
50
-1100W
50
-1100W
50
-1500W
50
-1500W
50
-1500W
25
-1800W
25
-1800W
20
-4000W
20
-4000W
15
-4000W
15
-4000W
10
-8000W
10
-8000W
10
-8000W
10
-8000W
6.6
-12000W
6.6
-12000W
5
-16000W
5
-16000W
IP54
IP54
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP33
IP33
IP55
IP55
IP55
IP54
IP54
IP54
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Value
(
)
25
25
20
20
15
15
50
50
50
50
75
75
50
50
6.6
6.6
5
5
10
10
10
10
USER MANUAL
Wire crosssection mm 2 (AWG)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
4(12)
4(12)
4(12)
4(12)
6(10)
6(10)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
16(6)
16(6)
38/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.1.5. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 20% - Class 4T
BRAKING RESISTORS
Size Model Min. Applicable
Resistor (
)
Type
S05
S12
S15
S20
S30
0005
0007
0009
0011
0014
0016
0017
0020
0025
0030
0034
0036
0040
0049
0060
0067
0074
0086
0113
0129
0150
0162
50
50
50
50
50
40
40
40
20
20
20
20
15
10
10
10
7.5
7.5
6
6
5
5
50
-1100W
50
-1100W
50
-1100W
50
-1500W
50
-1500W
50
-2200W
50
-2200W
50
-4000W
25
-4000W
25
-4000W
20
-4000W
20
-4000W
15
-8000W
10
-12000W
10
-12000W
10
-12000W
10
-16000W
10
-16000W
2*3.3
-8000W
2*3.3
-8000W
2*10
-12000W
2*10
-12000W
Type of connection:
A One resistor
B Two or multiple parallel-connected resistors
C Two series-connected resistors
Degree of Type of
Protection Connection
IP55
IP55
IP55
IP54
IP54
IP54
IP54
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP23
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP23
IP23
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
C
C
B
B
Value
(
)
15
10
10
10
25
25
20
20
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
10
10
6.6
6.6
5
5
Wire crosssection mm 2 (AWG)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
2.5(14)
6(10)
6(10)
6(10)
6(10)
10(8)
10(8)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
39/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.1.6. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 50% - Class 4T
BRAKING RESISTORS
Size Model Min. Applicable
Resistor (
)
Type
S05
S12
S15
S20
S30
0005
0007
0009
0011
0014
0016
0017
0020
0025
0030
0034
0036
0040
0049
0060
0067
0074
0086
0113
0129
0150
0162
50
50
50
50
50
40
40
40
20
20
20
20
15
10
10
10
7.5
7.5
6
6
5
5
50
-4000W
50
-4000W
50
-4000W
50
-4000W
50
-4000W
50
-8000W
50
-8000W
50
-8000W
20
-12000W
20
-12000W
20
-16000W
20
-16000W
15
-24000W
15
-24000W
10
-24000W
10
-24000W
2*15
-24000W
2*15
-24000W
6
-64000W
6
-64000W
5
-64000W
5
-64000W
Type of connection:
A - One resistor
B - Two or multiple parallel-connected resistors
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
A
A
B
A
A
A
B
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Value
(
)
20
15
15
10
10
7.5
7.5
6
6
5
5
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
20
20
20
USER MANUAL
Wire crosssection mm 2 (AWG)
4(12)
4(12)
4(12)
4(12)
4(12)
4(12)
4(12)
4(12)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
35(2)
35(2)
50(1/0)
50(1/0)
40/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.1.7. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 10% - Class 5T
BRAKING RESISTOR
Size Model Min. Applicable
Resistor (
)
Type
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
S14
0003
0004
0006
0012
0018
0019
0021
0022
S22
0024
0032
0042
0051
0062
0069
0076
0088
S32
0131
0164
Type of connection:
A One resistor
40
40
25
25
20
12
12
12
120
120
60
60
60
12
8
8
5
5
250
-1100W
180
-1100W
120
-1800W
100
-2200W
82
-4000W
60
-4000W
45
-4000W
45
-4000W
30
-4000W
22
-8000W
22
-8000W
18
-8000W
15
-12000W
12
-12000W
10
-12000W
8.2
-16000W
6.6
-24000W
5
-24000W
IP55
IP55
IP55
IP55
IP20
IP20
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Value
(
)
30
22
22
18
15
12
10
8.2
6.6
5
250
180
120
100
82
60
45
45
Wire crosssection mm 2 (AWG)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
41/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.1.8. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 20% - Class 5T
BRAKING RESISTOR
Size Model Min. Applicable
Resistor (
)
Type
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
S14
S22
0003
0004
0006
0012
0018
0019
0021
0022
0024
0032
0042
0051
0062
S32
0069
0076
0088
0131
0164
Type of connection:
A One resistor
25
25
20
12
12
12
12
8
8
5
5
120
120
60
60
60
40
40
250
-1500W
180
-1500W
120
-4000W
100
-4000W
82
-4000W
60
-4000W
45
-8000W
45
-8000W
30
-8000W
22
-12000W
22
-12000W
18
-12000W
15
-16000W
12
-16000W
10
-24000W
8.2
-24000W
6.6
-32000W
5
-48000W
IP55
IP55
IP20
IP20
IP23
IP23
IP20
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Value
(
)
45
30
22
22
18
15
250
180
120
100
82
60
45
12
10
8.2
6.6
5
USER MANUAL
Wire crosssection mm 2 (AWG)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
16(6)
16(6)
25(3)
25(3)
42/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.1.9. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 50% - Class 5T
BRAKING RESISTOR
Size Model Min. Applicable
Resistor (
)
Type
S14
S22
0003
0004
0006
0012
0018
0019
0021
0022
0024
0032
0042
0051
0062
120
120
60
60
60
40
40
25
25
20
12
12
12
S32
0069
0076
0088
0131
12
8
8
5
0164 5
Type of connection:
A One resistor
B Two series-connected resistors
250
-2200W
180
-4000W
120
-4000W
100
-4000W
82
-8000W
60
-8000W
45
-12000W
45
-12000W
30
-16000W
22
-16000W
22
-24000W
18
-24000W
15
-32000W
12
-48000W
10
-48000W
8.2
-64000W
6.6
-64000W
2x10
-48000W
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
IP55
IP20
IP23
IP23
IP20
IP23
IP20
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
Value
(
)
45
30
22
22
18
15
250
180
120
100
82
60
45
12
10
8.2
6.6
5
Wire crosssection mm 2 (AWG)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
25(3)
25(3)
50(1/0)
50(1/0)
43/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.1.10. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 10% - Class 6T
BRAKING RESISTOR
Size Model Min. Applicable
Resistor (
)
Type
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
S14
S22
0003
0004
0006
0012
0018
0019
0021
0022
0024
0032
0042
0051
0062
S32
0069
0076
0088
0131
0164
Type of connection:
A One resistor
30
30
25
15
15
15
15
10
10
6
6
150
150
80
80
80
50
50
250
-1500W
180
-2200W
150
-2200W
120
-4000W
82
-4000W
60
-4000W
60
-4000W
45
-4000W
30
-8000W
30
-8000W
22
-8000W
18
-12000W
15
-12000W
15
-12000W
10
-16000W
10
-24000W
6.6
-24000W
6
-32000W
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP55
IP55
IP55
IP20
IP20
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Value
(
)
60
45
30
30
22
18
250
180
150
120
82
60
15
15
10
10
6.6
6
USER MANUAL
Wire crosssection mm 2 (AWG)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
44/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.1.11. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 20% - Class 6T
Size Model
S14
S22
0003
0004
0006
0012
0018
0019
0021
0022
0024
0032
0042
0051
0062
S32
0069
0076
0088
0131
0164
Type of connection:
A One resistor
Min. Applicable
Resistor (
)
30
30
25
15
15
15
15
10
10
6
6
150
150
80
80
80
50
50
Type
250
-2200W
180
-4000W
150
-4000W
120
-4000W
82
-4000W
60
-4000W
60
-8000W
45
-8000W
30
-8000W
30
-12000W
22
-12000W
18
-16000W
15
-16000W
15
-16000W
10
-24000W
10
-32000W
6.6
-48000W
6
-48000W
BRAKING RESISTOR
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP55
IP20
IP20
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Value
(
)
60
45
30
30
22
18
15
250
180
150
120
82
60
15
10
10
6.6
6
Wire crosssection mm 2 (AWG)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
16(6)
16(6)
25(3)
25(3)
45/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.1.12. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 50% - Class 6T
BRAKING RESISTOR
Size Model Min. Applicable
Resistor (
)
Type
S14
0003
0004
0006
0012
0018
0019
0021
0022
150
150
80
80
80
50
50
30
S22
0024
0032
0042
0051
0062
30
25
15
15
15
0069
0076
15
10
0088 10
S32
0131
0164
6
6
Type of connection:
A One resistor
C Two series-connected resistors
250
-4000W
180
-4000W
150
-4000W
120
-8000W
82
-8000W
60
-8000W
60
-12000W
45
-16000W
30
-16000W
30
-24000W
22
-24000W
18
-32000W
15
-48000W
15
-48000W
10
-64000W
10
-64000W
2x3
-48000W
2x3
-48000W
Degree of
Protection
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP20
IP23
IP23
IP20
IP23
IP23
Type of
Connection
A
A
A
C
C
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Value
(
)
30
22
18
15
15
10
10
6
6
250
180
150
120
82
60
60
45
30
USER MANUAL
Wire crosssection mm 2 (AWG)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
25(3)
25(3)
50(1/0)
50(1/0)
46/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.2. Braking Unit (BU200 2T-4T) for S41-S51 and S60-S60P
An external braking unit is available for sizes S60 2T-4T from S41 to S60P.
The BU200 is an Open Type Equipment – degree of protection IP00 – that can be installed inside another enclosure featuring degree of protection IP3X as a minimum requirement.
Transporting, handling and unpacking the braking unit is covered in the general instructions given in the
“Transport and Handling” and “Unpacking”sections in the Installation Guide.
3.2.1. Delivery Check
Make sure that the equipment is not damaged and it complies with the equipment you ordered by referring to its front nameplate (see figure below).
If the equipment is damaged, contact the supplier or the insurance company concerned.
If the equipment does not comply with the one you ordered, please contact the supplier as soon as possible.
If the equipment is stored before being started, make sure that temperatures range from –25°C
+70°C and that relative humidity is <95% (non-condensing).
The equipment guarantee covers any manufacturing defect. The manufacturer has no responsibility for possible damages due to the equipment transportation or unpacking. The manufacturer is not responsible for possible damages or faults caused by improper and irrational uses; wrong installation; improper conditions of temperature, humidity, or the use of corrosive substances. The manufacturer is not responsible for possible faults due to the equipment operation at values exceeding the equipment ratings and is not responsible for consequential and accidental damages.
The braking unit BU200 is covered by a two-year guarantee starting from the date of delivery.
47/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.2.1.1. Nameplate for BU200 2T-4T
3
2
USER MANUAL
1
4
5
Figure 14: Nameplate for BU200 2T-4T
Numbered items in the figure above:
1. Model:
2. Voltage class:
3. Supply ratings:
4. Output current:
BU200 – braking unit 2T-4T
List of applicable voltage classes
200÷800 Vdc (DC supply voltage produced by the inverter terminals)
80A (average) – continuous average current in output cables
130A (max.) – max. current in output cables (may be held for the time given in column “Max. Duration of Continuous Operation” in the resistors tables below)
5. Min. load: Minimum value of the resistor to be connected to the output terminals (see application tables below)
48/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.2.2. Operation
The basic size of the braking unit can be used with a braking resistor avoiding exceeding a max. instant current of 130 A, corresponding to a maximum braking power of approx. 97.5 kW (class 4T) and to an average power of 60 kW (class 4T). For applications requiring higher braking power values, multiple braking units can be parallel-connected in order to obtain a greater braking power based on the number of braking units.
To ensure that the overall braking power is evenly distributed to all braking units, configure one braking unit in MASTER mode and the remaining braking units in SLAVE mode, and connect the output signal of the
MASTER unit (terminal 8 in connector M1) to the forcing input for all SLAVE braking units (terminal 4 in connector M1).
3.2.3. Configuration Jumpers
Jumpers located on the control board for BU200 are used for the configuration of the braking unit .
Their positions and functions are as follows:
Jumper Function
J1
J2
If on, it configures the SLAVE operating mode
If on, it configures the MASTER operating mode
NOTE
Either one of the t wo jumpers must always be “on”. Avoid enabling both jumpers at a time.
Jumper Function
J3 To be activated for class 4T inverters and mains voltage [380 Vac to 480 Vac]
J4
J5
J6
To be activated for class 2T inverters and mains voltage [200 Vac to 240 Vac]
To be activated for class 4T inverters and mains voltage [481 Vac to 500 Vac]
To be activated for special adjustment requirements
NOTE
One of the four jumpers must always be “ON”. Avoid enabling two or more jumpers at a time.
J1 J2
J3 J4 J5 J6
Figure 15: Positions of BU200 configuration jumpers
49/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
DANGER
Before changing jumper positions, remove voltage from the equipment and wait at least 20 minutes.
CAUTION
Never set jumpers to a voltage value lower than the inverter supply voltage. This will avoid continuous activation of the braking unit.
3.2.4. Adjusting Trimmers
Four trimmers are installed on the inverter control board. Depending on the jumper configuration, each trimmer allows the fine-tuning of the braking unit voltage threshold trip.
Jumper-trimmer matching is as follows:
Mains voltage [Vac]
200÷240 (2T)
380÷480 (4T)
481÷500 (4T)
230÷500
Jumper
J4
J3
J5
J6
Trimmer
RV3
RV2
RV4
RV5
Minimum braking voltage [Vdc]
339
700
730
464
Rated braking voltage [Vdc]
364
764
783
650
Maximum braking voltage [Vdc]
426
826
861
810
CAUTION
The maximum values in the table above are theoretical values for special applications only. Their use must be authorized by Enertronica Santerno S.p.A..
For standard applications, never change the factory-set rated value.
RV2 RV3 RV4 RV5
50/ 312
Figure 16: Positions of BU200 adjusting trimmers
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.2.5. Indicator LEDs
The indicator LEDs below are located on the front part of the braking units:
OK LED Normally “on”; the equipment is running smoothly. This LED turns off due to overcurrent or power circuit failure.
B LED Normally off”; this LED turns on when the braking unit activates.
TMAX LED Normally “off”; this LED turns on when the thermoswitch located on the heat sink of the braking unit trips; if overtemperature protection trips, the equipment is locked until temperature drops below the alarm threshold.
B
LED
TMAX
LED
OK
LED
3.2.6. Ratings
Figure 17: Position of the Indicator LEDs
SIZE
Max. Braking
Current (A)
Average Braking
Current (A)
Sound Pressure
(dB)
INVERTER SUPPLY VOLTAGE and
JUMPER POSITIONS
200-
240Vac
(class 2T)
380-
480Vac
(class 4T)
481-
500Vac
(class 4T)
J4 J3 J5
BU200 130 80 55
MIN. BRAKING RESISTOR (
)
3 6 6
51/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.2.7. Installing the BU200
USER MANUAL
3.2.7.1. Environmental Requirements for the BU200 Installation, Storage and Transport
Maximum surrounding air temperature
–10 to +40°C with no derating from +40°C to +55°C with a 2% derating of the rated current for each degree beyond +40°C.
Ambient temperatures for storage and transport
–25°C to +70°C.
Installation environment
Pollution degree 2 or better (according to EN 61800-5-1).
Do not install in direct sunlight and in places exposed to conductive dust, corrosive gases, vibrations, water sprinkling or dripping (depending on IP ratings); do not install in salty environments.
Altitude
Max. altitude for installation 2000 m a.s.l. For installation above 2000 m and up to 4000 m, please contact Enertronica Santerno S.p.A..
Operating ambient humidity
Storage ambient humidity
Ambient humidity during transport
Above 1000 m, derate the rated current by 1% every 100 m.
From 5% to 95%, from 1g/m 3 to 29g/m 3 , non-condensing and nonfreezing (class 3K3 according to EN 61800-5-1).
From 5% to 95%, from 1g/m 3 to 29g/m 3 , non-condensing and nonfreezing (class 1K3 according to EN 61800-5-1).
Max. 95%, up to 60g/m 3 ; condensation may appear when the equipment is not running (class 2K3 according to EN 61800-5-1).
Storage and operating atmospheric pressure
From 86 to 106 kPa (classes 3K3 and 1K4 according to EN 61800-5-1).
Atmospheric pressure during transport
From 70 to 106 kPa (class 2K3 according to EN 61800-5-1) .
CAUTION
Ambient conditions strongly affect the inverter life. Do not install the equipment in places that do not have the above-mentioned ambient conditions.
3.2.7.2. Cooling System and Dissipated Power
The braking unit is provided with a heat sink reaching a max. temperature of 80°C.
Make sure that the bearing surface for the braking unit is capable of withstanding high temperatures. Max. dissipated power is approx. 150 W and depends on the braking cycle required for the operating conditions of the load connected to the motor.
The max. temperature alarm for the braking unit shall be used as a digital signal to control the inverter stop.
CAUTION
52/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.2.7.3. Mounting
The braking unit (BU200) must be installed in an upright position inside a cabinet;
Make sure to allow a min. clearance of 5 cm on both types and 10 cm on top and bottom; use cableglands to maintain IP20 rating;
Fix the BU200 with four MA4 screws.
W
139
Dimensions (mm)
H
247
D
196
Distance between fixing points
(mm)
X
120
Y
237
Type of screws
M4
Weight (kg)
4
Figure 18: Dimensions and fixing points of BU200
53/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.2.7.4. Lay-Out of Power Terminals and Signal Terminals
USER MANUAL
Remove the cover of the braking unit to gain access to its terminal blocks. Just loosen the four fixing screws of the cover located on the front side and on the bottom side of the braking unit.
Loosen the fastening screws to slide off the cover from above.
Power terminals consist of copper bars, that can be reached through the three front holes.
Decisive voltage class C according to EN 61800-5-1
Terminal N.
Type of terminal
Cable cross-section
(mm 2 )
Connection
Inverter DC side connected to terminal + + 20 Copper bar
B
–
21
22
Terminal block M1:
Copper bar
Copper bar
25
See Resistors table
25
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
N. Name Description Notes
Connection to braking resistor
Inverter DC side connected to terminal
Features Cable crosssection (mm 2 )
–
M1 : 1
M1 : 2
M1 : 3
M1 : 4
0VE
Vin
Sin
Not used
Signal zero volt
Modulation input (0
10
V)
Logic input for signal sent from Master
To be used for special applications
Control board zero volt
Rin=10k
Max. 30V
0.5
1
0.5
1
0.5
1
M1 : 8
M1 : 9
M1 :10
Mout
Digital output for Slave command signal
Not used
Not used
The SLAVE brakes if a signal > 6 V is sent
High level output when the Master is braking
PNP output (0-15V) 0.5
1
Decisive voltage class C according to EN 61800-5-1
M1 : 5
M1 : 6
M1 : 7
RL-NO
RL-C
RL-NC
NO contact of
“thermoswitch on” relay The relay energizes
Common of the contact of “thermoswitch on” relay
NC contact of
“thermoswitch on” relay when an overtemperature alarm trips for
BU200
250Vac, 5A
30Vdc, 5A
0.5
1
0.5
1
0.5
1
54/ 312
Figure 19: Terminals in BU200
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.2.7.5. Wiring
The braking unit must be connected to the inverter and the braking resistor.
The braking unit is connected directly to the inverter terminals (or copper bars for sizes greater than S32) of the DC voltage output, while the braking resistor must be connected to the inverter on one side and to the braking unit on the other side.
The wiring diagram is shown in the figure below:
Figure 20: Connecting one BU200 to the inverter
NOTE
NOTE
The braking resistor must be connected between terminal B of BU200 and terminal + of the inverter. In that way, no sudden variation in braking current occurs in the supply line between the inverter and BU200. In order to minimize electromagnetic radiated emissions when BU200 is operating, the loop obtained from the wiring connecting terminal + of the inverter, the braking resistor, terminals B and – of BU200 and terminal – of the inverter should be as short as possible.
We recommend installing a 50A fuse with DC voltage of at least 700 Vdc (type
URDC SIBA series, NH1 fuse) provided with a safety contact.
CAUTION Link the safety contact of the fuse being used with the external alarm of BU200.
3.2.7.6. Master – Slave Connection
The Master-Slave connection must be used when multiple braking units are connected to the same inverter.
An additional connection must be done between the Master output signal (terminal 8 in M1) and the Slave input signal (terminal 4 in M1); zero volt of the signal connector in the Master module (terminal 2 in M1) must be connected to zero volt of the signal connector in the Slave module (terminal 2 in M1).
The connection of more than two modules must always be done by configuring one module like a master and the other modules like slaves. Use configuration jumpers accordingly.
The max. temperature alarm of the braking unit must be used as a digital signal to control the inverter stop.
All contacts (voltage-free contacts) in all braking modules may be series-connected as shown in the diagram below:
55/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
Figure 21: Master – Slave multiple connection
NOTE
NEVER connect signal zero volt (terminal 2 in M1) to zero volt of the inverter power supply voltage ( –).
NOTE
We recommend installing a 50A fuse with DC current of at least 700 Vdc (type
URDC SIBA series, NH1 fuse) provided with a safety contact.
CAUTION Link the safety contact of the fuse being used with the external alarm of BU200.
3.2.8. Earth Bonding of the BU200
For the earth bonding of the BU200, please refer to the general instructions given in section Inverter and
Motor Ground Connection in the Installation Guide.
3.2.9. Scheduled Maintenance of the BU200
For the scheduled maintenance of the BU200, please refer to the general instructions given in section
Inverter Scheduled Maintenance in the Installation Guide.
DANGER
Once power supply has been cut off from the drive connected to the BU200, wait at least 20 minutes before operating on the DC circuits to give the capacitors time to discharge.
56/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.2.10. Braking Resistors for BU200 2T
Refer to the tables below for the connection of the braking resistors.
NOTE
The wire cross-sections given in the table relate to one wire per braking resistor.
NOTE
The Part Numbers of the braking resistors in the tables are given in the
Available Braking Resistors section.
HOT SURFACE The braking resistor case may reach 200°C based on the operating cycle.
CAUTION
CAUTION
The cables of the braking resistors shall have insulation features and heatresistance features suitable for the application. The minimum rated voltage of the cables must be 450/700 V.
The power dissipated by the braking resistors may be the same as the rated power of the connected motor multiplied by the braking duty-cycle; use a proper air-cooling system. Do not install braking resistors near heatsensitive equipment or objects.
Do not connect to the inverter any braking resistor with an Ohm value lower than the value given in the tables.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Never exceed the maximum operating time of the resistor as given in the
Available Braking Resistors section.
3.2.10.1. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 10% - Class 2T
Size
S41
S51
S60
Braking Resistors
0180
0202
0217
0260
0313
0367
0402
0457
0524
Drive
Model
Braking
Unit
Q.ty
2
4
5
5
6
6
2
3
3
2
2
3
3
4
5
5
6
6
Q.ty
Resistors to be used
Recommended
Value (
)
Power
(kW)
Degree of
Protection
Type of connection
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
M
M
N
N
O
P
P
Q
Q
Value
(
)
Wire Crosssection mm 2
(AWG/kcmils)
1.65
1.65
1.1
1.1
0.82
0.66
0.66
0.55
0.55
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
10(8)
57/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.2.10.2. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 20% - Class 2T
USER MANUAL
Braking Resistors
Size
S41
S51
S60
Drive
Model
Braking
Unit
0180
0202
0217
0260
0313
0367
0402
0457
0524
Q.ty
2
2
3
3
4
5
5
6
6
Q.ty
5
5
6
6
2
2
3
3
4
Resistors to be used
Recommended
Value (
)
Power
(kW)
Degree of
Protection
Type of connection
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
8
8
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
P
P
Q
Q
M
M
N
N
O
Value
(
)
Wire Crosssection mm 2
(AWG/kcmils)
1.65
1.65
1.1
1.1
0.82
0.66
0.66
0.55
0.55
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
3.2.10.3. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 50% - Class 2T
Braking Resistors
Size
Drive
Model
Braking
Unit
Resistors to be used
Type of connection
Q.ty
Q.ty
Recommended
Value (
)
Power
(kW)
Degree of
Protection
S41
S51
S60
0180
0202
0217
0260
0313
0367
0402
0457
0524
2
5
5
6
6
2
3
3
4
4
4
6
6
8
10
10
12
12
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
V
V
X
X
Y
W
W
Z
Z
MTwo units, each of them including a braking module connected to its braking resistor
Value
(
)
1.65
1.65
1.1
1.1
0.82
0.66
0.66
0.55
0.55
NThree units, each of them including a braking module connected to its braking resistor
OFour units, each of them including a braking module connected to its braking resistor
PFive units, each of them including a braking module connected to its braking resistor
QSix units, each of them including a braking module connected to its braking resistor
Wire Crosssection mm 2
(AWG/kcmils)
25(4)
25(4)
25(4)
25(4)
25(4)
25(4)
25(4)
25(4)
25(4)
VTwo units, each of them including a braking module connected to two parallel-connected braking resistors
XThree units, each of them including a braking module connected to two parallel-connected braking resistors
YFour units, each of them including a braking module connected to two parallel-connected braking resistors
WFive units, each of them including a braking module connected to two parallel-connected braking resistors
ZSix units, each of them including a braking module connected to two parallel-connected braking resistors
CAUTION
The cable cross-sections given in the table relate to the cable connecting each individual braking resistor. For example, if a braking resistor is connected to N.2 parallel-connected resistors, the cable cross-section in the table is the one for each resistor connected to the braking unit.
58/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.2.11. Braking Resistors for BU200 4T
NOTE
The wire cross-sections given in the table relate to one wire per braking resistor.
NOTE
The Part Numbers of the braking resistors in the tables are given in the
Available Braking Resistors section.
CAUTION
The cables of the braking resistors shall have insulation features and heatresistance features suitable for the application. The minimum rated voltage of the cables must be 0.6/1kV.
HOT
SURFACE
Based on the functioning cycle, the surface of the braking resistors may reach 200°C.
CAUTION
CAUTION
The power dissipated by the braking resistors may be the same as the rated power of the connected motor multiplied by the braking duty-cycle; use a proper air-cooling system. Do not install braking resistors near heatsensitive equipment or objects.
Do not connect to the inverter any braking resistor with an Ohm value lower than the value given in the tables.
CAUTION
Never exceed the maximum operating time of the resistor as given in the
Available Braking Resistors section.
3.2.11.1. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 10% - Class 4T
Braking Resistors
Size
S41
0180
0202
0217
0260
0313
0367 S51
0402
0457
S60
0524
S60P 0598P
Drive
Model
Braking
Unit
Q.ty
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
6
3
3
4
2
2
3
4
4
5
6
Q.ty
Resistors to be used
Recommended
Value (
)
Power
(kW)
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
M
M
N
N
N
O
O
O
P
Q
Value
(
)
Wire Crosssection mm 2
(AWG/kcmils)
3.3
3.3
2.2
2.2
2.2
1.65
1.65
1.65
1.32
1.1
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
59/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.2.11.2. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 20% - Class 4T
USER MANUAL
Braking Resistors
Size
Drive
Model
Braking
Unit
S41
S51
0180
0202
0217
0260
0313
0367
0402
S60
0457
0524
S60P 0598P
Q.ty
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
6
3.2.11.3.
3
3
4
4
2
2
3
4
5
6
Q.ty
Resistors to be used
Recommended
Value (
)
Power
(kW)
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
M
M
N
N
N
O
O
O
P
Q
Value
(
)
Wire Crosssection mm 2
(AWG/kcmils)
3.3
3.3
2.2
2.2
2.2
1.65
1.65
1.65
1.32
1.1
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
Applications with DUTY CYCLE 50% - Class 4T
Braking Resistors
Size
Drive
Model
Braking
Unit
Q.ty
Q.ty
Resistors to be used
Recommended
Value (
)
Power
(kW)
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
Value
(
)
Wire Crosssection mm 2 (AWG or kcmils)
S41
0180
0202
0217
0260
0313
S51 0367
0402
0457
S60
0524
S60P 0598P
6
7
7
8
8
3
3
4
4
5
6
7
7
3
3
4
4
5
8
8
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
N
N
O
O
P
Q
R
R
S
S
MTwo units, each of them including a braking module connected to its braking resistor
NThree units, each of them including a braking module connected to its braking resistor
OFour units, each of them including a braking module connected to its braking resistor
3.3
3.3
2.5
2.5
2.0
1.7
1.4
1.4
1.25
1.25
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
16(6)
PFive units, each of them including a braking module connected to its braking resistor
QSix units, each of them including a braking module connected to its braking resistor
RSeven units, each of them including a braking module connected to its braking resistor
SEight units, each of them including a braking module connected to its braking resistor
CAUTION
The cable cross-sections given in the table relate to the cable connecting each individual braking resistor. For example, if a braking resistor is connected to N.2 parallel-connected resistors, the cable cross-section in the table is the one for each resistor connected to the braking unit.
60/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.3. Braking Units for S41..S52 and Their Parallel Configuration and Drives
S60-S60P (BU600 4T-5T-6T)
The BU600 4T-5T-6T braking unit is available for the following sizes:
•
S41 / S42 / S51 / S52;
•
Parallel configuration of S43 (2 x S41) / S53 (2 x S51) / S55 (3 x S51) / S44 (2 x S42) / S54 (2 x S52)
/ S56 (3 x S52);
•
S60 / S60P.
The BU600 may also be used as a stand-alone braking unit to be connected to a suitable DC BUS.
The BU600 is an Open Type Equipment – degree of protection IP00 – that can be installed inside another enclosure featuring degree of protection IP3X as a minimum requirement.
Transporting, handling and unpacking the braking unit is covered in the general instructions given in the
“Transport and Handling” and “Unpacking” sections in the Installation Guide.
3.3.1. Delivery Check
Make sure that the equipment is not damaged and that it complies with the equipment you ordered by referring to the nameplate located on the inverter front part (see figure below). If the equipment is damaged, contact the supplier or the insurance company concerned. If the equipment does not comply with the one you ordered, please contact the supplier as soon as possible.
If the equipment is stored before being started, make sure that temperatures range from –25°C to +70°C and that relative humidity is <95% (non-condensing).
The equipment guarantee covers any manufacturing defect. The manufacturer has no responsibility for possible damages occurred while shipping or unpacking the equipment. The manufacturer is not responsible for possible damages or faults caused by improper and irrational uses; wrong installation; improper conditions of temperature, humidity, or the use of corrosive substances. The manufacturer is not responsible for possible faults due to the equipment operation at values exceeding the equipment ratings. The manufacturer is not responsible for consequential and accidental damages.
The braking unit is covered by a two-year guarantee starting from the date of delivery.
3.3.1.1. Nameplate for BU600 4T-5T-6T
1
2
3
4
Figure 22: Nameplate for BU600 4T-5T-6T
61/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
1. Model:
2. Supply ratings:
3. Output current:
4. Min. load:
USER MANUAL
BU600 – Braking module 4T-5T-6T
DC supply voltage deriving directly from the inverter terminals or the DC Bus connected to the BU600)
300A (average) – continuous average current in output cables
600A (max.) – max. current in output cables (may be held for all the time given in column “Max. Duration of Continuous Operation” in the resistors tables below)
Minimum value of the resistor to be connected to the output terminals (see application tables below)
3.3.2. Operating Mode of the BU600 Connected to Drives S41..S52 and their
Configuration in Parallel
As a factory setting, the braking module is powered and controlled directly by the inverter (parameter
P200=2:Slave) [*].
As a factory setting, the signals on terminal M1 of the braking module are to be
NOTE connected to the signals on the BRAKE connector of the inverter using the cable supplied.
[*]
If this factory setting it so be changed, alter parameter P200 from the RemoteDrive (see
Figure 23 : BRAKE connector supplied with the drive
62/ 312
Figure 24: Cable connecting the drive to braking unit BU600
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.3.3. Operating Mode of the BU600 when Connected to S60 and S60P Drives or a
DC-BUS Made UP of Sinus Penta /Penta Marine Drives from Different Sizes
The braking unit operates independently, i.e. it is not powered and controlled by the drive.
NOTE
In order to make the braking unit operate independently, access the RemoteDrive and change parameter P200 from 2:Slave to 1:Master; also, change parameters P201 and
P202
based on the voltage class of the connected drive (see BU600 – Programming
This voltage class is 4T for S60 and S60P drives.
NOTE The cable supplied is not required.
Parameters P201 and P202 are to be changed in case of applications that for 4T class drives require rated drive supply voltage exceeding 480Vac or that are power supplied by the DC bus from the Regenerative drive. In any case, braking voltage and hysteresis must be consistent with drive parameter C008 (see the
Sinus Penta /
Penta Marine
Parameter
BU600 Parameters
C008
P001 Voltage
Class
P200 Operating Mode
P201 Braking voltage (V)
P202 Hysteresis
(V)
0: [ 200 ÷ 240 ] V
1: 2T Regen.
2: [ 380 ÷ 480 ] V
3: [ 481 ÷ 500 ] V
4: 4T Regen.
5: [ 500 ÷ 575 ] V
6: 5T Regen.
7: [ 575 ÷ 690 ] V
8: 6T Regen
Not considered
4T
5T
6T
---------------
0: Master+Slave
1: Master
2: Slave (default)
0: Master+Slave
1: Master
2: Slave (default)
0: Master+Slave
1: Master
2: Slave (default)
--------------------
764.6 (default)
956.2 (default)
1103.2 (default)
-------------------
5 (default)
10 (default)
10 (default)
3.3.4. BU600 Used as a General-purpose Braking Unit to be Connected to a DC-Bus
The BU600 may be used in all applications featuring a DC-Bus from which energy is to be taken during particular working conditions (presence of alternating loads, electric traction, lifting, etc..). This operating mode is available, but is to be authorized by Enertronica Santerno S.p.A..
63/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.3.5. Diagnostics
The following diagnostic LEDs are provided:
USER MANUAL
Figure 25: Diagnostic LEDs
+24V, –24V: Both “ on” when the braking unit is powered on
DSP RUN [*]: “On” when the on-board microcontroller is on
BRAKE ON: “On” when the braking IGBT is ON
TYPE OF FAULT [*]:
Code of the active fault indicated by the flashing LED. Please refer to the BU600 –
BRAKE FAULT: “On” when a fault occurs; it turns off only when the RESET input in terminal board M2 is activated.
OTBR FAULT: “On” when the thermoswitch trips (it comes on in conjunction with the BRAKE FAULT LED).
It turns off when the fault condition is reset.
OTBU FAULT: IGBT thermal protection tripped (it comes on in conjunction with the BRAKE FAULT LED). It turns off when the fault condition is reset.
[*] NOTE This function is available from software version 1.000.
Event
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Description
A001 User alarm or
Checksum Fault or
Watchdog Fault
Brake short circuit
IGBT fault
HW Overcurrent
Overvoltage
Driver board overtemperature or
DSP overtemperature
DC Link Undervoltage
Fan1 inactive
Fan2 inactive
Heatsink overheated
Overload braking resistor
Alarm ID
A001+A002+A013
A011
A004
A005
A012
A008+A009
A007
W001
W002
W003
W004
Flashing
Always on
1 blink at 1 Hz
2 blinks at 1 Hz
3 blinks at 1 Hz
4 blinks at 1 Hz
5 blink at 1 Hz
6 blinks at 1 Hz
7 blinks at 1 Hz
8 blinks at 1 Hz
9 blinks at 1 Hz
10 blinks at 1 Hz
OFF
4.5s
4.5s
4.5s
4.5s
4.5s
4.5s
4.5s
4.5s
4.5s
4.5s
Table 3: Alarm ID and Type of fault on BU600 with the TYPE OF FAULT LED
64/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.3.6. Specifications
MODEL
BU600 4T
BU600 5T
BU600 6T
Max.
Braking
Current
(A)
650
650
600
Average
Braking
Current
(A)
300
300
300
Drive Supply Voltage
380-500Vac
500-600Vac
600-690Vac
Min.
Braking
Resistor
(
)
1.2
1.6
1.8
Power
Dissipated
(at
Average
Braking
Current)
(W)
700
700
700
Sound
Pressure
(dB)
60
60
60
3.3.7. Installing the BU600
3.3.7.1. Environmental Requirements for the BU600 Installation, Storage and Transport
Maximum surrounding air temperature
–10 to +40°C with no derating
From +40°C to +55°C with a 2% derating of the rated current for each degree beyond +40°C.
Ambient temperatures for storage and transport
–25°C to +70°C
Installation environment
Pollution degree 2 or better (according to EN 61800-5-1).
Do not install in direct sunlight and in places exposed to conductive dust, corrosive gases, vibrations, water sprinkling or dripping; do not install in salty environments.
Altitude
Max. altitude for installation 2000 m a.s.l. For installation above 2000 m and up to 4000 m, please contact Enertronica
Santerno S.p.A..
Operating ambient humidity
Storage ambient humidity
Ambient humidity during transport
Above 1000 m, derate the rated current by 1% every 100 m.
From 5% to 95%, from 1g/m 3 to 29g/m 3 , non-condensing and non-freezing (class 3K3 according to EN 61800-5-1).
From 5% to 95%, from 1g/m 3 to 29g/m 3 , non-condensing and non-freezing (class 1K3 according to EN 61800-5-1).
Max. 95%, up to 60g/m 3 ; condensation may appear when the equipment is not running (class 2K3 according to EN
61800-5-1).
Storage and operating atmospheric pressure
From 86 to 106 kPa (classes 3K3 and 1K4 according to EN
61800-5-1).
Atmospheric pressure during transport
From 70 to 106 kPa (class 2K3 according to EN 61800-5-1) .
CAUTION
Ambient conditions strongly affect the inverter life. Do not install the equipment in places that do not have the above-mentioned ambient conditions.
65/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.3.7.2. Mounting the Braking Unit
USER MANUAL
The braking unit BU600 must be installed in upright position inside a cabinet. Its overall dimensions and fixing points are given in the figure below.
Dimensions (mm)
W
248
H
881.5
D
399
X
170
Fixing Points (mm)
Y
845
D1
12
D2
24
Type of
Screws
M8-M10
Weight
(kg)
72
66/ 312
Figure 26: Dimensions and fixing points of braking unit BU600
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
The location of the BU600 units inside the cabinet is dependent on the number of BUs to be installed.
A general criterion is to try to shorten the DC-bus connections as much as possible and to balance power absorption from the BU600 units and the relative braking resistors.
N.1 BU600 connected to S41, S42, S51, S52, S43 (2 x S41), S44 (2 x S42), S53 (2 x S51) up to size
0749 included, S60 and S60P
It is recommended that the BU600 is installed on the left of the drives.
N.2 BU600 units connected to S53 (2 x S51) from 0832 included, S55 (3 x S51), S54 (2 x S52) and to S56 (3 x S52) up to size 0960 included
Recommended installation:
The first BU600 on the left of the drives, and the second BU600 between the two drives for the sizes that require two drives;
The first BU600 on the left of the drives, and the second BU600 between the second and the third drive for the sizes that require three drives.
N.3 BU600 connected to S56 (3 x S52) size 1120:
Recommended installation:
The first BU600 on the left of the drives, the second BU600 between the first and the second drive, the third
BU600 between the second and the third drive.
3.3.7.3. Lay-Out of Power Terminals and Signal Terminals
Power connections
Link the braking module to the inverter and to the braking resistor as described below.
Decisive voltage class C according to EN 61800-5-1
Terminal Type
Tightening
Torque
(Nm)
Connection Bar Crosssection mm 2 (AWG/kcmils)
NOTES
+
B
–
Bus bar
Bus bar
Bus bar
30
30
30
240
(500kcmils)
See Resistors Table
240
(500kcmils)
To be connected to terminal 47/+ of the inverter and to one terminal of the braking resistor
To be connected to the remaining terminal of the braking resistor
To be connected to terminal 49/ – of the inverter
Table 4: BU600 Power terminals
67/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
Signal connections
Terminals M1 – Connect to the inverter using the cable supplied.
Terminal board specifications
Cable cross-section fitting the terminal mm 2 (AWG)
0.25÷1.5mm
2 (AWG 24-16)
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
Slave connected
N. Name Description I/O Features to
S41, S42, S51,
S52
1 BRAKE
Braking unit command signal
0-24V
(active at +24V)
2 0V Ground 0V
Figure 27: Power terminals
Tightening torque
(Nm)
0.22-0.25
Master connected to S60-S60P or a generalpurpose DC-bus
Slave connected to another BU600
Do not connect
To be connected to terminal 5 in the
Master BU600
To be connected to terminal 2 in another
BU600 (if any) operating in parallel
To be connected to terminal 2 in the
Master BU600
3
4 BU_PRES
5
6
7
8
BRERR
SLAVE
0V
CANL
CANH
Braking unit tripped
Braking unit present and ready to operate
Braking in progress
Ground
Unavailable
0-24V
(to +24V with braking unit tripped)
0-24V
(to +24V with braking unit present and ready to operate)
0-24V (to +24V with BU600 that is braking)
0V
-
-
To be connected to the brake terminals of the inverter using the cable supplied
Ground
-
-
To be used by a controller (if any) of the application
To be used by a controller (if any) of the application
To be connected to terminal 1 in another
BU600 (if any) operating in parallel
Ground
-
-
To be connected to terminal 1 in another
BU600 (if any) operating in parallel
Ground
-
-
68/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Terminals M2
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
N. Name Description I/O Features NOTES
Cable Crosssection Fitting the Terminal mm 2 (AWG)
Tightening
Torque
(Nm)
9 24VE
Auxiliary 24V voltage generated internally to the braking module
24V 100mA
Available to send the
Reset signal
0.25÷1.5mm
2
(AWG 24-16)
0.22-0.25
10 RESET
Braking module fault reset command
0-24V (active at
24V)
To be connected to
+24VE by means of a push-button for fault reset
0.25÷1.5mm
2
(AWG 24-16)
0.22-0.25
11 24VE
Auxiliary 24V voltage generated internally to the braking module
24V 10mA
To be connected to the thermoswitch in the braking resistor [*]
0.25÷1.5mm
2
(AWG 24-16)
0.22-0.25
12 PTR
Input for the braking resistor thermoswitch
0-24V (with +24V braking resistor
OK)
To be connected to the thermoswitch in the braking resistor [*]
0.25÷1.5mm
2
(AWG 24-16)
0.22-0.25
[*] NOTE
If more than one braking resistor is connected to the BU600, all the thermoswitches are to be series-connected. The thermoswitches are to be normally closed.
Terminals M3 (functions available from SW version 1.000)
Decisive voltage class C according to EN 61800-5-1
N. Name Description I/O Features NOTES
Cable Crosssection Fitting the
Terminal mm 2 (AWG)
Tightening
Torque
(Nm)
13
14
15
RL1-NC
RL1-C
RL1-NO
Braking unit present and ready to operate
6A/250Vac
6A/30Vdc
Relay energized with the braking unit present and ready to operate.
The relay reproduces the status of terminal 4 in M1.
Terminals M4 (functions available from SW version 1.000)
Decisive voltage class C according to EN 61800-5-1
0.2÷2.5mm
2 (AWG 24-
14)
0.5-0.6
N. Name Description I/O Features NOTES
Cable Crosssection Fitting the
Terminal mm 2 (AWG/kcmils)
Tightening
Torque
(Nm)
16
17
18
RL2-NC
RL2-C
RL2-NO
Braking unit tripped [*]
6A/250Vac
6A/30Vdc
Energized relay with braking unit tripped.
The relay reproduces the status of terminal 3 in M1.
It is recommended that this relay be used to protect braking resistors in case of BU600 fault.
0.2÷2.5mm
2 (AWG 24-
14)
0.5-0.6
69/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
[*] NOTE
As a factory setting, the relay energizes only if alarm A011 (Braking Unit
Short-circuit) has tripped. See BU600 – Programming Guide.
Serial port
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
The BU600 features RS-485 serial interface; for details on serial communications, please refer to the Serial
Communications section in this manual and to the BU600 – Programming Guide.
Figure 28: Signal terminals in the BU600
1. Serial port [*]
2. M1 - BRAKE terminals
3. M2 - Reset signal
4. M3 - BU detecting relay [*]
5. M4 - Alarm relay [*]
NOTE [*] Functions available from SW version 1.000.
70/ 312
USER MANUAL
3.3.7.4. Wiring Diagram of a BU600 Operating as a Slave
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 29: Wiring diagram of a single drive with braking unit BU600
71/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
3.3.7.5. Wiring Diagram of Two BU600 Operating as Slaves
SINUS PENTA/PENTA MARINE S51 drives operating in parallel.
BRAKING
RESISTOR
BRAKING
RESISTOR
PTR PTR
+
B
-
M1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 M2 1 2 3 4
47+ 49-
INVERTER
S51
+
B
-
CN BRAKE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 M1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 M2 1 2 3 4
47+ 49-
INVERTER
S51
CN BRAKE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RESET
Figure 30: Signal connections of two BU600 operating as slaves
S000834
72/ 312
USER MANUAL
L3
L2
L1
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
BU600 4T
M1 M2
41
R
42
S
43
T
S51 - 402
MASTER
CN
BRAKE
41
R
42
S
43
T
S51 - 402
SLAVE
BU600 4T
M1 M2
41
R
42
S
43
T
S51 - 402
SLAVE
-
B + GROUND
47 49 44
+
-
U
45
V
46
W
GROUND
47 49 44
+
-
U
45
V
46
W
-
B + GROUND
47 49 44
+
-
U
45
V
46
W
R R
BRAKING
RESISTOR
BRAKING
RESISTOR
S000833
U
3
M
V
W
MOTOR
Figure 31: Power connections and location of two BU600 operating as slaves
73/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
3.3.8. Earth Bonding of the BU600
For the earth bonding of the BU600, please refer to the general instructions given in section Inverter and
Motor Ground Connection in the Installation Guide.
3.3.9. Protecting the Braking Resistors
Based on their power and energy ratings, the braking resistors are capable of withstanding a maximum allowable power-on time and a given duty cycle. When operating as slaves, in order not to overload the resistors, the maximum allowable power-on time and a given duty cycle are to be set for the drive controlling
braking cycle (see the Available Braking Resistors section and the Programming Guide).
This solution might not be sufficient to protect the braking resistors. The following actions are therefore required:
Always connect the braking resistor thermoswitch to prevent overheating from occurring due to poor air circulation or wrong setting of the maximum duty cycle parameter;
Use the safety relay to cut off the power supply to the DC-bus connected to the braking module.
Should a short-circuit occur in the braking module, the braking resistors and the relevant connection cables are always live on the DC bus, thus leading to melting risk.
DANGER
Should a short-circuit occur in the braking module, the braking resistors and the relevant connection cables are always live on the DC bus, thus leading to melting risk and fire risk.
Always make sure that a method to cut off power supply from the DC bus is available in case of short-circuit of the braking module.
3.3.10. Scheduled Maintenance of the BU600
For the scheduled maintenance of the BU600, please refer to the general instructions given in section
Inverter and Motor Ground Connection in the Installation Guide.
DANGER
Once power supply has been cut off from the drive connected to the BU600, wait at least 20 minutes before operating on the DC circuits to give the capacitors time to discharge.
74/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.3.11. Braking Resistors to be Applied to BU600 4T
NOTE
The wire cross-sections given in the table relate to one wire per braking resistor.
NOTE
The Part Numbers of the braking resistors in the tables are given in the
Available Braking Resistors section.
HOT
SURFACE
The braking resistor case may reach 200°C based on the operating cycle.
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
The cables of the braking resistors shall have insulation features and heatresistance features suitable for the application. The minimum rated voltage of the cables must be 0.6/1kV.
The power dissipated by the braking resistors may be the same as the rated power of the connected motor multiplied by the braking duty-cycle; use a proper air-cooling system. Do not install braking resistors near heatsensitive equipment or objects.
Do not connect to the inverter any braking resistor with an Ohm value lower than the value given in the tables.
CAUTION
Never exceed the maximum operating time of the resistor as given in the
Available Braking Resistors section.
3.3.11.1. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 10% - Class 4T
Braking Resistors
DRIVE SIZE
Drive
Model
Braking
Unit
S41
S51
0180
0202
0217
0260
0313
0367
0402
S60
0457
0524
0598P S60P
S43 (2 x S41) 0523
0599
S53 (2 x S51) 0749
S55 (3 x S51)
0832
0850
0965
1129
Q.ty
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Q.ty
Resistors to be used
Recommended
Value (
)
Power
(kW)
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
1.4
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
3.6
3.0
2.4
2.4
1.8
1.8
1.4
1.6
1.4
1.2
1.2
48
48
64
48
64
64
16
24
24
32
32
32
48
48
48
48
64
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Value
(
)
Wire Crosssection mm 2 (AWG)
1.4
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
3.6
3.0
2.4
2.4
1.8
1.8
1.4
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.6
25(4)
25(4)
35(3)
35(3)
50(1/0)
50(1/0)
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
95(3/0)
95(3/0)
95(3/0)
95(3/0)
95(3/0)
70(1/0)
70(2/0)
95(3/0)
95(3/0)
75/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.3.11.2.
USER MANUAL
Applications with DUTY CYCLE 20% - Class 4T
Braking Resistors
DRIVE SIZE
Drive
Model
Braking
Unit
S41
0180
0202
0217
0260
0313
S51
S60
0367
0402
0457
0524
0598P S60P
S43 (2 x S41) 0523
0599
S53 (2 x S51) 0749
S55 (3 x S51)
0832
0850
0965
1129
Q.ty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
3.3.11.3.
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
Q.ty
Resistors to be used
Recommended
Value (
)
Power
(kW)
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
1.8
2.8
2.8
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
3.6
3.0
2.4
2.4
1.8
3.6
2.8
2.4
2.4
64
48
48
48
64
48
64
64
32
48
48
64
64
32
48
48
48
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
A
A
A
A
B
B
A
A
B
B
B
B
A
A
A
A
A
Applications with DUTY CYCLE 50% - Class 4T
Value
(
)
Wire Crosssection mm 2 (AWG)
1.8
1.4
1.4
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
3.6
3.0
2.4
2.4
1.8
0.9
0.7
0.6
0.6
16(6)
25(3)
50(1/0)
50(1/0)
95(3/0)
95(3/0)
50(1)
50(1)
50(1/0)
50(1/0)
50(1/0)
50(1/0)
50(1/0)
25(3)
50(1)
50(1/0)
50(1/0)
Braking Resistors
DRIVE SIZE
Drive
Model
Braking
Unit
S41
S51
0180
0202
0217
0260
0313
0367
0402
S60
0457
0524
0598P S60P
S43 (2 x S41) 0523
0599
S53 (2 x S51) 0749
0832
S55 (3 x S51)
0850
0965
1129
Q.ty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
3
3
4
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
6
6
8
8
Q.ty
Resistors to be used
Recommended
Value (
)
Power
(kW)
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
6.6
6.0
5.0
5.0
0.6
0.6
1.4
1.4
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
5.0
4.2
1.2
1.2
48
64
64
64
48
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
D
D
D
C
C
D
B
B
B
B
D
D
D
B
B
D
D
Value
(
)
Wire Crosssection mm 2 (AWG)
3.3
3.0
2.5
2.5
1.8
1.8
1.4
1.4
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
0.83
0.7
0.6
0.6
25(3)
35(2)
35(2)
35(2)
240(350)
240(350)
95(3/0)
95(3/0)
120(4/0)
120(4/0)
120(4/0)
120(4/0)
120(4/0)
35(2)
50(1)
120(4/0)
120(4/0)
76/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Type of connection:
A One resistor only
B Two or more parallel-connected resistors
C Two or more series-connected resistors
D Four resistors (parallel connection of two series of two resistors)
CAUTION
The wire cross-sections given in the table relate to one wire per braking resistor. For example, if two resistors are connected in parallel to a braking unit, the cross-section in the table is related to the cable connecting each resistor to the module. In case of a different wiring diagram, the crosssection is to be recalculated based on the RMS of the current flowing in the cable.
NOTE
If the BU600 is connected to parallel-connected inverters (2 x S41, 2 x S51 and 3 x S51), the number of BUs required and given in the table is the total number of BUs, not the number of BUs for each individual inverter in the parallel-connected configuration.
77/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.3.12. Braking Resistors to be Applied to BU600 5T-6T
NOTE
USER MANUAL
The wire cross-sections given in the table relate to one wire per braking resistor.
NOTE
The Part Numbers of the braking resistors in the tables are given in the
Available Braking Resistors section.
HOT
SURFACE
The braking resistor case may reach 200°C based on the operating cycle.
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
The cables of the braking resistors shall have insulation features and heatresistance features suitable for the application. The minimum rated voltage of the cables must be 0.6/1kV.
The power dissipated by the braking resistors may be the same as the rated power of the connected motor multiplied by the braking duty-cycle; use a proper air-cooling system. Do not install braking resistors near heatsensitive equipment or objects.
Do not connect to the inverter any braking resistor with an Ohm value lower than the value given in the tables.
CAUTION
Never exceed the maximum operating time of the resistor as given in the
Available Braking Resistors section.
78/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.3.12.1. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 10% - Class 5T
Braking Resistor
DRIVE
SIZE
Drive
Model
Braking
Unit
S42
S52
S44
(2xS42)
S54
(2xS52)
S56
(3xS52)
0459
0526
0600
0750
0828
0960
1128
0181
0201
0218
0259
0290
0314
0368
0401
Q.ty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3.3.12.2.
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Q.ty
Resistors to be used
Recommended
Value (
)
Power
(kW)
4.2
3.6
3.6
3.0
3.0
2.4
2.4
1.8
32
32
32
32
32
48
48
64
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1.6
2.8
2.4
2.1
1.8
1.6
1.8
64
48
48
48
48
64
64
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Applications with DUTY CYCLE 50% - Class 5T
Value
(
)
Wire Crosssection mm 2 (AWG)
1.6
1.4
1.2
1.05
0.9
0.8
0.8
4.2
3.6
3.6
3.0
3.0
2.4
2.4
1.8
25(3)
35(2)
35(2)
35(2)
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
95(3/0)
95(3/0)
35(2)
50(1)
70(1/0)
70(2/0)
95(3/0)
70(2/0)
Braking Resistor
DRIVE
SIZE
Drive
Model
Braking
Unit
S42
S52
S44
(2xS42)
S54
(2xS52)
S56
(3xS52)
0181
0201
0218
0259
0290
0314
0368
0401
0459
0526
0600
0750
0828
0960
1128
Q.ty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
8
8
10
12
Q.ty
Resistors to be used
Recommended
Value (
)
Power
(kW)
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
4.2
3.6
3.6
3.0
2.4
2.4
2.4
1.8
2.4
32
48
48
48
48
48
64
64
48
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
E
8.2
6.6
2.1
1.8
0.3
1.8
64
64
64
64
64
64
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
C
C
D
B
B
C
Value
(
)
Wire Crosssection mm 2 (AWG)
4.2
3.6
3.6
3.0
2.4
2.4
2.4
1.8
1.6
35(2)
50(1/0)
50(1/0)
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
95(4/0)
50(1/0)
1.37
1.1
1.05
70(2/0)
35/(3)
70(2/0)
0.9 95(3/0)
0.75 2x120/(2x4/0)
0.6 95(3/0)
79/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Type of connection:
A One resistor per braking unit
B Two or more parallel-connected resistors per braking unit
C Two or more series-connected resistors per braking unit
D For resistors per braking unit (parallel connection of two series of two resistors)
E Six resistors per braking unit (parallel connection of three series of two resistors)
G Six resistors (parallel connection of two series of three resistors) per braking unit
CAUTION
USER MANUAL
The wire cross-sections given in the table relate to one wire per braking resistor. For example, if two resistors are connected in parallel to a braking unit, the cross-section in the table is related to the cable connecting each resistor to the module. In case of a different wiring diagram, the crosssection is to be recalculated based on the RMS of the current flowing in the cable.
NOTE
If the BU600 is connected to parallel-connected inverters (2 x S44, 2 x S52 and 3 x S52), the number of BUs required and given in the table is the total number of BUs, not the number of BUs for each individual inverter in the parallel-connected configuration.
3.3.12.3. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 10% - Class 6T
Braking Resistor
DRIVE
SIZE
Drive
Model
Braking
Unit
S56
(3xS52)
S42
S52
S44
(2xS42)
S54
(2xS52)
0459
0526
0600
0750
0828
0960
1128
0181
0201
0218
0259
0290
0314
0368
0401
Q.ty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Q.ty
Resistors to be used
Recommended
Value (
)
Power
(kW)
Degree of
Protection
5.0
3.6
3.6
3.6
3.0
2.4
2.4
1.8
32
32
32
48
48
48
64
64
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
3.6
2.8
2.8
2.4
1.8
1.8
2.1
48
48
48
48
64
64
64
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
Type of
Connection
Value (
)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
A
A
A
A
A
A
1.8
1.4
1.4
1.2
0.9
0.9
0.7
5.0
3.6
3.6
3.6
3.0
2.4
2.4
1.8
Wire Crosssection mm 2 (AWG)
25(3)
35(2)
35(2)
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
95(4/0)
120(250)
35(3)
50(1)
50(1)
70(1/0)
95/(3/0)
95(3/0)
70(2/0)
80/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.3.12.4. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 20% - Class 6T
Braking Resistor
S44
(2xS42)
S54
(2xS52)
SIZE Model
Braking
Unit
S42
S52
S56
(3xS52)
0459
0526
0600
0750
0828
0960
1128
0181
0201
0218
0259
0290
0314
0368
0401
Q.ty
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
4
4
4
4
6
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
Q.ty
Resistors to be used
Recommended
Value (
)
Power
(kW)
5.0
3.6
3.6
6.6
6.0
5.0
5.0
3.6
48
64
64
48
48
48
64
64
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
3.6
2.8
1.4
1.2
3.6
3.6
4.2
64
64
48
48
64
64
64
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
B
A
C
C
B
B
B
Value
(
)
Wire Crosssection mm 2 (AWG)
1.8
1.4
1.4
1.2
0.9
0.9
0.7
4.2
3.6
3.6
3.3
3.0
2.5
2.5
1.8
50(1/0)
50(1/0)
50(1/0)
25(3)
35(2)
35(2)
50(1/0)
70(2/0)
50(1)
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
95(4/0)
50(1/0)
50(1/0)
95(4/0)
81/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.3.12.5.
USER MANUAL
Applications with DUTY CYCLE 50% - Class 6T
Braking Resistor
Braking
Unit
SIZE Model
Resistors to be used
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
Value
(
)
Wire Crosssection mm 2 (AWG)
Q.ty
Q.ty
Recommended
Value (
)
Power
(kW)
S42
S52
0181
0201
0218
0259
0290
0314
0368
0401
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
3.6
3.6
3.6
2.8
2.4
2.4
1.8
32
48
48
48
64
64
64
64
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
5.0
3.6
3.6
3.6
2.8
2.4
2.4
1.8
25(3)
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
120(250)
120(250)
S44
(2xS42)
0459 1 2 1.2 64 IP23 G 1.8 95(4/0)
S54
(2xS52)
0526
0600
0750
2
2
2
CAUTION
8
8
8
2.8
2.8
2.4
64
64
64
IP23
IP23
IP23
D
D
D
S56
(3xS52)
0828
0960
1128
2
2
3
8
12
15
1.8
2.8
10
64
64
64
Type of connection:
A One resistor per braking unit
B Two or more parallel-connected resistors per braking unit
IP23
IP23
IP23
D
E
B
C Two or more series-connected resistors per braking unit
D Four resistors per braking unit (parallel connection of two series of two resistors)
E Six resistors per braking unit (parallel connection of three series of two resistors)
G Six resistors (parallel connection of two series of three resistors) per braking unit
1.4
1.4
1.2
0.9
0.93
0.66
50(1/0)
50(1/0)
70(2/0)
95(4/0)
50(1/0)
95(3/0)
The wire cross-sections given in the table relate to one wire per braking resistor. For example, if two resistors are connected in parallel to a braking unit, the cross-section in the table is related to the cable connecting each resistor to the module. In case of a different wiring diagram, the crosssection is to be recalculated based on the RMS of the current flowing in the cable.
NOTE
If the BU600 is connected to parallel-connected inverters (2 x S44, 2 x S52 and 3 x S52), the number of BUs required and given in the table is the total number of BUs, not the number of BUs for each individual inverter in the parallel-connected configuration.
82/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.3.13. Serial Communications
3.3.13.1. General Information
The BU600 may be connected via serial link to external devices, thus enabling both reading and writing all parameters normally accessed through the display/keypad. Two-wire RS485 is used, which ensures better immunity against disturbance even on long cable paths, thus reducing communication errors.
The BU600 typically behaves as a slave device (i.e. it only answers to queries sent by another device). A master device (typically a computer) is then needed to start serial communications.
BU600
BRAKING UNIT
150
Figure 32: Example of direct and multidrop connection
The BU600 is provided with a connector equipped with N.2 pins for each signal of the RS485 pair: this makes multidrop wiring easier without having to connect two conductors to the same pin and avoids adopting star topology that is not recommended for this type of bus.
Enertronica Santerno S.p.A. also supplies the RemoteDrive software package allowing controlling the drive through a computer connected via serial link.
The RemoteDrive offers the following functionality: image copy, keypad emulation, oscilloscope functions and multifunction tester, data logger, history data table compiler, parameter setting and data reception –transmission–storage from and to a computer, scan function for the automatic detection of the connected inverters (up to 247 connected
inverters). Please refer to the Remote Drive REMOTE
3.3.13.2. Direct Connection
Electrical standard RS485 may be connected directly to the computer if this is provided with a special port of this type. In case your computer is provided with a serial port RS232-C or a USB port, a RS232-C/ RS485 converter or a USB/RS485 converter is required.
Enertronica Santerno S.p.A. may supply both converters as optional components.
Logic “1” (normally called a MARK) means that terminal TX/RX A is positive in respect to terminal TX/RX B
(vice versa for logic “0”, normally called a SPACE).
83/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.3.13.3.
USER MANUAL
Multidrop Network Connection
The BU600 may be connected to a network through electrical standard RS485, allowing a bus-type control of each device; up to 247 inverters may be interconnected depending on the link length and baud rate.
Each inverter has its own identification number, which can be set in the Serial Network menu as a unique code in the network connected to the PC.
3.3.13.4. Connection
For the connection to the serial link, use the 9-pin, male D connector (see Figure 28).
The D connector pins are the following.
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
PIN
1 – 3
FUNCTION
(TX/RX A) Differential input/output A (bidirectional) according to standard RS485. Positive polarity in respect to pins 2 – 4 for one MARK. Signal D1 according to MODBUS-IDA association.
2 – 4
(TX/RX B) Differential input/output B (bidirectional) according to standard RS485. Negative polarity in respect to pins 1 – 3 for one MARK. Signal D0 according to MODBUS-IDA association.
5 - 7 – 8 (GND) control board zero volt. Common according to MODBUS-IDA association.
6
(VTEST) Auxiliary supply input (see Auxiliary Power Supply)
9 Not connected
The metal frame of the D connector is connected to the metal frame of the BU600, so it is grounded.
Connect the cable braiding of the shielded twisted pair date cable to the ground by using the copper cable
multidrop-connected devices, connect together terminals GND (if any) for all devices. This ensures equipotentiality for all signal circuits, thus providing the best operating conditions for RS485 drivers; however, if the devices are connected to each other with analog interfaces, this can create ground loops. If disturbance occurs when communication interfaces and analog interface operate at a time, use optional, galvanically isolated RS485 communications interface.
The MODBUS-IDA association ( www.modbus.org
) defines the type of wiring for MODBUS communications via serial link RS485, adopted by the BU600, as a “2-wire cable”. The following specifications are recommended:
Type of cable
Min. cross-section of conductors
Shielded cable composed of balanced D1/D0 pair + common conductor
(“Common”)
AWG24 corresponding to 0.25mm
2 . For long cable length, larger crosssections up to 0.75mm
2 are recommended.
Max. length
Characteristic impedance
Standard colours
500 metres (based on the max. distance between two stations)
Better if exceeding 100
(120
is typically recommended)
Yello w/brown for D1/D0 pair, grey for “Common” signal
The figure below shows the reference wiring diagram recommended from the MODBUS-IDA association for the connection of “2-wire” devices.
84/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 33: Rec ommended wiring diagram for “2-wire” MODBUS connection
Note that the network comprising the termination resistor and the polarization resistors is integrated into the
devices at both ends of the chain. The terminator must be inserted in those devices only.
NOTE
Four-pair data transfer cables of Category 5 are normally used for serial links.
Although their usage is not recommended, cables of Category 5 can be used for short cable paths. Note that the colours of such cables are different from the colours defined by MODBUS-IDA association. One pair is used for D1/D0 signals, one pair is used as a “Common” conductor, while the remaining two pairs must not be connected to any other device, or must be connected to the
“Common”.
NOTE
NOTE
All devices connected to the communication multidrop network should be grounded to the same conductor to minimize any difference of ground potentials between devices that can affect communication.
The common terminal for the supply of the inverter control board is isolated from grounding. If one or multiple inverters are connected to a communication device with a grounded common (typically a computer), a low-impedance path between control boards and grounding occurs. High-frequency disturbance could come from the inverter power components and interfere with the communication device operation.
If this happens, provide the communication device with a galvanically isolated interface, type RS485/RS232.
85/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
3.3.13.5. Line Terminators
Provide a linear wiring (not a star wiring) for RS485 multidrop line. To do so, two pins for each line signal are provided on the inverter connector. The incoming line may be connected to pins 1 and 2, whereas the outgoing line may be connected to pins 3 and 4.
The first device in the multidrop connection will have only one outgoing line, while the last device will have only one incoming line. The line terminator is to be installed on the first device and the last device.
The first and the last device in the network feature only one outcoming line and one incoming line respectively. The line terminator is to be installed on the first device and the last device. The line terminator of the BU600 is selected via the DIP-switch SW2 on the control board by setting selectors 1 and 2 to ON.
NOTE
Communication does not take place or is adversely affected if multidrop terminators are not properly set, especially in case of high baud rate. If more than two terminators are fitted, some drivers can enter the protection mode due to thermal overload, thus stopping dialoguing with some of the connected devices.
3.3.14. Auxiliary Power Supply
The VTEST auxiliary supply pin is located on the serial port connector. The BU600 control board activates when 9VDC voltage (in respect to GND) is delivered to the VTEST input. This allows doing the following:
1) read and write the parameters with no need to apply DC power supply;
2) keep the control board “on” in case of mains loss (backup power supply).
The auxiliary supply input features are the following:
Features Min. Type Max.
Auxiliary supply voltage
Absorbed current
“Inrush” current at power on
7.5 9
1.1
12
1.8
3
Unit of m.
Vdc
A
A
CAUTION
The power supply unit voltage and current delivery capacity must meet the requirements of the test supply. Lower ratings than the supply test can cause the control board failure and the irreparable loss of the user-defined parameters. On the other hand, higher ratings can cause irreparable damage to the inverter control board. Switching power supply units installed in the control board are characterized by strong “inrush” current at power on. Make sure that the power supply unit being used is capable of delivering such current ratings.
86/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.4. Braking Unit BU1440 for Modular Inverters (BU1440 4T and BU1440 5T-6T)
A braking unit to be applied to modular inverters only is available. The inverter size must be equal to or larger than S65.
The BU1440 is an UL Open Type Equipment – degree of protection IP00 – that can be installed inside another enclosure featuring degree of protection IP3X as a minimum requirement.
Transporting, handling and unpacking the braking unit is covered in the general instructions given in the
“Transport and Handling” and “Unpacking”sections in the Installation Guide.
3.4.1. Delivery Check
Make sure that the equipment is not damaged and that it complies with the equipment you ordered by referring to the nameplate located on the inverter front part (see figure below). If the equipment is damaged, contact the supplier or the insurance company concerned. If the equipment does not comply with the one you ordered, please contact the supplier as soon as possible.
If the equipment is stored before being started, make sure that temperatures range from –25°C to +70°C and that relative humidity is <95% (non-condensing).
The equipment guarantee covers any manufacturing defect. The manufacturer has no responsibility for possible damages occurred while shipping or unpacking the equipment. The manufacturer is not responsible for possible damages or faults caused by improper and irrational uses; wrong installation; improper conditions of temperature, humidity, or the use of corrosive substances. The manufacturer is not responsible for possible faults due to the equipment operation at values exceeding the equipment ratings. The manufacturer is not responsible for consequential and accidental damages.
The braking unit is covered by a 12-month guarantee starting from the date of delivery.
3.4.1.1. Nameplate for BU1440 4T 1
2
4
3
1. Model:
2. Supply ratings:
3. Output current:
4. Min. load:
Figure 34: Nameplate for BU1440 4T
BU1440 – Braking module 4T or 5T-6T
DC supply voltage deriving directly from the inverter terminals: 400 to 800
Vdc for BU1440 4T; 800÷1200 Vdc for BU1440 5T-6T (*)
800A (average) – continuous average current in output cables
1600A (max.) – max. current in output cables (may be held for all the time given in column “Max. Duration of Continuous Operation” in the resistors tables below)
Minimum value of the resistor to be connected to the output terminals (see application tables below)
87/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.4.2. Operation
USER MANUAL
Each size of the braking unit can be used with a braking resistor avoiding exceeding the max. instant current stated in its specifications.
The braking unit is controlled directly by the control unit. Braking units cannot be parallel-connected when applied to modular inverters.
3.4.3. Ratings
SIZE
Max. braking current (A)
Average braking current (A)
Inverter supply voltage
380-500Vac
500-600Vac
600-690Vac
Min. braking resistor
(
)
0.48
0.58
0.69
Dissipated power
(at average braking current)
(W)
1800
2100
2200
Sound
Pressure
(dB)
65
65
65
BU1440-4T
BU1440-5T
BU1440-6T
1600
1600
1600
AUXILIARY INPUT (Fans supply)
800
800
800
AC Voltage
230 V
Frequency
50-60 Hz
Current consumption
1.48 Arms
88/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.4.4. Installing the BU1440
3.4.4.1. Environmental Requirements for the BU1440 Installation, Storage and Transport
Maximum surrounding air temperature
–10 to +40°C with no derating
From +40°C to +55°C with a 2% derating of the rated current for each degree beyond +40°C.
–25°C to +70°C Ambient temperatures for storage and transport
Installation environment
Altitude
Operating ambient humidity
Storage ambient humidity
Ambient humidity during transport
Storage and operating atmospheric pressure
Atmospheric pressure during transport
Pollution degree 2 or better (according to EN 61800-5-1 and UL
508C Open Type Equipment).
Do not install in direct sunlight and in places exposed to conductive dust, corrosive gases, vibrations, water sprinkling or dripping; do not install in salty environments.
Max. altitude for installation 2000 m a.s.l. For installation above
2000 m and up to 4000 m, please contact Enertronica Santerno
S.p.A..
Above 1000 m, derate the rated current by 1% every 100 m.
From 5% to 95%, from 1g/m 3 to 29g/m 3 , non-condensing and non-freezing (class 3K3 according to EN 61800-5-1).
From 5% to 95%, from 1g/m 3 to 29g/m 3 , non-condensing and non-freezing (class 1K3 according to EN 61800-5-1).
Max. 95%, up to 60g/m 3 ; condensation may appear when the equipment is not running (class 2K3 according to EN 61800-5-1).
From 86 to 106 kPa (classes 3K3 and 1K4 according to EN
61800-5-1).
From 70 to 106 kPa (class 2K3 according to EN 61800-5-1) .
CAUTION
Ambient conditions strongly affect the inverter life. Do not install the equipment in places that do not have the above-mentioned ambient conditions.
89/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.4.4.2. Mounting the Braking Unit
USER MANUAL
Install braking unit BU1440 for modular inverters in an upright position inside a cabinet, next to the other inverter modules. Its overall dimensions are the same as those of an inverter arm. For more details, please
Dimensions (mm) Fixing points (mm) Screws
Weight
(kg)
W
230
H
1400
D
480
X
120
Y
237
D1
11
D2
25
M10 110
90/ 312
Figure 35: Dimensions and fixing points of BU1440
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.4.4.3. Wiring Diagram
Power connections
The braking unit must be connected to the inverter and the braking resistor.
The connection to the inverter is direct through 60*10mm copper plates connecting the different inverter modules. The braking resistor is connected to the + bar and to the braking unit.
Also connect the single-phase 230Vac supply of the cooling fan.
Decisive voltage class C according to EN 61800-5-1
Terminal Type
Tightening
Torque
(Nm)
Connection cable cross-section mm 2
(AWG/kcmils)
NOTES
+
–
+
B
61
62
Bar
Bar
Cord
Cord
Wire
Wire
30
30
0.6-0.8
600 mm 2
1 mm 2 (AWG18)
To be connected to bus bar + of the drive
To be connected to bus bar – of the drive
To be connected to Braking Resistor
To be connected to Braking Resistor
To be connected to 230 Vac supply
To be connected to 230 Vac supply
91/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
Figure 36: External power connections for modular inverters S65-S70 provided with BU1440
NOTE Power supply unit n.2 (power supply 2) is available for size S70.
92/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 37: External power connections for modular inverters S75-S80 provided with BU1440
NOTE Power supply unit n. 3 is available for size S80.
93/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Signal connections
USER MANUAL
CAUTION
Make sure that the control device is properly set-up when using the braking arm. When ordering the inverter, always state the inverter configuration you want to obtain.
Because the braking arm is controlled directly by the control device, the following wiring is required:
connect +24V supply of gate unit ES841 of the braking unit through a pair of unipolar wires (AWG17-
18 - 1mm 2 )
connect braking IGBT to the fault IGBT signal through 2 optical fibres (diameter: 1mm) made of plastic (typical attenuation coefficient: 0.22dB/m) provided with Agilent HFBR-4503/4513 connectors.
The wiring diagram is as follows:
Signal Type of wiring
Wire marking
+24VD Driver board ES841 power supply
0VD Driver board ES841 power supply
Brake IGBT command
Brake IGBT fault
Unipolar wire
1mm
2
Unipolar wire
1mm
2
Single optical fibre
Single optical fibre
24V-GB
G-B
FA-B
Component
Phase W
Phase W
Control unit
Control unit
Board Connector Component Board Connector
ES841
ES841
ES842
ES842
MR1-3
MR1-4
OP-4
OP-3
Braking unit ES841
Braking unit ES841
Braking unit ES841
Braking unit ES841
MR1-1
MR1-2
OP5
OP3
Do not remove the cap of connector OP4 in ES841 control board of the the braking module.
CAUTION
94/ 312
Figure 38: ES841 Unit gate board for the braking unit
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
1. OP1: Green LED – Board OK
2. MR1: 24V gate unit supply
3. OP2: Red LED - Board faulty[*]
4. OP3: IGBT Fault [*]
5. OP4-OP5: IGBT gate commands. OP4 MUST BE SEALED – DO NOT CONNECT
6. CN3: MUST NOT BE CONNECTED
NOTE [*]
The “IGBT Fault” signal, if the OP2 LED remains OFF, indicates that the thermoswitch has tripped.
Figure 39 : Connection points on ES842 for the braking unit optical fibres
7. OP4: Gate command for IGBT Brake
8. OP3: IGBT Fault Signal
95/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
The figure below shows the internal wiring of inverters S65-S70 provided with a braking unit.
USER MANUAL
96/ 312
Figure 40: Internal wiring of inverters S65-S70 provided with a braking unit
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.4.5. Earth Bonding of the BU1440
For the earth bonding of the BU1440, please refer to the general instructions given in section Inverter and
Motor Ground Connection in the Installation Guide.
3.4.6. Scheduled Maintenance of the BU1440
For the BU1440 scheduled maintenance, please refer to the general instructions given in section Inverter
and Motor Ground Connection in the Installation Guide.
DANGER
Once power supply has been cut off from the drive connected to the BU1440, wait at least 20 minutes before operating on the DC circuits to give the capacitors time to discharge.
3.4.7. Braking Resistors for BU1440 4T
NOTE
The wire cross-sections given in the table relate to one wire per braking resistor.
NOTE
The Part Numbers of the braking resistors in the tables are given in the
Available Braking Resistors section.
HOT SURFACE The braking resistor case may reach 200°C based on the operating cycle.
CAUTION
CAUTION
The cables of the braking resistors shall have insulation features and heatresistance features suitable for the application. The minimum rated voltage of the cables must be 0.6/1kV.
The power dissipated by the braking resistors may be the same as the rated power of the connected motor multiplied by the braking duty-cycle; use a proper air-cooling system. Do not install braking resistors near heatsensitive equipment or objects.
Do not connect to the inverter any braking resistor with an Ohm value lower than the value given in the tables.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Never exceed the maximum operating time of the resistor as given in the
Available Braking Resistors section.
97/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.4.7.1. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 10% - Class 4T
Braking Resistor
Braking
Unit
SIZE
S65
S75
S90
Drive
Model
0598
0748
0831
0964
1130
1296
1800
2076
Q.ty
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
Q.ty
1
1
2
2
2
4
4
4
Resistors to be used
Recommended
Value (
)
Power
(kW)
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
1.2
1.2
1.6
1.2
1.2
1.8
1.6
1.2
64
64
48
48
64
32
48
48
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
B
V
V
V
A
A
B
B
3.4.7.2. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 20% - Class 4T
Braking Resistor
Braking
Unit
SIZE
S65
S75
S90
Drive
Model
0598
0748
0831
0964
1130
1296
1800
2076
Q.ty
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
Q.ty
2
2
3
4
4
4
6
8
Resistors to be used
Recommended
Value (
)
Power
(kW)
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
1.8
2.4
2.4
64
64
48
64
64
64
48
64
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
B
B
B
B
B
V
V
V
USER MANUAL
Value
(
)
Wire Crosssection mm 2 (AWG or kcmils)
Value
(
)
Wire Crosssection mm 2 (AWG or kcmils)
1.2
1.2
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.45
0.4
0.3
1.2
1.2
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.45
0.4
0.3
95(4/0)
95(4/0)
120(250)
120(250)
120(250)
95(4/0)
120(250)
120(250)
120(250)
120(250)
120(250)
120(250)
120(250)
120(250)
120(250)
120(250)
98/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.4.7.3. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 50% - Class 4T
Braking Resistor
SIZE
Drive
Model
Braking
Unit
Q.ty
Q.ty
Resistors to be used
Recommended
Value (
)
Power
(kW)
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
Value
(
)
Wire Crosssection mm 2 (AWG or kcmils)
S65
S75
S90
0598
0748
0831
0964
1130
1296
1800
2076
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
4
4
6
8
8
12
12
16
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.4
1.2
1.2
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
D
D
E
F
F
ME
ME
MF
1.2
1.2
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.47
0.4
0.3
120(250)
120(250)
120(250)
120(250)
120(250)
120(250)
120(250)
120(250)
A One resistor
B - Two or multiple parallel-connected resistors
C Two series-connected resistors
D - Four resistors (parallel-connection of two series of two resistors)
E Six resistors (parallel-connection of three series of two resistors)
F Eight resistors (parallel-connection of four series of two resistors)
V - Two units, each of them including a braking module connected to two or more parallel-connected braking resistors
ME - Two units, each of them including a braking module connected to six braking resistors (parallelconnection of three series of two resistors)
MF - Two units, each of them including a braking module connected to eight braking resistors (parallelconnection of four series of two resistors)
CAUTION
The cable cross-sections given in the table relate to the cable connecting each individual braking resistor. For example, if a braking resistor is connected to N.2 parallel-connected resistors, the cable cross-section in the table is the one for each resistor connected to the braking unit.
In case of a different wiring diagram, the cross-section is to be recalculated based on the RMS of the current flowing in the cable.
99/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
3.4.8. Braking Resistors for BU1440 5T-6T
NOTE
The wire cross-sections given in the table relate to one wire per braking resistor.
NOTE
The Part Numbers of the braking resistors in the tables are given in the
Available Braking Resistors section.
HOT SURFACE The braking resistor case may reach 200°C based on the operating cycle.
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
The cables of the braking resistors shall have insulation features and heatresistance features suitable for the application. The minimum rated voltage of the cables must be 0.6/1kV.
The power dissipated by the braking resistors may be the same as the rated power of the connected motor multiplied by the braking duty-cycle; use a proper air-cooling system. Do not install braking resistors near heatsensitive equipment or objects.
Do not connect to the inverter any braking resistor with an Ohm value lower than the value given in the tables.
CAUTION
Never exceed the maximum operating time of the resistor as given in the
Available Braking Resistors section.
3.4.8.1. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 10% - Class 5T
S70
S75
S80
S90
SIZE
S65
Braking Resistor
Drive
Model
Braking
Unit
0457
0524
0598
0748
0831
0964
1130
1296
1800
2076
Q.ty
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
4
6
1
2
2
2
2
Q.ty
Resistors to be used
Recommended
Value (
)
Power
(kW)
2.4
1.8
1.6
1.8
2.4
1.6
2.8
2.4
2.1
1.8
48
64
64
64
48
64
48
48
48
64
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
V
V
Value
(
)
Wire Crosssection mm 2 (AWG or kcmils)
1.6
1.4
1.2
1.05
0.9
0.8
0.6
0.53
0.45
0.4
95(1/0)
50(1/0)
50(1/0)
95(4/0)
95(4/0)
50(1/0)
95(4/0)
95(4/0)
95(4/0)
50(1/0)
100/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.4.8.2. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 20% - Class 5T
S70
S75
S80
S90
SIZE
S65
Braking Resistor
Drive
Model
Braking
Unit
0457
0524
0598
0748
0831
0964
1130
1296
1800
2076
Q.ty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
Q.ty
3
4
6
2
3
3
3
6
6
8
Resistors to be used
Recommended
Value (
)
3.6
4.2
3.6
2.8
2.4
2.8
3.6
3
2.4
2.8
Power
(kW)
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
Degree of
Protection
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
Type of
Connection
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
V
V
Value
(
)
Wire Crosssection mm 2 (AWG or kcmils)
1.8
1.4
1.2
0.93
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.35
95(4/0)
50(1/0)
50(1/0)
70(2/0)
95(4/0)
70(2/0)
50(1/0)
70(2/0)
95(4/0)
70(2/0)
3.4.8.3. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 50% - Class 5T
Braking Resistor
S80
S90
Drive
Model
Braking
Unit
SIZE
S65
S70
S75
0457
0524
0598
0748
0831
0964
1130
1296
1800
2076
Q.ty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
Q.ty
6
6
8
8
8
10
12
14
16
20
Resistors to be used
Recommended
Value (
)
2.4
2.1
2.4
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
Power
(kW)
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
Degree of
Protection
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
Type of
Connection
E
E
F
F
F
G
H
I
MF
MG
A - One resistor
B - Two or more parallel-connected resistors
D - Four resistors (parallel-connection of two series of two resistors)
E - Six resistors (parallel-connection of three series of two resistors)
Value
(
)
1.6
1.4
1.2
0.9
0.9
0.7
0.6
0.51
0.45
0.35
Wire Crosssection mm 2 (AWG or kcmils)
70(4/0)
95(4/0)
70(2/0)
95(4/0)
95(4/0)
95(4/0)
95(4/0)
95(4/0)
95(4/0)
95(4/0)
F - Eight resistors (parallel-connection of four series of two resistors)
G - Ten resistors (parallel-connection of five series of two resistors)
H - Twelve resistors (parallel-connection of six series of two resistors)
I - Fourteen resistors (parallel-connection of seven series of two resistors)
V - Two units, each of them including a braking module connected to two or more parallel-connected braking resistors
MF - Two units, each of them including a braking module connected to eight braking resistors (parallelconnection of four series of two resistors)
MG - Two units, each of them including a braking module connected to ten braking resistors (parallelconnection of five series of two resistors)
101/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
CAUTION
The cable cross-sections given in the table relate to the cable connecting each individual braking resistor. For example, if a braking resistor is connected to N.2 parallel-connected resistors, the cable cross-section in the table is the one for each resistor connected to the braking unit.
In case of a different wiring diagram, the cross-section is to be recalculated based on the RMS of the current flowing in the cable.
3.4.8.4. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 10% - Class 6T
Braking Resistor
S70
S75
S80
S90
SIZE
S65
Drive
Model
Braking
Unit
0457
0524
0598
0748
0831
0964
1130
1296
1800
2076
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
4
4
6
2
2
3
4
2
2
2
Q.ty
Resistors to be used
Recommended
Value (
)
Power
(kW)
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
3.6
2.8
2.8
2.4
1.8
2.4
2.4
2.1
1.8
2.4
48
48
48
48
64
64
64
64
64
64
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
B
B
V
V
V
V
B
B
B
B
Value
(
)
Wire Crosssection mm 2 (AWG or kcmils)
1.8
1.4
1.4
1.2
0.9
0.8
0.6
0.52
0.45
0.4
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
120(250)
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
95(4/0)
120(250)
3.4.8.5. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 20% - Class 6T
Braking Resistor
SIZE
S65
S70
S75
S80
S90
Drive
Model
Braking
Unit
0457
0524
0598
0748
0831
0964
1130
1296
1800
2076
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
4
6
8
3
3
3
3
8
8
12
Q.ty
Resistors to be used
Recommended
Value (
)
Power
(kW)
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
5
4.2
4.2
3.6
3.6
1.2
1.2
1.2
3.6
1.2
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
B
B
B
B
B
E
MD
MD
V
ME
Value
(
)
Wire Crosssection mm 2 (AWG or kcmils)
1.7
1.4
1.4
1.2
0.9
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.45
0.4
50(1/0)
50(1/0)
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
120(250)
120(250)
120(250)
120(250)
102/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.4.8.6. Applications with DUTY CYCLE 50% - Class 6T
Braking Resistor
Size
Drive
Model
Braking
Unit
S65
S70
S75
S80
S90
0457
0524
0598
0748
0831
0964
1130
1296
1800
2076
A One resistor
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
Q.ty
6
8
8
8
10
12
16
16
20
24
Resistors to be used
Recommended
Value (
)
Power
(kW)
Degree of
Protection
Type of
Connection
2.4
2.8
2.8
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.1
2.4
2.4
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
IP23
B Two or more parallel-connected resistors
D - Four resistors (parallel-connection of two series of two resistors)
E
F
F
F
G
H
MF
MF
MG
MH
Value
(
)
1.6
1.4
1.4
1.2
0.96
0.8
0.6
0.52
0.48
0.4
Wire Crosssection mm 2 (AWG or kcmils)
95(4/0)
70(2/0)
70(2/0)
95(4/0)
95(4/0)
70(2/0)
95(4/0)
95(4/0)
70(2/0)
120(250)
E - Six resistors (parallel-connection of three series of two resistors)
F - Eight resistors (parallel-connection of four series of two resistors)
G - Ten resistors (parallel-connection of five series of two resistors)
H - Twelve resistors (parallel-connection of six series of two resistors)
V Two units, each of them including a braking resistor connected to two or more parallel-connected braking resistors
MD Two units, each of them including a braking module connected to four braking resistors (parallelconnection of two series of two resistors)
MF - Two units, each of them including a braking module connected to eight braking resistors (parallelconnection of four series of two resistors)
MG - Two units, each of them including a braking module connected to ten braking resistors (parallelconnection of five series of two resistors)
MH Two units, each of them including a braking module connected to twelve braking resistors (parallelconnection of six series of two resistors)
CAUTION
The cable cross-sections given in the table relate to the cable connecting each individual braking resistor. For example, if a braking resistor is connected to N.2 parallel-connected resistors, the cable cross-section in the table is the one for each resistor connected to the braking unit.
In case of a different wiring diagram, the cross-section is to be recalculated based on the RMS of the current flowing in the cable.
103/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.5. Available Braking Resistors
USER MANUAL
The specifications given for each resistor model also include the mean power to be dissipated and the max. operating time, depending on the inverter voltage class.
Based on these values, parameters C211 and C212 (concerning braking features) in the Resistor Braking
menu can be set up. (See relevant section in the Programming Guide).
The max. operating time set in C211 is factory-set in order not to exceed the allowable time for each resistor model (see section below).
Parameter C212 represents the max. duty-cycle of the resistor and is to be set to a value lower than or equal to the value stated in the dimensioning table (see sections above).
HOT
SURFACE
Braking resistors may reach temperatures higher than 200°C.
FIRE
HAZARD
For parameters C211 and C212 , do not set values exceeding the max. allowable values stated in the tables above. Failure to do so will cause irreparable damage to the braking resistors; also, fire hazard exists.
CAUTION
Braking resistors may dissipate up to 50% of the rated power of the connected motor; use a proper air-cooling system. Do not install braking resistors near heat-sensitive equipment or objects.
3.5.1. 350W Models (IP55)
104/ 312
Figure 41: Overall dimensions, 350W resistor
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Type Weight (g)
Average Power to be
Dissipated
(W)
Max. Duration of Continuous
Operation for 200-240Vac (s)*
56
/350W
RE2643560
100
/350W
RE2644100
400
400
350
350
3.5
6
(*) Max. value to be set in parameter C211 for single resistors or parallel-connected configurations.
That duration is longer for different configurations (two or more series-connected resistors).
When setting the braking duty cycle in C212 , make sure that the maximum power dissipated from the braking resistor being used is not exceeded.
3.5.2. 550W Models (IP33)
Figure 42: Overall dimensions for 550W braking resistor
Type L (mm) D (mm)
Weight
(g)
Mean power to be dissipated
(W)
Max. duration of continuous operation for
380-500Vac (s)*
75
/550W
RE3063750
195 174 500 550 4
(*) Max. value to be set in parameter C211 for single resistors or parallel-connected configurations.
That duration is longer for different configurations (two or more series-connected resistors).
When setting the braking duty cycle in C212 , make sure that the maximum power dissipated from the braking resistor being used is not exceeded.
105/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.5.3. IP54 Models from 1100W to 2200W
USER MANUAL
Figure 43: Overall dimensions for braking resistors from 1100W to 2200W
106/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
RESISTOR
A
(mm)
B
(mm)
L
(mm)
I
(mm)
P
(mm)
Average
Weight power that
(g) can be dissipated
(W)
Max. duration of continuous operation at 200-
240Vac
(s) (*) at 380-
500Vac at 500-
575Vac at 660-
690Vac
15
/1100W
RE3083150
20
/1100W
RE3083200
50
/1100W
RE3083500
180
/1100W
RE3084180
250
/1100W
RE3084250
10
/1500W
RE3093100
39
/1500W
RE3093390
50
/1500W
RE3093500
180
/1500W
RE3094180
250
/1500W
RE3094250
25
/1800W
RE3103250
120
/1800W
RE3104120
250
/1800W
RE3104250
15
/2200W
RE3113150
50
/2200W
RE3113500
75
/2200W
RE3113750
100
/2200W
RE3114100
150
/2200W
RE3114150
180
/2200W
RE3114180
250
/2200W
RE3114250
95 30 320 80-84 240 1250
120 40 320
120 40 380
190 67 380
107-
112
107-
112
177-
182
240 2750
300 3000
300 7000
950
1100
1300
2000
3
4
11
Not limited
3
12
16
Not limited
9
Not limited
8
29
Not limited
3
10
14
3
4
14
20
3
11
24
3
7
11
14
22
26
36
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
6
9
Not applicable
4
6
Not applicable
Not applicable
8
12
6
8
Not applicable
7
14
4
10
Not applicable
4
6
9
13
16
22
3
4
6
9
11
15
(*) Max. value to be set in parameter C211 for single resistors or parallel-connected configurations.
That duration is longer for different configurations (two or more seriesconnected resistors), and “Not applicable” in the table may no longer be true. When setting the braking duty cycle in C212 , make sure that the maximum power dissipated from the braking resistor being used is not exceeded.
107/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.5.4. IP20 Models from 4kW-8kW-12kW
USER MANUAL
Figure 44: Overall dimensions for braking resistors 4kW, 8kW, 12kW
108/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
RESISTOR
A
(mm)
B
(mm)
L
(mm)
I
(mm)
Average
P
(mm)
Weight power that can be
(g) dissipated
(W)
Max. duration of continuous operation
(s)
(*) at 200-
240Vac at
380-
500Vac at 500-
575Vac at 660-
690Vac
5Ω/4kW
RE3482500
15Ω/4kW
RE3483150
20Ω/4kW
RE3483200
25Ω/4kW
RE3483250
39Ω/4kW
RE3483390
50Ω/4kW
RE3483500
60Ω/4kW
RE3483600
82Ω/4kW
RE3483820
100Ω/4kW
RE3484100
120Ω/4kW
RE3484120
150Ω/4kW
RE3484150
180Ω/4kW
RE3484180
250Ω/4kW
RE3484250
3.3Ω/8kW
RE3762330
5Ω/8kW
RE3762500
10Ω/8kW
RE3763100
45Ω/8kW
RE3763450
82Ω/8kW
RE3763820
120Ω/8kW
RE3764120
3.3Ω/12kW
RE4022330
6.6Ω/12kW
RE4022660
10Ω/12kW
RE4023100
45Ω/12kW
RE4023450
620 600 100 250 40 5.5
620 600 160 250 60 10.6
4000
8000
620 600 200 250 80 13.7 12000
7
21
28
35
Not limited
9
14
28
Not limited
14
28
42
Not limited
5
7
8
13
17
21
29
35
42
Not limited
7
32
Not limited
7
10
48
Not applicable
Not applicable
4
5
8
11
13
18
22
26
33
39
Not limited
Not applicable
4
19
36
Not limited
Not applicable
4
6
29
3
3
5
7
9
12
15
18
22
27
37
3
13
24
36
3
4
20
(*) Max. value to be set in parameter C211 for single resistors or parallel-connected configurations.
That duration is longer for different configurations (two or more seriesconnected resistors), and “Not applicable” in the table may no longer be true.
When setting the braking duty cycle in C212 , make sure that the maximum power dissipated from the braking resistor being used is not exceeded.
CAUTION
Because the metal frame of the braking resistor can reach high temperatures, appropriate cables capable of withstanding high temperatures must be used.
109/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.5.5. IP23 Boxes from 4kW to 64kW
USER MANUAL
Figure 45: Overall dimensions of IP23 Box resistors
Figure 46: Position of electrical connections in box resistors
Remove the grids to gain access to wiring terminals (loosen fastening screws).
NOTE
The figure shows 20
/12kW resistor. In certain models, remove both panels to gain access to the wiring terminals.
CAUTION
Because the metal frame of the braking resistor can reach high temperatures, appropriate cables capable of withstanding high temperatures must be used.
110/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.5.5.1. Insulation Resistors, 1 kV (to be used in conjunction with 2T and 4T drives)
RESISTOR
P P1 P2 L H
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
Weight
(kg)
Average power (W) that can be dissipated
Max. duration of continuous operation (s) (*) at
200-240Vac at
380-500Vac
30Ω/4kW
RE3503300
45Ω/4kW
RE3503450
50Ω/4kW
RE3503500
60Ω/4kW
RE3503600
82Ω/4kW
RE3503820
100Ω/4kW
RE3504100
120Ω/4kW
RE3504120
150Ω/4kW
RE3504150
180Ω/4kW
RE3504180
15Ω/8kW
RE3783150
18Ω/8kW
RE3783180
22Ω/8kW
RE3783220
30Ω/8kW
RE3783300
45Ω/8kW
RE3783450
50Ω/8kW
RE3783500
60Ω/8kW
RE3783600
82Ω/8kW
RE3783820
10Ω/12kW
RE4053100
12Ω/12kW
RE4053120
15Ω/12kW
RE4053150
18Ω/12kW
RE4053180
20Ω/12kW
RE4053200
22Ω/12kW
RE4053220
30Ω/12kW
RE4053300
45Ω/12kW
RE4053450
60Ω/12kW
RE4053600
650 530 710 320 375
650 530 710 380 375
650 530 710 460 375
23
30
35
4000
8000
12000
85
128 not limited
85 not limited
85 not limited
21
32
35
42
58
71
85 not limited
21
25
31
42
64
71
85 not limited
21
25
32
38
42
46
64
96 not limited
111/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
RESISTOR
USER MANUAL
P
(mm)
P1
(mm)
P2
(mm)
L
(mm)
H
(mm)
Weight
(kg)
Average power (W) that can be dissipated
Max. duration of continuous operation (s)
(*) at
200-240Vac at
380-500Vac
112/ 312
3.6Ω/16kW
RE4162360
5Ω/16kW
RE4162500
6.6Ω/16kW
RE4162660
8.2Ω/16kW
RE4162820
10 Ω/16kW
RE4163100
12Ω/16kW
RE4163120
15Ω/16kW
RE4163150
18Ω/16kW
RE4163180
20Ω/16kW
RE4163200
22Ω/16kW
RE4163220
30Ω/16kW
RE4163300
45Ω/16kW
RE4163450
2
.4Ω/24kW
RE4292240
3Ω/24kW
RE4292300
5Ω/24kW
RE4292500
6.6Ω/24kW
RE4292660
8.2Ω/24kW
RE4292820
10Ω/24kW
RE4293100
15Ω/24kW
RE4293150
18Ω/24kW
RE4293180
22Ω/24kW
RE4293220
30Ω/24kW
RE4293300
650 530 710 550 375
650 530 710 750 375
40
50
16000
24000
40
57
75
Not limited
40
50
85
Not limited
10
14
18
23
28
34
42
51
57
62
85
Not limited
10
12
21
28
34
42
64
76
93
Not limited
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
RESISTOR
P
(mm)
P1
(mm)
P2
(mm)
L
(mm)
H
(mm)
Average
Weight power (W) that can
(kg) be dissipated
Max. duration of continuous operation (s) (*) at
200-240Vac at
380-500Vac
0.6Ω/48kW
RE4451600
0.8Ω/48kW
RE4451800
1.2Ω/48kW
RE4452120
1.4Ω/48kW
RE4452140
1.6Ω/48kW
RE4452160
1.8Ω/48kW
RE4452180
2.1Ω/48kW
RE4452210
2.4
Ω/48kW
RE4452240
2.8Ω/48kW
RE4452280
3Ω/48kW
RE4452300
3.6Ω/48kW
RE4452360
4.2Ω/48kW
RE4452420
5Ω/48kW
RE4452500
1.8Ω/32kW
RE4362180
2.4Ω/32kW
RE4362240
2.8Ω/32kW
RE4362280
3Ω/32kW
RE4362300
3.6Ω/32kW
RE4362360
4.2Ω/32kW
RE4362420
5Ω/32kW
RE4362500
6Ω/32kW
RE4362600
6.6Ω/32kW
RE4362660
10Ω/32kW
RE4363100
15Ω/32kW
RE4363150
18Ω/32kW
RE4363180
0.45Ω/48W
RE4451450
650
650
530
530
710
710
990
750
375
730
60
95
32000
48000
60
54
63
68
82
96
114
Not limited
15
20
27
40
47
54
60
71
81
95
Not limited
16
13
15
17
20
23
28
34
37
56
85
102
Not applicable
10
11
13
15
17
20
23
25
30
35
42
113/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
RESISTOR
P
(mm)
P1
(mm)
P2
(mm)
L
(mm)
H
(mm)
Weight
(kg)
Average power (W) that can be dissipated
Max. duration of continuous operation (s)
(*) at
200-240Vac at
380-500Vac
6Ω/48kW
RE4452600
6.6Ω/48kW
RE4452660
10Ω/48kW
RE4453100
12Ω/48kW
RE4453120
15Ω/48kW
RE4453150
0.3Ω/64kW
RE4551300
650 530 710 750 730 95 48000 Not limited
13
51
56
85
Not limited
0.45Ω/64W
RE4551450
0.6Ω/64kW
RE4551600
0.8Ω/64kW
RE4551800
1.2Ω/64kW
RE4552120
1.4Ω/64kW
RE4552140
1.6Ω/64kW
RE4552160
1.8Ω/64kW
RE4552180
2.1Ω/64kW
RE4552210
2.4Ω/64kW
RE4552240
2.8Ω/64kW
RE4552280
3Ω/64kW
RE4552300
3.6Ω/64kW
RE4552360
4.2Ω/64kW
RE4552420
5Ω/64kW
RE4552500
6Ω/64kW
RE4552600
6.6Ω/64kW
RE4552660
8.2Ω564kW
RE4552820
10Ω/64kW
RE4553100
650 530 710 990 730 115 64000
20
27
36
54
63
72
81
95
109
Not limited
Not applicable
13
15
18
20
23
27
31
34
40
47
56
68
75
93 not limited
(*) Max. value to be set in parameter C211 for single resistors or parallel-connected configurations.
That duration is longer for different configurations (two or more seriesconnected resistors), and “Not applicable” in the table may no longer be true.
When setting the braking duty cycle in C212 , make sure that the maximum power dissipated from the braking resistor being used is not exceeded.
114/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3.5.5.2. Insulation Resistors, 3 kV (to be used in conjunction with 5T and 6T drives)
RESISTOR
P P1 P2 L H
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
Wgt
(kg)
Average power (W) that can be dissipated
30Ω/4kW
RE3553300
45Ω/4kW
RE3553450
50Ω/4kW
RE3553500
60Ω/4kW
RE3553600
82Ω/4kW
RE3553820
100Ω/4kW
RE3554100
120Ω/4kW
RE3554120
150Ω/4kW
RE3554150
180Ω/4kW
RE3554180
15Ω/8kW
RE3793150
18Ω/8kW
RE3793180
22Ω/8kW
RE3793220
30Ω/8kW
RE3793300
45Ω/8kW
RE3793450
50Ω/8kW
RE3793500
60Ω/8kW
RE3793600
82Ω/8kW
RE3793820
10Ω/12kW
RE4063100
12Ω/12kW
RE4063120
15Ω/12kW
RE4063150
18Ω/12kW
RE4063180
20Ω/12kW
RE4063200
22Ω/12kW
RE4063220
30Ω/12kW
RE4063300
45Ω/12kW
RE4063450
60Ω/12kW
RE4063600
650 530 710 460 375 35
650 530 710 550 375 40
650 530 710 550 375 40
4000
8000
12000
Max. duration of continuous operation
(s) (*) at 500-
575Vac at 660-
690Vac
13 9
19
22
26
36
44
53
66
79
13
15
19
26
39
44
53
72
13
15
19
23
26
29
39
59
79
13
15
18
24
30
36
45
54 not applicable
10
13
18
27
30
36
49
9
10
13
16
18
19
27
40
54
115/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
RESISTOR
USER MANUAL
P
(mm)
P1
(mm)
P2
(mm)
L
(mm)
H
(mm)
Wgt
(kg)
Average power (W) that can be dissipated
Max. duration of continuous operation
(s) (*) at 500-
575Vac at 660-
690Vac
6.6Ω/16kW
RE4172660
8.2Ω/16kW
RE4172820
10Ω/16kW
RE4173100
12Ω/16kW
RE4173120
15Ω/16kW
RE4173150
18Ω/16kW
RE4173180
20Ω/16kW
RE4173200
22Ω/16kW
RE4173220
30Ω/16kW
RE4173300
45Ω/16kW
RE4173450
5Ω/24kW
RE4302500
6.6Ω/24kW
RE4302660
8.2Ω/24kW
RE4302820
10Ω/24kW
RE4303100
15Ω/24kW
RE4303150
18Ω/24kW
RE4303180
22Ω/24kW
RE4303220
30Ω/24kW
RE4303300
650 530 710 650 375
650 530 710 850 375
45
55
16000
24000
11
14
18
21
27
31
35
39
53
79
13
17
21
27
40
47
58
79 not applicable
9
12
14
18
21
24
26
36
54
9
11
14
18
27
32
39
54
116/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
RESISTOR
P
(mm)
P1
(mm)
P2 L
(mm) (mm)
H
(mm)
Wgt
(kg)
Average power (W) that can be dissipated
(W)
Max. duration of continuous operation
(s) (*) at 500-575Vac at 660-690Vac
1.8Ω/48kW
RE4462180
2.1Ω/48kW
RE4462210
2.4Ω/48kW
RE4462240
2.8Ω/48kW
RE4462280
3Ω/48kW
RE4462300
3.6Ω/48kW
RE4462360
4.2Ω/48kW
RE4462420
5Ω/48kW
RE4462500
6Ω/48kW
RE4462600
6.6Ω/48kW
RE4462660
10Ω/48kW
RE4463100
12Ω/48kW
RE4463120
15Ω/48kW
RE4463150
3Ω/32kW
RE4372300
3.6Ω/32kW
RE4372360
4.2Ω/32kW
RE4372420
5Ω/32kW
RE4372500
6Ω/32kW
RE4372600
6.6Ω/32kW
RE4372660
10Ω/32kW
RE4373100
15Ω/32kW
RE4373150
18Ω/32kW
RE4373180
650 530 710 650 730 78 32000
650 530 710 850 730 100 48000
10
12
14
17
21
23
35
53
63
10
11
12
14
16
19
22
26
31
35
53
63
79
Not applicable
10
12
14
15
24
36
43
Not applicable
10
10
13
15
18
21
23
36
43
54
117/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
RESISTOR
P
(mm)
P1
(mm)
P2
(mm)
L
(mm)
H
(mm)
Wgt
(kg)
Average power (W) that can be dissipated
(W)
Max. duration of continuous operation (s) (*) at 500-575Vac at 660-690Vac
1.4Ω/64kW
RE4562140
1.6Ω/64kW
RE4562160
1.8Ω/64kW
RE4562180
2.1Ω/64kW
RE4562210
2.4Ω/64kW
RE4562240
2.8Ω/64kW
RE4562280
3Ω/64kW
RE4562300
3.6Ω/64kW
RE4562360
4.2Ω/64kW
RE4562420
5Ω/64kW
RE4562500
6Ω/64kW
RE4562600
6.6Ω/64kW
RE4562660
8.2Ω/64kW
RE4562820
10Ω/64kW
RE4563100
650 530 710 750 1085 130 64000
10
11
12
14
17
19
21
25
29
35
42
46
58
70
Not applicable
10
10
11
13
14
17
20
24
29
31
39
48
(*) Max. value to be set in parameter C211 for single resistors or parallel-connected configurations. That duration is longer for different configurations (two or more seriesconnected resistors), and “Not applicable” in the table may no longer be true.
When setting the braking duty cycle in C212 , make sure that the maximum power dissipated from the braking resistor being used is not exceeded.
118/ 312
USER MANUAL
4. NEMA 1 GLANDKIT
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Product-Accessory Compatibility
Product
Sinus Penta
Penta Marine
Iris Blue
Solardrive Plus
NEMA 1 GLANDKIT
√
√
√
√
Comments
Table 5: Product – NEMA 1 GLANDKIT compatibility
In accordance with UL 508C , the SINUS PENTA may be provided with the special “NEMA 1 Glandkit” UL
Category Number NMMS by Enertronica Santerno S.p.A. against accidental contacts.
This optional kit installed directly on SINUS PENTA drives with UL Open Type degree of protection, provides
IP21/UL Type 1 degree of protection.
The definitions of UL Type 1 / NEMA 1 degree of protection are given by NEMA and UL standards.
Enclosure
Rating
National Electrical
Manufacturers Association
(NEMA Standard 250)
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
(UL 50 and UL 508C)
NEMA 1/
UL Type 1
Indoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against access to hazardous parts and to provide a degree of protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects (falling dirt).
Indoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against incidental contact with the enclosed equipment and to provide a degree of protection against falling dirt
4.1.1. Nameplate NEMA 1 GLANDKIT
Figure 47: Typical nameplate for SINUS PENTA NEMA KIT accessory
119/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
The UL-approved kit is given in the tables below for models from S05 to S52:
4.2. Identication Data
USER MANUAL
4.2.1. 2T-4T Voltage Classes
Inverter Frame Size
S05
S12
S15
S20
S30
S41
S51
Part Number
ZZ0102805
ZZ0124812
ZZ0102815
ZZ0102820
ZZ0102830
ZZ1124907
ZZ0124850
4.2.2. 5T-6T Voltage Classes
Inverter Frame Size
S12
S14
S22
S32
S42
S52
CAUTION
Part Number
ZZ0124812
ZZ0102810
ZZ0124822
ZZ0124832
ZZ1124907
ZZ0124850
The installer is responsible for the utilization of safe materials able to preserve the equipment degree of protection. It is recommended that the cables do not enter into contact with sharp metal parts that may compromise isolation.
Figure 48: Example of a NEMA 1 Kit installed on a SINUS PENTA
120/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
4.2.3. Overall Dimensions when Installing an Inverter with the NEMA 1 Glandkit
4.2.3.1. 2T-4T Voltage Classes
Inverter
Frame Size
S05
S12
S15
S20
S30
S41
S51
Kit Dimensions
(mm)
W H D
149 71 43
179 74 56
169 74 71
275 98 104
296 131 117
504 295 186
579 295 186
Inverter + Kit Overall Height
[mm]
H
402
460
525
659
809
1098
1098
Kit Weight
(kg)
0.4
0.4
0.5
0.9
1.0
5.6
6.2
4.2.3.1. 5T-6T Voltage Classes
Inverter
Frame Size
S12
S14
S22
S32
S42
S52
Kit Dimensions
(mm)
W H D
179 74 56
235 74 56
232 99 95
322 130 142
504 295 186
579 295 186
Inverter + Kit Overall Height
[mm]
H
460
588
873
940
1187
1187
Kit Weight
(kg)
0.4
0.5
0.7
1.3
5.6
6.2
The W and D dimensions of the inverter are not affected. See relevant tables
provided on the Installation Guide .
NOTE
121/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
5. KEYPAD REMOTING KIT
USER MANUAL
Product-Accessory Compatibility
Product
Sinus Penta
Penta Marine
Iris Blue
Solardrive Plus
Keypad remoting kit
√
√
√
√
Comments
Table 6: Product – Keypad remoting kit compatibility
5.1. Remoting the Keypad on the Cabinet
The inverter keypad may be remoted. A special kit is supplied, which includes the following:
plastic frame allowing installing the keypad on the front wall of the cabinet,
keypad jig allowing installing the keypad on the front door of the cabinet,
seal between keypad frame and cabinet,
remoting cable (length: 5 m).
If the kit supplied is properly assembled, degree of protection IP54 is obtained for the front panel in the cabinet.
For any details on how to remote the keypad, please refer to the Operating and Remoting the Keypad in the
DESCRIPTION
SINUS PENTA kit remote keypad, 3mt
SINUS PENTA kit remote keypad, 5mt
PART NUMBER
ZZ0095699
ZZ0095700
122/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
6. INDUCTORS
Product-Accessory Compatibility
Product
Sinus Penta
Penta Marine
Iris Blue
Solardrive Plus
Inductors
√
√
√
√
Comments
The DC inductors may be installed only on S05 2T and S12 2T/4T
AC input inductors and DC inductors
– only if a power supply source other than the PV field is envisaged
Table 7: Product – Inductors compatibility
Figure 49: Wiring diagram for optional inductors
6.1. Input Inductors
We suggest that a three-phase inductor, or a DC-BUS DC inductor, be installed on the supply line to obtain the following benefits:
- limit input current peaks on the input circuit of the inverter and value di/dt due to the input rectifier and to the capacitive load of the capacitors set;
- reducing supply harmonic current;
- increasing power factor, thus reducing line current;
- increasing the duration of line capacitors inside the inverter.
123/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
Harmonic currents
The shapes of the different waves (current or voltage) may be expressed as the sum of the basic frequency (50 or 60Hz) and its multiples. In balanced, three-phase systems, only odd harmonic current exists, as even current is neutralized by symmetrical considerations.
Harmonic current is generated by non-linear loads absorbing nonsinusoidal current. Typical sources of this type are bridge rectifiers
(power electronics), switching power supply units and fluorescent lamps.
Three-phase rectifiers absorb line current with a harmonic content n=6K±1 with K=1,2,3,… (e.g. 5th,7th,11th,13th,17th,19th, etc.). Harmonic current amplitude decreases when frequency increases. Harmonic current carries no active power; it is additional current carried by electrical cables. Typical effects are: conductor overload, power factor decrease and measurement systems instability.
Voltage generated by current flowing in the transformer inductor may also damage other appliances or interfere with mains-synchronized switching equipment.
Solving the problem
Harmonic current amplitude decreases when frequency increases; as a result, reducing high-amplitude components determines the filtering of low-frequency components. The better way is to increase lowfrequency impedance by installing an inductor. Power drive systems with no mains-side inductor generate larger harmonic currents than power drives which do have an inductor.
The inductor may be installed both on AC-side, as a 3-phase inductor on the supply line, and on DC-side, as a single-phase inductor installed between the rectifier bridge and the capacitor bank inside the inverter. Even greater benefits are obtained if an inductor is installed both on AC-side and on DC-side.
Unlike DC inductors, AC inductors filter high-frequency components as well as low-frequency components with greater efficiency.
CAUTION
A DC inductor can be connected to inverters sizes S15, S20, S30. This must be specified when ordering the equipment (see the Power Terminals Modified for a
DC Inductor in the Installation Guide).
CAUTION No DC inductor can be installed in S05(4T) inverters.
CAUTION
When a DC inductor is used, it can happen that no braking resistor can be connected when an external braking unit is connected, and vice versa (see the
Power Terminals Modified for a DC Inductor in the Installation Guide).
Harmonic currents in the inverter power supply
The amplitude of harmonic currents and their incidence on the mains voltage is strongly affected by the features of the mains where the equipment is installed. The ratings given in this manual fit most applications.
For special requirements, please contact Ener tronica Santerno’s Customer service.
124/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
80%
70%
60% With no inductor
With AC inductor
50% With DC inductor
40%
30%
20%
10%
5 th 7 th 11 th 13 th 17 th 19 th 23 rd 25 th
Figure 50 : Amplitude of harmonic currents (approximate values)
CAUTION
Use the input inductor under the following circumstances:
• mains instability;
• converters installed for DC motors;
• loads generating strong voltage variations at startup;
• power factor correction systems.
Use the input inductor under the following circumstances:
• when drives up to size S12 included are connected to grids with a shortcircuit power greater than 500kVA;
• with drives from size S15 to size S60P when the short-circuit power is 20 fold the inverter power;
CAUTION
• when using parallel-connected inverters;
• with Penta drives size S65 or greater, unless the inverter is powered via a dedicated transformer featuring Vdc=5% or greater;
• with modular inverters provided with multiple power supply units (sizes
S70, S75, S80 and S90).
The ratings of optional inductor recommended based on the inverter model are detailed in the section below.
125/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
6.2. Output Inductors (DU/DT Filters)
USER MANUAL
Installations requiring cable lengths over 100m between the inverter and the motor may cause overcurrent protections to frequently trip. This is due to the wire parasite capacity generating current pulses at the inverter output; those current pulses are generated from the high du/dt ratio of the inverter output voltage.
The current pulses may be limited by an inductor installed on the inverter output. Shielded cables even have a higher capacity and may cause problems with shorter cable lengths.
The maximum distance between the motor and the inverter is given as an example, as parasite capacity is also affected by the type of wiring path and wiring system. For instance, when several inverters and their connected motors are networked, segregating the inverter wires from the motor wires will avoid capacitive couplings between the wiring of each motor.
An adverse effect can also be the stress produced on the motor insulation due to the high du/dt ratio at the inverter output.
CAUTION
Using du/dt filters is always recommended when the motor cable length is over
100m (50m with shielded cables).
It is recommended that Sine Filters be used (see Sine Filters) for lengths
exceeding 300m (150m with shielded cables).
NOTE
When using parallel-connected motors, always consider the total length of the cables being used (sum of the cable length of each motor).
CAUTION
The output inductor is always required when using modular inverters and parallel-connected inverters.
CAUTION
The inductors stated in the tables below may be used when the inverter output frequency is not over 120Hz. For higher output frequency, a special inductor for the max. allowable operating frequency must be used. Please contact
Enertronica Santerno S.p.A..
Figure 51: Output inductor wiring
126/ 312
USER MANUAL
6.3. Applying the Inductor to the Inverter
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
0033
0037
0040
0049
0060
0067
0074
0086
0113
0129
0150
0162
0180
0202
0217
0260
0313
0367
0402
0457
0524
NOTE
IP54 rated 3-phase inductors are available for inverters up to S32 included, because basically inductors are IP00 rated.
6.3.1. Class 2T – AC and DC Inductors
SIZE
Drive
MODEL
INPUT AC 3-PHASE
INDUCTOR
DC INDUCTOR MODEL
THREE-PHASE
OUTPUT AC
INDUCTOR
MAX.
OUTPUT
FREQ. (Hz)
S05
0007
0008
0010
0013
0015
0016
0020
IM0126044
1.27mH
–17Arms
IM0126084
0.7mH
–32Arms
IM0140104
5.1mH
–17A/21Apeak
IM0140154
2.8mH
–32.5A/40.5Apeak
IM0126044
1.27mH
–17Arms
IM0126084
0.7mH
–32Arms
(3-phase)
60
60
S12
0023
IM0126124
0.51mH
–45Arms
IM0126144
0.3mH
–68Arms
IM0140204
2.0mH
–47A/58.5Apeak
IM0140254
1.2mH
–69A/87Apeak
IM0126124
0.51mH
–45Arms
IM0126144
0.32mH
–68Arms
60
60
S15
S20
S30
S41
S51
S60
IM0126164
0.24mH
–92Arms
IM0126204
0.16mH
–145Arms
IM0126244
0.09mH
–252Arms
IM0126282 (**)
0.063mH
–360Arms
IM0126332 (**)
0.05 mH –455Arms
IM0126372
0.031mH
–720Arms
IM0126404
0.023mH
–945Arms
IM0140284 (*)
0.96mH
–100A/160Apeak
IM0140304 (*)
0.64mH
–160A/195Apeak
IM0140404 (*)
0.36mH
–275A/345Apeak
IM0140454
0.18mH
–420A/520Apeak
IM0140604
0.14mH
–520A/650Apeak
IM0140664
0.09mH
–830A/1040Apeak
IM0140754
0.092mH
–
1040A/1300Apeak
IM0126164
0.24mH
–92Arms
IM0126204
0.16mH
–145Arms
IM0126244
0.09mH
–252Arms
IM0138200
0.070mH
–360Arms
IM0138250
0.035mH
–445Arms
IM0138300
0.025mH
–700Arms
IM0126404
0.023mH
–945Arms
60
60
60
120
120
120
60
CAUTION (*)
For the inverter sizes S15, S20, S30, the DC inductors required are to be specified when ordering the equipment as they involve hardware modifications.
CAUTION (**)
127/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
6.3.2. Class 4T
– AC and DC Inductors
SIZE
S05
S12
S15
S20
S30
S41
S51
S60
S60P
S65
S75
S90
Drive
Model
0005
0049
0060
0067
0074
0086
0113
0129
0150
0162
0180
0202
0007
0009
0011
0014
0016
0017
0020
0025
0030
0034
0036
0040
0217
0260
0313
0367
0402
0457
0524
0598P
0598
0748
0831
0964
1130
1296
1800
2076
INPUT AC 3-PHASE
INDUCTOR
IM0126004
2.0mH
–11Arms
IM0126044
1.27mH
–17Arms
IM0126084
0.7mH
–32Arms
IM0126124
0.51mH
–45Arms
IM0126144
0.3mH
–68Arms
IM0126164
0.24mH
–92Arms
IM0126204
0.16mH
–145Arms
IM0126244
0.09mH
–252Arms
IM0126282 (**)
0.063mH
–360Arms
IM0126332 (**)
0.05 mH –455Arms
IM0126372 (**)
0.031mH
–720Arms
IM0126404
0.023mH
–945Arms
IM0126444
0.018mH
–1260Arms
2 x IM0126404
0.023mH
–945A
2 x IM0126444
0.018mH
–1260A
3 x IM0126404
0.023mH
–945Arms
3 x IM0126444
0.018mH
–1260Arms
DC INDUCTOR
MODEL
Non applicabile
IM0140154
2.8mH
–32.5A
IM0140204
2.0mH
–47A
IM0140254
1.2mH
–69A
IM0140284 (*)
0.96mH
–100A
IM0140304 (*)
0.64mH
–160A
IM0140404 (*)
0.36mH
–275A
IM0140454
0.18mH
–420A
IM0140604
0.14mH
–520A
IM0140664
0.09mH
–830A
IM0140754
0.092mH
–1040A
IM0140854 (*)
0.072mH
–1470A
2 x IM0140754 (*)
0.092mH
–1040A
2 x IM0140854 (*)
0.072mH
– 1470A
3 x IM0140754 (*)
0.092mH
–1040A
3 x IM0140854 (*)
0.072mH
–1470A
OUTPUT 3-PHASE AC
INDUCTOR
IM0126004
2.0mH
–11Arms
MAX. OUTPUT
FREQ. (Hz)
60
IM0126044
1.27mH
–17Arms
IM0126084
0.7mH
–32Arms
IM0126124
0.51mH
–45Arms
IM0126144
0.3mH
–68Arms
IM0126164
0.24mH
–92Arms
IM0126204
0.16mH
–145Arms
IM0126244
0.09mH
–252Arms
IM0138200
0.070mH
–360Arms
IM0138250
0.035mH
–445Arms
IM0138300
0.025mH
–700Arms
IM0126404
0.023mH
–945Arms
IM0126444
0.018mH
–1260Arms
6 x IM0141782
0.015mH
–1250Arms
(single-phase)
9 x IM0141782
0.015mH
–1250Arms
(single-phase)
USER MANUAL
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
120
120
120
60
60
60
60
CAUTION (*)
For the inverter sizes S15, S20, S30 and modular inverters from S65 to
S90, the DC inductors required are to be specified when ordering the equipment as they involve hardware modifications.
CAUTION (**)
128/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
6.3.3. Class 5T-6T
– AC and DC Inductors
SIZE
Drive
Model
INPUT AC 3-
PHASE INDUCTOR
DC INDUCTOR MODEL
THREE-PHASE OUTPUT AC
INDUCTOR
MAX. OUTPUT
FREQ. (Hz)
S12 5T
S14 6T
S14
S22
S32
S42
0003
0004
0006
0012
0018
0019
0021
0022
0024
0032
0042
0051
0062
0069
0076
0088
0131
0164
0181
0201
0218
0259
IM0127042
6.4mH
–6.5Arms
IM0127062
4.1mH
–10.5Arms
IM0127082
2.6mH
–16Arms
IM0127102
1.8mH
–23Arms
IM0127122
1.1mH
–40Arms
IM0127142
0.7mH
–57Arms
IM0127167
0.43mH
–95Arms
IM0127202
0.29mH
–140Arms
IM0127227
0.19mH
–210Arms
IM0127274 (**)
0.12mH
–325A
IM0127330 (**)
0.096mH
–415Arms
Please contact
Enertronica Santerno
S.p.A.
IM0141404
1.2mH
–110A
IM0141414
0.80mH
–160A
IM0141424
0.66mH
–240A
IM0141434
0.32mH
–375A
IM0141554
0.27mH
–475A
IM0138000
1.9mH
–9.3Arms
IM0138010
1.4mH
–13.4Arms
IM0138020
1.0mH
–17.5Arms
IM0138030
0.70mH
–25.6Arms
IM0138040
0.42mH
–41Arms
IM0138045
0.28mH
–62Arms
IM0138050
0.17mH
–105Arms
(3-phase)
IM0138100
0.11mH
–165Arms
(3-phase)
IM0138150
0.075mH
–240Arms
(3-phase)
IM0138200
0.070mH
–360Arms
(3-phase)
IM0138250
0.035mH –440Arms
(3-phase)
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
S52
S65
0290
0314
0368
0401
0457
0524
0598
IM0127350 (**)
0.061mH
–650Arms
IM0127404
0.040mH
–945Arms
S75
0748
S70 0831
0964
1130
S80 1296
1800
S90
2076
IM0127444
0.030mH
–1260Arms
2 x IM0127364
0.058mH
–662Arms
2 x IM0127404
0.040mH
–945Arms
2 x IM0127444
0.030mH
–1260Arms
3 x IM0127404
0.040mH
–945Arms
3 x IM0127444
0.030mH
–1260Arms
CAUTION (*)
IM0141664
0.17mH
–750A
IM0141804 (*)
0.160mH
–1170A
IM0141904 (*)
0.120mH
–1290A
2 x IM0141704 (*)
0.232mH
–830A
2 x IM0141804 (*)
0.160mH
–1170A
IM0138300
0.025mH
–700Arms
(3-phase)
IM0127404
0.040mH
–945Arms
(3-phase)
IM0127444
0.030mH
–1260Arms
(3-phase)
6 x IM0141782
0.015mH
–1250Arms
(single-phase)
120
60
60
60
3 x IM0141804 (*)
0.160mH
–1170A
3 x IM0141904 (*)
0.120mH
–1290A
9 x IM0141782
0.015mH
–1250Arms
(single-phase)
60
For the modular inverters from S65 to S90, the DC inductors required are to be specified when ordering the equipment as they involve hardware modifications.
CAUTION (**)
129/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
6.4. Inductance Ratings
USER MANUAL
6.4.1. Class 2T-4T – AC 3-Phase Inductors
INDUCTOR
MODEL
TYPE
INDUCTANCE
RATINGS mH
DIMENSIONS
FIXING
HOLES
WGT LOSSES
A TYPE L H P M E G mm kg W
IM0126004 Input-output 2.00 11
IM0126044 Input-output 1.27 17
A 120 125 75 25 67 55
A 120 125 75 25 67 55
5
5
2.9
3
IM0126084 Input-output 0.70 32
IM0126124 Input-output 0.51 45
B 150 130 115 50 125 75 7x14 5.5
B 150 130 115 50 125 75 7x14 6
IM0126144 Input-output 0.30 68
IM0126164 Input-output 0.24 92
B
B
180 160 150 60 150 82
180 160 150 60 150 82
7x14
7x14
9
9.5
IM0126204 Input-output 0.16 145 B 240 210 175 80 200 107 7x14 17
IM0126244 Input-output 0.090 252 B 240 210 220 80 200 122 7x14 25
IM0126282 Input only 0.063 360 C 300 286 205 100 250 116 9x24 44
IM0126332 Input only 0.050 455 C 300 317 217 100 250 128 9x24 54
IM0126372 Input only 0.031 720 C 360 342 268 120 325 176 9x24 84
IM0126404 Input-output 0.023 945 C 300 320 240 100 250 143 9x24 67
IM0126444 Input-output 0.018 1260 C 360 375 280 120 250 200 12 82
29
48
70
105
150
183
280
342
350
410
700
752
1070
6.4.2. Class 5T-6T
– AC 3-Phase Inductors
INDUCTOR
MODEL
INPUT/OUTPUT
INDUCTANCE
RATINGS mH
DIMENSIONS
FIXING
HOLES
WGT LOSSES
A TYPE L H P M E G mm kg W
IM0127042
IM0127062
IM0127082
IM0127102
IM0127122
IM0127142
IM0127167
IM0127202
IM0127227
IM0127274
IM0127330
IM0127364
Input only
Input only
Input only
Input only
Input only
Input only
Input only
Input only
Input only
Input only
Input only
Input-output
6.4 6.5 A 150 170 101 - 90 70 7x10 3
4.1 10.5 A 180 173 110 - 150 73 8.5x15 4.5
2.6
1.8
16
23
A 180 173 120 - 150 83 8.5x15 6.5
A 180 173 130 - 150 93 8.5x15 9
1.1
0.70
40
57
A 240 228 140 - 200 80 8x15 14
A 240 228 175 - 200 115 8x15 19
0.43 95 B 240 224 187 80 200 122 7x18 27
0.29 140 B 300 254 190 100 250 113 9x24 35
0.19
0.12
0.096
0.058
210
325
415
662
B
C
C
C
300 285 218 100 250 128 9x24
300 286 234 100 250 143 9x24
360 340 250 120 325 166 9x24
360 310 275 120 325 166 9x24
48
60
80
79
260
490
610
746
IM0127350 Input only 0.061 650 C 360 411 298 120 240 220 9x24 113 920
IM0127404 Input-output 0.040 945 C 360 385 260 120 250 200 12 88 1193
IM0127444 Input-output 0.030 1260 C 420 440 290 140 300 200 12 110 1438
22
28
45
52
96
122
160
240
130/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 52: Mechanical features of a 3-phase inductor
131/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
6.4.3. Class 2T-4T – DC Inductors
USER MANUAL
INDUCTOR
MODEL
USE
INDUCTANCE
RATINGS
DIMENSIONS
FIXING
HOLE mH A TYPE L H P M E G mm
IM0140054 DC BUS
IM0140104 DC BUS
IM0140154 DC BUS
IM0140204 DC BUS
8.0 10.5 A 110 125 100 60 90 65 7x10
5.1 17 A 110 125 100 60 90 65 7x10
2.8 32.5 A 120 140 160 60 100 100 7x10
2.0 47 A 160 240 160 80 120 97 7x14
IM0140254 DC BUS 1.2 69 A 160 240 160 80 120 97 7x14
IM0140284 DC BUS 0.96 100 A 170 240 205 80 155 122 7x18
IM0140304 DC BUS 0.64 160 A 240 260 200 120 150 121 9x24
IM0140404 DC BUS 0.36 275 A 260 290 200 130 150 138 9x24
IM0140454 DC BUS 0.18 420 B 240 380 220 120 205 156 9x24
IM0140604 DC BUS 0.14 520 B 240 380 235 120 205 159 9x24
IM0140664 DC BUS 0.090 830 B 260 395 270 130 225 172 9x24
IM0140754 DC BUS 0.092 1040 C 310 470 320 155 200 200 12
IM0140854 DC BUS 0.072 1470 C 330 540 320 165 250 200 12
WEIGHT LOSSES kg
4.5
5
8
12
13
21
27
35
49
57
75
114
152
W
20
30
50
80
90
140
180
320
290
305
450
780
950
6.4.4. Class 5T-6T – DC Inductors
INDUCTOR
MODEL
IM0141404
IM0141414
IM0141424
IM0141434
IM0141554
IM0141664
IM0141704
IM0141804
IM0141904
USE
INDUCTANCE
RATINGS
DIMENSIONS
FIXING
HOLE mH A TYPE L H P M E G mm
DC BUS
DC BUS
DC BUS
DC BUS
1.2 110 A 170 205 205 80 155 122 7x18
0.80 160 A 200 260 215 100 150 111 9x24
0.66 240 A 240 340 260 120 205 166 9x24
0.32 375 B 240 380 235 120 205 159 9x24
DC BUS
DC BUS
0.27 475 B 240 380 265 120 205 179 9x24
0.17 750 B 260 395 295 130 225 197 9x24
DC BUS 0.232 830 C 330 550 340 165 250 200 12
DC BUS 0.16 1170 C 350 630 360 175 250 200 12
DC BUS 0.12 1290 C 350 630 360 175 250 200 12
WEIGHT LOSSES kg
21
27
53
56
66
90
163
230
230
W
165
240
370
350
550
580
800
1200
1300
132/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 53: Mechanical features of a DC inductor
133/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
6.4.5. Class 2T, 4T, 5T, 6T
– 3-Phase DU/DT Inductors
INDUCTOR
MODEL
USE
INDUCTANCE
RATINGS mH
DIMENSIONS
A TYPE L H P M E
IM0138000 Output only 1.9
IM0138010 Output only 1.4
IM0138020 Output only 1.0
IM0138030 Output only 0.70
IM0138040 Output only 0.42
IM0138045 Output only 0.28
IM0138050 Output only 0.17
IM0138100 Output only 0.11
IM0138150 Output only 0.075
9.3
13.4
17.5
25.6
41
62
105
165
240
IM0138200 Output only 0.070 360
IM0138250 Output only 0.035 445
IM0138300 Output only 0.025 700
G
A 180 180 110 - 150 75
A 180 180 120 - 150 85
A 180 180 120 - 150 85
A 180 180 130 - 150 95
A 240 230 140 - 200 100
A 240 230 175 80 200 115
A 300 259 192 100 250 123
A 300 258 198 100 250 123
A 300 321 208 100 250 123
B 360 401 269 120 250 200
B 360 401 268 120 250 200
B 360 411 279 120 250 200
L
USER MANUAL
FIXING
HOLE mm
WGT LOSSES kg W
8.5x15
8.5x15
6
8
55
75
8.5x15 9 85
8.5x15 10 120
8x15
8x15
9x24
9x24
12
15
39
42
180
235
270
305
9x24 52 410
12x25 77 650
12x25 75 720
12x25 93 875
L
H
H
E
M M
E G
P
P
G
M M
P000979-B
DETAIL K
SCALE 1:2
Figure 54: Mechanical features of the 3-phase du/dt inductors
DETAIL J
SCALE 1:2
134/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
6.5.
SIZE
S05
S12
S15
S20
S30
Class 2T
– 3-Phase AC Inductors in IP54 Cabinet
Drive Model
INDUCTOR
MODEL
0040
0049
0060
0067
0074
0086
0113
0129
0150
0162
0007
0008
0010
0015
0016
0020
0023
0033
0037
ZZ0112020
ZZ0112030 Input-output
ZZ0112040 Input-output
ZZ0112045 Input-output
ZZ0112050
ZZ0112060
ZZ0112070
USE
Input-output
Input-output
Input-output
Input-output
MECHANICAL
DIMENSIONS
TYPE
A
A
A
B
B
C
C
WEIGHT LOSSES kg W
7 48
9.5
10
14
14.5
26
32.5
70
96
150
183
272
342
135/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
6.6. Class 4T – 3-Phase AC Inductors in IP54 Cabinet
SIZE
S05
S12
S15
S20
S30
Drive Model
INDUCTOR
MODEL
USE
ZZ0112010 Input-output
0036
0040
0049
0060
0067
0074
0086
0113
0129
0150
0162
0005
0007
0009
0011
0014
0016
0017
0020
0025
0030
0034
ZZ0112020
ZZ0112030
ZZ0112040
ZZ0112045
ZZ0112050
ZZ0112060
ZZ0112070
Input-output
Input-output
Input-output
Input-output
Input-output
Input-output
Input-output
MECHANICAL
DIMENSIONS
TYPE
A
A
A
A
B
B
C
C
USER MANUAL
WEIGHT LOSSES kg
6.5
W
29
7
9.5
10
14
14.5
26
32.5
48
70
96
150
183
272
342
136/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 55: Mechanical features of three-phase inductors for Class 2T-4T in IP54 cabinet
137/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
6.7. Class 5T-6T
– 3-Phase AC Inductors In IP54 Cabinet
SIZE
S12 5T
S14 6T
S14
S22
S32
Drive Model
INDUCTOR
MODEL
0032
0042
0051
0062
0069
0076
0088
0131
0164
0003
0004
0006
0012
0018
0019
0021
0022
0024
ZZ0112110
ZZ0112120
ZZ0112130
ZZ0112140
ZZ0112150
ZZ0112160
ZZ0112170
ZZ0112180
ZZ0112190
USE
Input only
Input only
Input only
Input only
Input only
Input only
Input only
Input only
Input only
B
C
C
USER MANUAL
MECHANICAL
DIMENSIONS
TYPE
A
A
WEIGHT LOSSES kg W
A
A
B
B
Contact Enertronica
Santerno S.p.A.
SIZE
S12 5T
S14 6T
S14
S22
S32
Drive Model
INDUCTOR
MODEL
0003
0004
0006
0012
0018
0019
0021
0022
0024
0032
0042
0051
0062
0069
0076
0088
0131
0164
USE
ZZ0112115 Output only
ZZ0112125 Output only
ZZ0112135 Output only
ZZ0112145 Output only
ZZ0112155 Output only
ZZ0112165 Output only
ZZ0112175 Output only
ZZ0112185 Output only
ZZ0112195 Output only
MECHANICAL
DIMENSIONS
TYPE
A
WEIGHT LOSSES kg W
A
A
A
B
B
Contact Enertronica
Santerno S.p.A.
B
C
C
138/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 56: Mechanical features of a 3-phase inductor for Class 5T-6T in IP54 cabinet
139/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
6.8.
USER MANUAL
Output Single-Phase Inductors for Modular Inverters S75, S80, S90
6.8.1. AC single-phase Inductors
– Class 4T-5T-6T
INDUCTOR
MODEL
IM0141782
USE
INDUCTOR
RATINGS
DIMENSIONS
FIXING
HOLE
WEIGHT LOSSES mH A L H P P1 M E G mm kg W
Output
S75, S80,
S90
0.015 1250 260 430 385 310 136 200 270 9x24 100 940
M
L
E
DETAIL A
SCALE 1 : 3
Material: Cu
Thickness: 6
P
140/ 312
P000980-B
Figure 57: Mechanical features of a single-phase output inductor
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
6.9. Sine Filters
The sine filter is a system component to be installed between the inverter and the motor to enhance the equipment performance: a) The sine filter reduces the voltage peak in the motor terminals : The overvoltage in the motor terminals may reach 100% under certain load conditions. b) The sine filter reduces the motor losses . c) The sine filter reduces the motor noise : The motor noise can be reduced of approx. 8 dBA because the high-frequency component of the current flowing in the motor and the cables is reduced. A noiseless motor is particularly suitable for residential environments. d) The sine filter reduces the probability of EMC disturbance : When the cables between the inverter and the motor are too long, the square-wave voltage produced by the inverter is a source of electromagnetic disturbance. e) The sine filter allows controlling transformers: “Normal” transformers can be powered directly from the inverter that do not need to be properly dimensioned to withstand the carrier frequency voltage. f) The inverter can be used as a voltage generator at constant voltage and constant frequency.
Figure 58: Sine filter
CAUTION
It is recommended that sine filters manufactured by Enertronica Santerno
S.p.A. be used.
See the Sine Filters – User Manual.
Please contact Enertronica Santerno S.p.A. if sine filters from other manufacturers are used, as it may be necessary to change the drive parameterization.
The sine filters may be damaged if the drive parameters are not set accordingly.
141/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
6.10. Output Toroidal Filters
USER MANUAL
Output toroidal filters are high-permeable ferromagnetic materials used to weaken cable disturbance.
See the “EMC” section in the Installation Guide .
See the section related to the cross-sections of the power cables and sizes of the protective devices in the
Part
Number
TOROIDAL FILTER MODEL Inverter Model
Cable Crosssection
(mm 2 )
AC1810402
AC1810503
AC1810603
AC1811004
2xL0674-X830
3xL0082-X830
3xL0040-X830
4xL0084-X830
0003-0021
0022-0034
0036-0086
0088-0164
2.5-6
10-16
25-50
70-150
AC1811202
AC1811202
2xL0705-X830
2xL0705-X830
0180-0202
0216-0368
185-240
2x120-2x185
AC1811402 2xA0711-X830 0401-0402 2x240
•
If the connections table shows only one set of three cables (or N. 1 three-pole cable), the three cables shall go through the ferrite.
•
In case of N. 2 sets of three cables (or N. 2 three-pole cables) both cable sets may go through the ferrite, or one ferrite may be mounted on each cable set.
•
Where N. 3 sets of three cables are required, one ferrite shall be mounted on each individual cable set.
Examples:
Sinus Penta 0180 S41 4T: the recommended motor cable cross-section is 185 mm 2
the cable set shall go through one ferrite, P/N AC1811202.
Sinus Penta 0260 S41 4T: the recommended motor cable cross-section is 2x120 mm 2
both cable sets can either go through one ferrite, P/N AC1811202, or they can go through a separate ferrite, P/N AC1811004.
Sinus Penta 0524 S60 4T: the recommended motor cable cross-section is 3x185 mm 2
each of the three cable sets shall go through a separate ferrite, P/N AC1811202.
GROUND
R
S
T
R
S
T
INTERNAL
EMC
FILTER
U
V
W
SINUS INVERTER
OUTPUT
TOROID
FILTER
Figure 59: Output toroidal filter
M
GROUND
P000095-B
142/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
7. ES836/2 ENCODER BOARD (SLOT A)
Product-Accessory Compatibility
Product
Sinus Penta
Penta Marine
Iris Blue
ES836/2 Encoder Board
√
√
-
Comments
Solardrive Plus -
Table 8: Product – ES836/2 Encoder board compatibility
Board for incremental, bidirectional encoder to be used as a speed feedback for inverters of the Sinus Penta and Penta Marine series.
It allows the acquisition of encoders with power supply ranging from 5 to 15VDC (adjustable output voltage) with complementary outputs (line driver, push-pull, TTL outputs). It can also be connected to 24DC encoders with both complementary and single-ended push-pull or PNP/NPN outputs.
7.1.
Figure 60: Encoder board (ES836/2)
Identification Data
Description
ES836/2
Encoder board
Part
Number
ZZ0095834
COMPATIBLE ENCODERS
POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT
5Vdc
15Vdc, 24Vdc
LINE DRIVER,
NPN, PNP, complementary PUSH-
PULL,
NPN, PNP, singleended PUSH-PULL
143/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
7.2. Environmental Requirements
USER MANUAL
Operating temperature
Relative humidity
Max. operating altitude
–10 to +55°C ambient temperature (contact Enertronica Santerno
S.p.A. for higher ambient temperatures)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
2000 m a.s.l. For installation above 2000 m and up to 4000 m, please contact Enertronica Santerno S.p.A.
.
7.3. Electrical Specifications
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1.
Electrical Specifications
Encoder supply current, + 24 V, protected with resettable fuse
Electronically protected encoder supply current, +12V
Electronically protected encoder supply current, +5V
Ratings
Min. Type Max. Unit
200
350
900 mA mA mA
Adjustment range for encoder supply voltage (5V mode)
Adjustment range for encoder supply voltage (12V mode)
Input channels
Type of input signals
4.4 5.0 7.3
10.3 12.0 17.3
V
V
Three channels: A, B, and zero notch Z
Complementary or singleended
Voltage range for encoder input signals
Pulse max. frequency with noise filter “on”
Pulse max. frequency with noise filter “off”
4 24 V
77kHz (1024pls @ 4500rpm )
155kHz (1024pls @ 9000rpm)
Input impedance in NPN or PNP mode (external pull-up or pull-down resistors required)
15k Ω
Input impedance in push-pull or PNP and NPN mode when internal load resistors (at max. frequency) are connected
Input impedance in line-driver mode or complementary push-pull signals with internal load resistors activated via SW3 (at max. frequency) (see
3600
780
Ω
Ω
ISOLATION:
The encoder supply line and inputs are galvanically isolated from the inverter control board grounding for a
500 VAC/1-minute test. The encoder supply grounding is in common with control board digital inputs available in the terminal board.
144/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
7.4. Installing ES836/2 Encoder Board on the Inverter (Slot A)
DANGER
CAUTION
NOTE
Before gaining access to the components inside the inverter, remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes. Wait for a complete discharge of the internal capacitors to avoid any electric shock hazard.
Electric shock hazard: do not connect/disconnect the signal terminals or the power terminals when the inverter is on. This also prevents the inverter from being damaged.
All the screws used to fasten removable parts (terminals cover, serial interface connector, cable plates, etc.) are black, round-head, cross-head screws.
When wiring the inverter, remove only this type of screws. If different screws or bolts are removed, the inverter warranty will be no longer valid.
1. Remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes.
2. Remove the cover to gain access to the inverter control terminals. The fixing spacers and the signal connector are located on the left.
Figure 61: Position of slot A for the installation of the encoder board
3. Fit the encoder board and make sure that all contacts enter the relevant housing in the signal connector. Fasten the encoder board to the fixing spacers using the screws supplied.
4. Configure the DIP-switches and the jumper located on the encoder board based on the connected encoder. Check that the supply voltage delivered to the terminal output is correct.
5. Close the inverter frame by reassembling the cover allowing gaining access to the inverter control terminals.
Figure 62: Encoder board fastened to its slot
145/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
7.5. Terminals in Encoder Board
USER MANUAL
A 9-pole terminal board is located on the front side of the encoder board for the connection to the encoder.
Terminal board specifications
Cable cross-section fitting the terminal mm 2 (AWG)
Tightening torque (Nm)
0.2÷2.5mm
2 (AWG 24-14)
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
0.5-0.6
Terminal board, pitch 3.81 mm in two separate extractable sections (6-pole and 3-pole sections)
Terminal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CHA
CHA
CHB
CHB
CHZ
CHZ
+VE
GNDE
GNDE
Signal Type and Features
Encoder input channel A true polarity
Encoder input channel A inverse polarity
Encoder input channel B true polarity
Encoder input channel B inverse polarity
Encoder input channel Z (zero notch) true polarity
Encoder input channel Z (zero notch) inverse polarity
Encoder supply output 5V...15V or 24V
Encoder supply ground
Encoder supply ground
For the encoder connection to the encoder board, see wiring diagrams on the following pages.
7.6. Configuration DIP-switches
Encoder board ES836/2 is provided with two DIP-switch banks to be set up depending on the type of connected encoder. The DIP-switches are located in the front left corner of the encoder board and are adjusted as shown in the figure below.
146/ 312
Figure 63: Positions of DIP-switches and their factory-setting
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
DIP-switch functionality and factory-settings are detailed in the table below.
Switch
(factorysetting)
OFF - open ON - closed
Channel B, Line driver or Push-Pull (default)
Channel B with only one single-ended signal
SW2.1 Channel B, NPN or PNP
SW2.2 Channel B with complementary signals
(default)
SW2.3 Channel B with no band limit
SW2.4 Channel Z, NPN or PNP
SW2.5 Channel Z with complementary signals
(default)
SW2.6 Channel Z with no band limit
SW1.1 12V Supply voltage (J1 in pos. 2-3)
SW1.2 Channel A, NPN or PNP
SW1.3 Channel A with complementary signals
(default)
SW1.4 Channel A with no band limit
Channel B with band limit (default)
Channel Z, Line driver or Push-Pull (default)
Channel Z with only one single-ended signal
Channel Z with band limit (default)
5V Supply Voltage (J1 in pos. 2-3) (default)
Channel A, Line driver or Push-Pull (default)
Channel A with only one single-ended signal
Channel A with band limit (default)
SW3.1
SW3.2
SW3.3
SW3.4
SW3.5
SW3.6
Load resistors disabled
Load resistors towards ground enabled for all encoder signals (required for 5V Line driver or
Push-pull encoders, especially if long cables are used – default setting)
Keep SW3 contacts “ON” only if a complementary Push-pull or Line-driver encoder is used (power supply: 5V or 12V). Otherwise, set contacts to OFF.
CAUTION
Put ALL contacts in DIP-switch SW3 to ON or OFF. Different configurations may cause the malfunctioning of the encoder board.
NOTE
7.7. Jumper Selecting the Type of Encoder Supply
Two-position jumper J1 installed on encoder board ES836/2 allows setting the encoder supply voltage. It is factory-set to pos. 2-3. Set jumper J1 to position 1-2 to select non-tuned, 24V encoder supply voltage. Set jumper J1 to position 2-3 to select tuned, 5/12V encoder supply voltage. Supply values of 5V or 12V are to be set through DIP-switch SW1.1 (see table above).
147/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
7.8. Adjusting Trimmer
USER MANUAL
Trimmer RV1 installed on ES836/2 allows adjusting the encoder supply voltage. This can compensate voltage drops in case of long distance between the encoder and the encoder board, or allows feeding an encoder with intermediate voltage values if compared to factory-set values.
Tuning procedure:
1. Put a tester on the encoder supply connector (encoder side of the connecting cable); make sure that the encoder is powered.
2. Rotate the trimmer clockwise to increase supply voltage. The trimmer is factory set to deliver 5V and
12V (depending on the DIP-switch selection) to the power supply terminals. For a power supply of
5V, supply may range from 4.4V to 7.3V; for a power supply of 12V, supply may range from 10.3V to
17.3V.
NOTE
Output voltage cannot be adjusted by trimmer RV1 (jumper J1 in pos. 1-2) for
24V power supply.
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
Power supply values exceeding the encoder ratings may damage the encoder.
Always use a tester to check voltage delivered from ES836 board before wiring.
Do not use the encoder supply output to power other devices. Failure to do so would increase the hazard of control interference and short-circuits with possible uncontrolled motor operation due to the lack of feedback.
The encoder supply output is isolated from the common terminal of the analog signals incoming to the terminals of the control board (CMA). Do not link the two common terminals together.
7.9. Encoder Wiring and Configuration
The figures below show how to connect and configure the DIP-switches for the most popular encoder types.
CAUTION
A wrong encoder-board connection may damage both the encoder and the board.
NOTE
In all the figures below, DIP-switches SW1.4, SW2.3, SW2.6 are set to ON, i.e.
77 kHz band limit is on. If a connected encoder requires a higher output frequency, set DIP-switches to OFF.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
The max. length of the encoder wire depends on the encoder outputs, not on the encoder board (ES836). Please refer to the encoder ratings.
DIP-switch SW1.1 is not shown in the figures below because its setting depends on the supply voltage required by the encoder. Refer to the DIP-switch setting table to set SW1.1.
Zero notch connection is optional and is required only for particular software applications. However, for those applications that do not require any zero notch,
its connection does not affect the inverter operation. See the Programming
148/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 64: LINE DRIVER or PUSH-PULL encoder with complementary outputs
CAUTION
Put SW3 contacts to ON only if a complementary Push-pull or Line driver encoder is used (power supply: 5V or 12V). If a 24V push-pull encoder is used, put contacts to OFF.
149/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
Figure 65: PUSH-PULL encoder with single-ended outputs
CAUTION
NOTE
Because settings required for a single-ended encoder deliver a reference voltage to terminals 2, 4, 6, the latter are not to be connected . Failures will occur if terminals 2, 4, 6 are connected to encoder conductors or to other conductors.
Only push-pull, single-ended encoders may be used, with an output voltage equal to the supply voltage. Only differential encoders may be connected if their output voltage is lower than the supply voltage.
150/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 66: PNP or NPN encoder with single-ended outputs and external load resistors
NOTE
NPN or PNP encoder outputs require a pull-up or pull-down resistive load to the supply or to the common. As load resistor ratings are defined by the manufacturer of the encoder, external wiring is required, as shown in the figure above. Connect the resistor common to the supply line for NPN encoders supply or to the common for PNP encoders.
151/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
Figure 67: PNP or NPN encoder with single-ended outputs and internal load resistors
NOTE
NOTE
Incorporated load resistors may be used only if NPN or PNP encoders are compatible with pull-up or pull-down external resistors (4.7k
.
NPN or PNP encoders cause pulse distortions due to a difference in ramp up and ramp down edges. Distortion depends on the load resistor ratings and the wire stray capacitance. PNP or NPN encoders should not be used for applications with an encoder output frequency exceeding a few kHz dozens. For such applications, use encoders with Push-Pull outputs, or better with a differential line-driver output.
152/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
7.10. Wiring the Encoder Cable
Use a shielded cable to connect the encoder to its control board; shielding should be grounded to both ends of the cable. Use the special clamp to fasten the encoder wire and ground the cable shielding to the inverter.
Figure 68: Wiring the encoder cable
Do not stretch the encoder wire along with the motor supply cable.
Connect the encoder directly to the inverter using a cable with no intermediate devices, such as terminals or return connectors.
Use a model of encoder suitable for your application (as for connection length and max. rev number).
Preferably use encoder models with complementary LINE-DRIVER or PUSH-PULL outputs. Noncomplementary PUSH-PULL, PNP or NPN open-collector outputs offer a lower immunity to noise.
The encoder electrical noise occurs as difficult speed adjustment or uneven operation of the inverter; in the worst cases, it can lead to the inverter stop due to overcurrent conditions.
153/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
8. ES913 LINE DRIVER ENCODER BOARD (SLOT A)
USER MANUAL
Product-Accessory Compatibility
Product
Sinus Penta
Penta Marine
Iris Blue
ES913 Encoder Board
√
√
-
Comments
Solardrive Plus -
Table 9: Product – ES913 Encoder board compatibility
Board for incremental, bidirectional encoder to be used as a speed feedback for inverters of the Sinus Penta and Penta Marine series.
It allows the acquisition of encoders with power supply ranging from 5 to 24VDC (adjustable output voltage) with line driver outputs.
Identification Data
Figure 69: ES913 Encoder board
8.1.
HTL Encoder board
Part Number
ZZ0095837
COMPATIBLE ENCODERS
POWER SUPPLY
5Vdc
24Vdc
OUTPUT
LINE DRIVER
8.2. Environmental Requirements
Operating temperature
Relative humidity
Max. operating altitude
–10 to +55°C ambient temperature (contact Enertronica Santerno
S.p.A. for higher ambient temperatures)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
2000 m a.s.l. For installation above 2000 m and up to 4000 m, please contact Enertronica Santerno S.p.A..
154/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
8.3. Electrical Specifications
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
Electrical Specifications
Encoder supply current, + 24 V, protected with resettable fuse
Electronically protected encoder supply current, +12V
Electronically protected encoder supply current, +5V
Value
Min. Typ. Max. Unit
200
400
1000 mA mA mA
Adjustment range for encoder supply voltage (5V mode)
Adjustment range for encoder supply voltage (12V mode)
4.4 5.0 7.3
10.4 12.0 17.3
V
V
Input channels Three channels: A, B and zero notch Z
Complementary (line driver) Type of input signals
Voltage range for encoder input signals
Pul se max. frequency with noise filter “On”
4 30 V
77kHz (1024pls @ 4500rpm)
Pulse max. frequency with noise filter “Off”
ISOLATION:
155kHz (1024pls @ 9000rpm)
The encoder supply line and inputs are galvanically isolated from the inverter control board grounding for a
500VAC test voltage for 1 minute. The encoder supply grounding is in common with control board digital inputs available in the terminal board.
155/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
8.4. Installing the Line Driver Board on the Inverter (Slot A)
DANGER
USER MANUAL
Before gaining access to the components inside the inverter, remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes. Wait for a complete discharge of the internal capacitors to avoid any electric shock hazard.
CAUTION
Electric shock hazard: do not connect/disconnect the signal terminals or the power terminals when the inverter is on. This also prevents the inverter from being damaged.
NOTE
All the screws used to fasten removable parts (terminals cover, serial interface connector, cable plates, etc.) are black, round-head, cross-head screws.
When wiring the inverter, remove only this type of screws. If different screws or bolts are removed, the inverter warranty will be no longer valid.
1) Remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes.
2) Remove the cover allowing gaining access to the inverter control terminals. The fixing spacers and the signal connector are located on the left.
Figure 70: Position of slot A for the installation of the encoder board
Fit the encoder board and make sure that all contacts enter the relevant housing in the signal connector.
Fasten the encoder board to the fixing spacers using the screws supplied.
4) Configure the DIP-switches and the jumper located on the encoder board based on the connected encoder. Check that the supply voltage delivered to the terminal output is correct.
5) Power on the inverter and set up parameters relating to the encoder feedback (see the Programming
Figure 71: Encoder board fastened to its slot
156/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
8.5. Terminals in the Line Driver Encoder Board
A 9-pole terminal board is located on the front side of the encoder board for the connection to the encoder.
Terminal board specifications
Cable cross-section fitting the terminal mm 2 (AWG)
Tightening torque (Nm)
0.2÷2.5mm
2 (AWG 24-14)
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
0.5-0.6
Terminal board, pitch 3.81mm in two separate extractable sections (6-pole and 3-pole sections)
Terminal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Signal
CHA
CHA
CHB
CHB
CHZ
CHZ
+VE
GNDE
GNDE
Type and Features
Encoder input channel A true polarity
Encoder input channel A inverse polarity
Encoder input channel B true polarity
Encoder input channel B inverse polarity
Encoder input channel Z (zero notch) true polarity
Encoder input channel Z (zero notch) inverse polarity
Encoder supply output 5V...15V or 24V
Encoder supply ground
Encoder supply ground
For the encoder connection to the encoder board, see wiring diagrams on the following pages.
8.6. Configuration DIP-switches
The encoder board (ES913) is provided with two DIP-switch banks. The DIP-switches are located in the front left corner of the board and are adjusted as shown in the figure below.
Figure 72: Location of the configuration DIP-switches
157/ 312
SW1.3
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW1.5
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
DIP-switch functionality and factory-settings are detailed in the table below.
SW1.1
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW1.2
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Channel A band limit disabled
Min. channel A band limit
Average channel A band limit
Max. channel A band limit (default)
SW1.4
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW1.6
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Channel B band limit disabled
Min. channel B band limit
Average channel B band limit
Max. channel B band limit (default)
SW2.1
SW2.2
SW2.3
SW2.4
SW2.5
SW2.6
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Channel Z band limit disabled
Min. channel Z band limit
Average channel Z band limit
Max. channel Z band limit (default)
Termination resistor between A and A# = 13.6kΩ (default)
Termination resistor between A and A# = 110Ω
(only for input signals at 5V)
Termination resistor between B and B # = 13.6kΩ (default)
Termination resistor between B and B # = 110Ω
(only for input signals at 5V)
Termination resistor between Z and Z# = 13.6kΩ (default)
Termination resistor between Z and Z# = 110Ω
(only for input signals at 5V)
Termination capacitor between A and A# off
Termination capacitor between A and A# = 110pF (default)
Termination capacitor between B and B# off
Termination capacitor between B and B# = 110pF (default)
Termination capacitor between Z and Z# off
Termination capacitor between Z and Z# = 110pF (default)
USER MANUAL
Do not select any termination resistor equal to 11 0Ω for encoder signal amplitude over 7.5V.
CAUTION
8.7. Encoder Supply Selection Jumper
Jumpers J1 and J2 select the encoder voltage supply among +5V, +12V, +24V:
Jumper J1
X
Open
Closed (default)
Jumper J2
2-3
1-2
1-2 (default)
Encoder Supply Voltage
+24V
+12V
+5V
158/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 73: Location of the jumpers selecting the encoder supply voltage
8.8. Adjusting Trimmer
Trimmer RV1 located on ES913 board allows adjusting the encoder supply voltage. This can compensate voltage drops in case of long distance between the encoder and the encoder board, or allows feeding an encoder with intermediate voltage values if compared to factory-set values.
Tuning procedure:
1. Put a tester on the encoder supply connector (encoder side of the connecting cable); make sure that the encoder is powered.
2. Rotate the trimmer clockwise to increase supply voltage. The trimmer is factory set to deliver 5V and
12V (depending on the DIP-switch selection) to the power supply terminals. For a power supply of
5V, supply may range from 4.4V to 7.3V; for a power supply of 12V, supply may range from 10.4V to
17.3V.
The output voltage cannot be adjusted by trimmer RV1 (jumper J1 in pos. 1-2) for 24V power supply.
NOTE
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
Power supply values exceeding the encoder ratings may damage the encoder.
Always use a tester to check voltage delivered from the ES913 board before wiring.
Do not use the encoder supply output to power other devices. Failure to do so will increase the hazard of control interference and short-circuits with possible uncontrolled motor operation due to the lack of feedback.
The encoder supply output is isolated from the common terminal of the analog signals incoming to the terminals of the control board (CMA). Do not link the two common terminals together.
159/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
9. ES860 SIN/COS ENCODER BOARD (SLOT A)
USER MANUAL
Product-Accessory Compatibility
Product
Sinus Penta
Penta Marine
Iris Blue
Solardrive Plus
ES860 Encoder Board
√
√
-
-
Comments
Table 10: Product – ES860 Encoder board compatibility
The ES860 Sin/Cos Encoder board allows interfacing encoders provided with 1Volt peak-to-peak analog outputs. Those encoders may be used to provide speed feedback and/or position feedback for Santerno drives.
NOTE
Please refer to the Programming Guide and the Guide to the Synchronous Motor
Application for the available control algorithms.
The ES860 board may be configured to operate in two acquisition modes as follows:
•
Three-channel mode : increments low speed resolution and is suitable for slow rotation speed actuators requiring very accurate measurement of speed and position.
•
Five-channel mode: detects the absolute mechanical position as soon as the inverter is first started up.
The board features are given below:
Acquisition of five 1Volt peak-to-peak analog inputs on balanced line
Two channels acquired via zero crossing and bidirectional digital counter with quadrature direction discriminator and x4 resolution multiplication factor (e.g. 1024 ppr to 4096 ppr)
Zero index control for accurate alignment
Two channels acquired in analog mode for absolute angle detection (12-bit resolution)
Max. 140kHz input frequency in zero crossing channels for speeds up to 800rpm with 1024 ppr; alternatively up to 2000rpm with 4096 ppr
Maximum 1kHz input frequency in analog channels
Ability to re-direct analog signals to zero crossing channels
Galvanic isolation in all channels for both digital and analog inputs
5V and 12V power supply output allowing fine tuning of the output voltage, isolated from the common for power supply output and signal output of the inverter.
160/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 74: ES860 Sin/Cos Encoder board
161/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
9.1. Identification Data
USER MANUAL
Description
ES860
Encoder SIN/COS
Interface
Part
Number
ZZ0101830
COMPATIBLE ENCODERS
POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT
5V, 12V, 15V,
(5÷15V)
Sin/Cos encoder, 1Vpp, on three or five differential channels
9.2. Installing ES860 Board on the Inverter (Slot A)
1. Remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes.
2. The electronic components in the inverter and the communications board are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Take any safety measure before operating inside the inverter and before handling the board. The board should be installed in a workstation equipped with proper grounding and provided with an antistatic surface. If this is not possible, the installer must wear a ground bracelet properly connected to the PE conductor.
3. Remove the protective cover of the inverter terminal board by unscrewing the two screws on the front lower part of the cover. Slot A where the ES860 board will be installed is now accessible, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 75: Location of Slot A inside the drive terminal board covers
4. Insert ES860 board into Slot A. Carefully align the contact pins with the two connectors in the slot. If the board is properly installed, the three fixing holes are aligned with the housing of the relevant fixing spacers screws. Check if alignment is correct, then fasten the three fixing screws as show in the figure below.
162/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 76: Fitting the ES860 board inside the drive
5. Set the correct encoder power supply and the DIP-switch configuration.
6. Power the inverter and check if the supply voltage delivered to the encoder is appropriate. Set up the
parameters relating to ”Encoder A” as described in the Programming Guide.
7. Remove voltage from the inverter, wait until the inverter has come to a complete stop and connect the encoder cable.
DANGER
CAUTION
NOTE
Before gaining access to the components inside the inverter, remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes. Wait for the complete discharge of the internal capacitors to avoid electric shock hazard.
Do not connect or disconnect signal terminals or power terminals when the inverter is powered to avoid electric shock hazard and to avoid damaging the inverter.
All fastening screws for removable parts (terminal cover, serial interface connector, cable path plates, etc.) are black, rounded-head, cross-headed screws.
Only these screws may be removed when connecting the equipment. Removing different screws or bolts will void the product guarantee.
163/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
9.2.1. Sin/Cos Encoder Connector
High density D-sub 15-pin female connector (three rows). The figure shows a front view of the pin layout.
Figure 77: Pin layout on the high density connector
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
No. Name
1 C –
2
3
4
D –
A –
B –
5
6
7
8
9 n.c.
C+
D+
A+
B+
10 n.c.
Positive sine signal
Positive cosine signal
Description
Negative sine signal (absolute position)
Negative cosine signal (absolute position)
Negative sine signal
Negative cosine signal
Positive sine signal (absolute position)
Positive cosine signal (absolute position)
11 n.c.
12 +VE Encoder power output
13 0VE Common for power supply and signals
14 R – Negative zero index signal acquired with zero crossing
15 R+
Shell PE
Zero index signal acquired with zero crossing
Connector shield connected to Inverter PE conductor
164/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
9.3. ES860 Configuration and Operating Modes
The ES860 Encoder Interface Board may power both 5V and 12V encoders and allows acquiring two types of encoders with 1Volt peak-to-peak sinusoidal outputs:
Three-channel mode: signals A (sine), B (cosine), R (zero index).
Input signals C+, C-, D+, D- are not used in three-channel mode. DIP-switch SW1 is to be set as in the figure below: odd-numbered switches to ON and the even-numbered switches to OFF.
Figure 78: DIP-switch SW1 setting in three-channel mode
Five-channel mode: signals A (sine), B (cosine), R (zero index), C (sine, absolute position), D (cosine, absolute position).
All input signals are used in five-channel mode. DIP-switch SW1 shall be set as in the figure below: evennumbered switches to ON, odd-numbered switches to OFF.
Figure 79: DIP-switch SW1 setting for five-channel mode
CAUTION
Do not alter the DIP-switch configuration and do not enable the configuration switches when the inverter is powered. Unexpected changes in switch settings, even of short duration, cause irreparable damage to the board and the encoder.
165/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
9.3.1. Configuring and Adjusting the Encoder Supply Voltage
The ES860 board may power encoders having different power supply voltage ratings. A selection Jumper and a power supply voltage regulation Trimmer are available, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 80: Position of the jumper and voltage adjusting trimmer
The ES860 board is factory-set with a minimum output voltage of 4.5V for the power supply of 5V rated encoders. Take account of ±10% due to voltage drops in cables and connector contactors. By using the trimmer, 8V voltage may be supplied.
Set the jumper to 12V to supply 12V or 15V encoders. It is now possible to operate on the trimmer to adjust voltage from 10.5 to 15.7V. Turn the trimmer clockwise to increase output voltage.
Power supply voltage is to be measured at the encoder supply terminals, thus taking account of cable voltage drops, particularly if a long cable is used.
CAUTION
Supplying the encoder with inadequate voltage may damage the component.
Before connecting the cable and after configuring ES860 board, always use a tester to check the voltage supplied by the board itself.
NOTE
The encoder power supply circuit is provided with an electronic current limiter and a resettable fuse. Should a short-circuit occur in the supply output, shut down the inverter and wait a few minutes to give the resettable fuse time to reset.
166/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
9.4. Connecting the Encoder Cable
State-of-the-art connections are imperative. Use shielded cables and correctly connect cable shielding.
The recommended connection diagram consists in a multipolar, dual shielded cable. The inner shield shall be connected to the connector case connected to the ES860 board, while the outer shield shall be connected to the encoder frame, usually in common with the motor frame. If the inner shield is not connected to the encoder frame, this can be connected to the inner braid.
The motor must always be earthed as instructed with a dedicated conductor connected directly to the inverter earthing point and routed parallel to the motor power supply cables.
It is not advisable to route the Encoder cable parallel to the motor power cables. It is preferable to use a dedicated signal cable conduit.
The figure below illustrates the recommended connection method.
Figure 81: Recommended dual shielded connection for encoder cable
NOTE
CAUTION
The encoder supply output and the encoder signal common are isolated in respect to the common of the analog signals fitted in the inverter terminal board
(CMA). Do not connect any conductors in common between the encoder signals and the signals in the inverter terminal board. This prevents isolation from being adversely affected.
The connector of the ES860 board shall be connected exclusively to the encoder using one single cable.
Correctly fasten the cable and the connectors both on the encoder side and on
ES860 board side. The disconnection of one cable or even a single conductor may lead to inverter malfunction and may cause the motor to run out of control.
167/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
9.5. Environmental Requirements
USER MANUAL
Operating temperatures
Relative humidity
Max. allowable operating altitude
9.6.
–10 to +55°C ambient temperature (contact Enertronica Santerno S.p.A. for higher ambient temperatures)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
2000 m a.s.l. For installation above 2000 m and up to 4000 m, please contact Enertronica Santerno S.p.A..
Electrical Ratings
Class A voltage according to EN 61800-5-1
Encoder supply output
Encoder output current, +12V configuration
Encoder output current, +5V configuration
Short-circuit protection level
Encoder supply voltage adjusting range in 5V Mode
Encoder supply voltage adjusting range in 12V Mode
Ratings
Min Typ Max
300
500
4.5 5.3
900
8.0
10.5 12.0 15.7
Unit mA mA mA
V
V
Static characteristics for signal inputs
Type of input signals, A,B
Differential peak-to-peak input voltage range
Input common mode voltage range
Input impedance
Type of input signals, C,D
Differential input voltage range
Input common mode voltage range
Input impedance
Type of input signal R
Differential encoder signal input voltage range
Input common mode voltage range
Input impedance
Min
Ratings
Typ Max Unit
Differential analog type ~1Vpp
0.8 1.0 1.2 Vpp
0
0
120
V ohm
Differential analog type ~1Vpp
0.8 1.0 1.2 Vpp
1
5
5 V
Kohm
0.2
0
Differential analog type
~0.5Vpp/1Vpp
0.5 1.1
5
Vpp
V
120 ohm
168/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Max. absolute values
Maximum allowable common mode voltage amplitude causing no damage –20
Maximum allowable differential voltage amplitude on channels A, B, R –3.5
Maximum allowable differential voltage amplitude on channels C and D
Value
Min Typ Max
–10
+25
+3.5
+10
Unit
V
V
V
CAUTION
Exceeding the maximum differential input or common mode voltages will result in irreparable damage to the apparatus.
Dynamic characteristics of the input signals Value
Maximum frequency of the signals acquired in analog mode – channels C, 1000Hz (60,000rpm @ 1 p/rev )
D or channels A, B in three-channel mode
(60 rpm @ 1,024 p/rev)
Maximum frequency of signals acquired with digital counting on zero crossing – channels A, B
140kHz (1,024pls @ 8,200rpm)
Minimum duration of zero crossing pulse – channel R
CAUTION
3.5 µs (1,024pls @ 8,200rpm)
Exceeding the input signal frequency limits will result in a wrong measurement of the encoder position and speed. Depending on the control method selected for the inverter, it may also cause the motor to run out of control.
169/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
10. ES822 ISOLATED SERIAL BOARD (SLOT B)
USER MANUAL
Product-Accessory Compatibility
Product
Sinus Penta
Penta Marine
Iris Blue
Solardrive Plus
ES822 Optoisolated serial board
√
√
√
√
Comments
Table 11: Product – ES822 Optoisolated serial board compatibility
The isolated serial board RS232/485 controlling Santerno drives allows connecting a computer through
RS232 interface or allows a multidrop connection of Modbus devices through RS485 interface. It provides galvanic isolation of interface signals relating to both the control board ground and the terminal board common of the control board.
Figure 82: ES822 board
10.1. Identification Data
Description
Isolated serial board - RS232/485
Part Number
ZZ0095850
10.2. Environmental Requirements
Operating temperature
Relative humidity
Max. operating altitude
–10 to +55°C ambient temperature (contact Enertronica Santerno
S.p.A. for higher ambient temperatures)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
2000 m a.s.l. For installation above 2000 m and up to 4000 m, please contact Enertronica Santerno S.p.A..
170/ 312
USER MANUAL
10.3. Electrical Features
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
WIRING:
Once ES822 board is fitted, connector RS485 installed on the inverter will automatically disable. D-type, 9pole male connector (RS485) or female connector (RS232-DTE) located on ES822 board activate depending on the position of J1.
Contacts of CN3, D-type, 9-pole male connector (RS485) are as follows:
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
PIN FUNCTION
1 - 3 (TX/RX A) Differential input/output A (bidirectional) according to standard RS485. Positive polarity in respect to pins 2 – 4 for one MARK.
2 - 4 (TX/RX B) Differential input/output B (bidirectional) according to standard RS485. Negative polarity in respect to pins 1 – 3 for one MARK.
5 (GND) control board zero volt
6 - 7 Not connected
8
9
(GND) control board zero volt
+5 V, max 100mA for the power supply of an auxiliary RS485/RS232 converter (if any)
Contacts of CN2, D-type, 9-pole female connector (RS232-DCE) are as follows:
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
PIN FUNCTION
1 - 9 Not connected
2 (TX A) Output according to standard RS232
3
5
(RX A) Input according to standard RS232
(GND) zero volt
4 - 6 To be connected together for loopback DTR-DSR
7 - 8 To be connected together for loopback RTS-CTS
171/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
10.4. Installing ES822 Board on the Inverter (Slot B)
DANGER
CAUTION
NOTE
USER MANUAL
Before gaining access to the components inside the inverter, remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes. Wait for a complete discharge of the internal capacitors to avoid any electric shock hazard.
Electric shock hazard: do not connect/disconnect the signal terminals or the power terminals when the inverter is on. This also prevents the inverter from being damaged.
All the screws used to fasten removable parts (terminals cover, serial interface connector, cable plates, etc.) are black, round-head, cross-head screws.
When wiring the inverter, remove only this type of screws. If different screws or bolts are removed, the inverter warranty will be no longer valid.
1.
2.
Turn off the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes.
Remove the cover to access to the inverter control terminals. The fixing spacers for the encoder board and signal connector are located on the right.
Figure 83: Position of the slot for the installation of the serial isolated board
3.
4.
5.
Fit ES822 board and make sure that all contacts enter the relevant housing in the signal connector.
Fasten the encoder board to the fixing spacers using the screws supplied.
Configure DIP-switches and the jumper located on the encoder board based on the connected encoder.
Close the inverter frame by reassembling the cover allowing gaining access to the inverter control terminals.
172/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
10.5. Jumper for RS232/RS485 Selection
Jumper J1 sets ES822 board to operate as RS485 interface or as RS232 interface. The corresponding positions are silk-screened on the board.
With a jumper between pins 1-2, CN3-(RS485) is enabled (default).
With a jumper between pins 2-3, CN2-(RS232) is enabled.
Figure 84: Jumper setting RS232/RS485
10.6. DIP-switch for RS485 Terminator
Please refer to the Serial Communications section in the Installation Guide.
For serial link RS485 in ES822 board, the line terminator is selected through DIP-switch SW1 as shown in the figure below.
When the line master (computer) is located at the beginning or at the end of the serial link, the line terminator of the farthest inverter from the master computer (or the only inverter in case of direct connection to the master computer) shall be enabled.
Line terminator enables by setting selector switches 1 and 2 to ON in DIP-switch SW1. The line terminator of the other inverters in intermediate positions shall be disabled: DIP-switch SW1, selector switches 1 and 2 in position OFF (default setting).
In order to use RS232-DTE link, no adjustment of DIP-switch SW1 is required.
Figure 85: Configuration of terminator DIP-switch for line RS485
173/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
11. OPTION BOARDS FOR FIELDBUS (SLOT B)
USER MANUAL
Product-Accessory Compatibility
Product
Sinus Penta
Penta Marine
Iris Blue
Solardrive Plus
Product
Sinus Penta
Penta Marine
Iris Blue
Solardrive Plus
Fieldbus boards B40 series
√
√
√
√
Anybus-S Fieldbus boards
√
√
√
√
Comments
Comments
Table 12: Product – Fieldbus board compatibility
Several interface boards (optional) are available for the connection of Santerno drives to automation systems based on Fieldbus. Option boards allow interfacing systems based on:
Profibus-DP ® ,
PROFIdrive ® ,
DeviceNet ® (CAN),
CANopen ® (CAN),
Modbus/TCP,
EtherNet/IP,
Profinet IRT,
EtherCAT,
174/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
The drives compatible with this accessory can house only one option board per fieldbus. This board allows controlling the inverter through the desired bus starting from a control device (PLC, industrial computer, etc.).
The control method from fieldbus integrates the control methods from local terminals, remote terminals
(through MODBUS serial link) and from keypad, which are provided from the inverter. For more details on the inverter command modes and the possible matching among the different sources, refer to the
Programming Guide (Control Method menu and Fieldbus menu).
The sections below cover the installation procedure and the configuration and diagnostics of the different types of option boards.
NOTE
The read/write scan rate for the drives compatible with this accessory is 2ms.
Please refer to the Programming Guide for details.
CAUTION
Other communications protocols are available. Please refer to ES919
Communications Board (Slot B).
11.1. Identification Data
The utilities and configuration files for the fieldbus option boards are available for download from santerno.com
, Software tab of the product sheet concerned.
Two series of option boards for fieldbuses are available: the B40 series and the Anybus-S series. The newest B40 series adds more Ethernet-based fieldbuses.
B40 Series Boards
Type of
Fieldbus
Profibus-DP®
Connector
9-pin D-Sub
Electric
Interface
Profibus®
Part Number
ZZ4600200
Motorola
Firmware
Version
≥ 4.110
See
DeviceNet®
Modbus/TCP
EtherNet/IP
Profinet IRT
EtherCAT
5-pin
Terminal board
RJ-45
RJ-45
RJ-45
RJ-45
CAN Bus
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
ZZ4600210
ZZ4600220
ZZ4600221
ZZ4600222
ZZ4600223
≥ 4.110
≥ 4.110
≥ 4.113
≥ 4.110
≥ 4.113
Anybus-S Boards
Type of fieldbus
Connector
Electric interface
Part Number
Motorola
Firmware
Version
See
Profibus-DP
PROFIdrive
DeviceNet
CANOpen
®
®
®
Modbus/TCP
9-pin D-Sub
5-pin
Terminal board
5-pin
Terminal board
RJ-45
Profibus®
® 9-pin D-Sub Profibus®
CAN Bus
CAN Bus
Ethernet
ZZ4600045
ZZ4600042
ZZ4600055
ZZ4600070
ZZ4600100
Any
Any
Any
Any
Any
175/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
11.2. Installing the Fieldbus Board on the Inverter (Slot B)
USER MANUAL
DANGER
CAUTION
NOTE
Before gaining access to the components inside the inverter, remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes. Wait for a complete discharge of the internal capacitors to avoid any electric shock hazard.
Electric shock hazard: do not connect/disconnect the signal terminals or the power terminals when the inverter is on. This also prevents the inverter from being damaged.
All the screws used to fasten removable parts (terminals cover, serial interface connector, cable plates, etc.) are black, round-head, cross-head screws.
When wiring the inverter, remove only this type of screws. If different screws or bolts are removed, the inverter warranty will be no longer valid.
1) Remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes.
2) The electronic components in the inverter and the communications board are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Be careful when you reach the component parts inside the inverter and when you handle the communications board. The board should be installed in a workstation equipped with proper grounding and provided with an antistatic surface. If this is not possible, the installer must wear a ground bracelet properly connected to the PE conductor.
3) Loosen the two front screws located in the lower part of the inverter cover to remove the covering of the terminal board. In the drive control board, you can then reach the slot B, where you can install the Profibus communications board.
Figure 86: Location of the slot B inside the terminal board cover of Santerno drives
4) Insert the communications board in the slot B; make sure that the connector bar in the board is inserted in the front part of the slot only, and that the last 6 pins are not connected. If installation is correct, the three fastening holes will match with the housings of the fastening screws for the fixing
spacers. Tighten the board fixing screws as shown in Figure 87 and Figure 88.
176/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 87: Checking contacts in the slot B
Figure 88: Fastening the communications board to slot B
5) Configure the DIP-switches and rotary-switches following the instructions given in the relevant section.
6) Connect the Fieldbus cable by inserting its connector or by connecting the wires to the terminals.
7) Close the inverter frame by reassembling the cover allowing gaining access to the inverter control terminals.
177/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
11.3. Status LEDs on the B40 Series Boards
USER MANUAL
Each B40 Fieldbus board is equipped with two red/green LEDs (NSTA L4 and MSTA L5 LEDs). Their meaning depends on the communications bus as from the tables below:
11.3.1. NSTA/MSTA LEDs - Profibus DP
L4/Operation Mode
LED State Indication
Off
Green
Not online / No power
Online, data exchange
Flashing Green Online, clear
Flashing Red (1 flash) Parameterization error
PROFIBUS Configuration
Flashing Red (2 flash) error
L5/Status Mode
LED State Indication
Off
Green
Not initialized
Initialized
Flashing Green Initialized, diagnostic event(s) present
Red Exception error
11.3.2. NSTA/MSTA LEDs - DeviceNet
L4/Network Status
LED State
Off
Green
Flashing Green (1 Hz)
Indication
Not online / No network power
On-line, one or more connections are established
On-line, no connections established
Red
Flashing Red (1 Hz)
Critical link failure, fatal event
One or more connections timedout
Alternating Red/Green Executing self test
L5/Module Status
LED State
Off
Indication
Not operating
Green Operating in normal condition
Flashing Green (1 Hz)
Missing, incorrect or incomplete configuration, device needs commissioning.
Unrecoverable Fault(s) Red
Flashing Red (1 Hz) Recoverable Fault(s)
Alternating Red/Green Executing self test
178/ 312
USER MANUAL
11.3.3. NSTA/MSTA LEDs - Profinet
L4/Network Status
LED State
Off
Green
Green, 1 flash
Green, blinking
Red
Red, 1 flash
Red, 2 flashes
Red, 3 flashes
Indication
Offline
Online (RUN)
Online (STOP)
Used by engineering tools to identify the node on the network
Fatal event
Station Name error
IP address error
Configuration error
L5/Module Status
LED State
Off
Green
Green, 1 flash
Red
Alternating Red/Green
11.3.4. NSTA/MSTA LEDs LEDs - Modbus/TCP
L4/Network Status
LED State
Off
Green
Green, flashing
Red
Red, flashing
Indication
No IP address or in state
EXCEPTION
At least one Modbus message received
Waiting for first Modbus message
IP address conflict detected, FATAL ERROR
Connection timeout. No
Modbus message has been received within the configured
“process active timeout” time
L5/Module Status
LED State
Off
Green
Red
Red, flashing
Alternating Red/Green
11.3.5. NSTA/MSTA LEDs - Ethernet IP
L4/Network Status
LED State
Off
Green
Green, flashing
Red
Red, flashing
Indication
L5/Module Status
LED State
No power or no IP address Off
Online, one or more connections established
(CIP Class 1 or 3)
Green
Online, no connections established
Duplicate IP address,
FATAL error
One or more connections timed out (CIP Class 1 or 3)
Green, flashing
Red
Red, flashing
11.3.6. NSTA/MSTA LEDs - EtherCAT
L4/RUN LED
LED State
Off
Green
Green, blinking
Green, single flash
Flickering
Red
Indication
INIT
OPERATIONAL
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SAFE-OPERATIONAL
BOOT
Fatal Event time
L5/ERR LED
LED State
Off
Red, blinking
Red, single flash
Red, double flash
Red
Flickering
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Indication
Not Initialized
Normal Operation
Diagnostic Event(s)
Exception error
Fatal event
Firmware update
Indication
No power
Normal operation
Major fault, FATAL
Minor fault
Firmware update from file system in progress
Indication
No power
Controlled by a Scanner in
Run state
Not configured, or Scanner in Idle state
Major fault (EXCEPTIONstate, FATAL error etc.)
Recoverable fault(s).
Indication
No error (or no power)
Invalid configuration
Unsolicited state change
Sync Manager watchdog timeout
Application controller failure
Booting error detected
179/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES USER MANUAL
ACCESSORIES
The models featuring serial comms (Profibus and DeviceNET) are provided with two additional LEDs indicating the bus status when transmitting (yellow TX LED L2) and receiving (green RX LED L3).
The models featuring Ethernet comms have the line LINK/Activity LEDs mounted directly on the bus
connector, as described in the Ethernet Connector section.
11.3.7. Profinet Link LEDs
LINK/Activity LED
LED State
Off
Green
Green, flickering
Indication
No Link
Link
Activity
11.3.8. Modbus/TCP Link LEDs
LINK/Activity LED
LED State
Off
Green
Green, flickering
Yellow
Yellow, flickering
11.3.9. Ethernet IP Link LEDs
LINK/Activity LED
LED State
Off
Green
Green, flickering
Yellow
Yellow, flickering
11.3.10. EtherCAT Link LEDs
LINK/Activity LED
LED State
Off
Green
Green, flickering
Indication
No link, no activity
Link (100 Mbit/s) established
Activity (100 Mbit/s)
Link (10 Mbit/s) established
Activity (10 Mbit/s)
Indication
No link, no activity
Link (100 Mbit/s) established
Activity (100 Mbit/s)
Link (10 Mbit/s) established
Activity (10 Mbit/s)
Indication
No Link
Link sensed, no activity
Link sensed, activity
180/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 89: Position of the status LEDs on the B40 series board
181/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
11.4. Status LEDs on the Anybus-S Boards
USER MANUAL
Each option fieldbus board of the Anybus-S series is equipped with a column provided with four LEDs installed on its front edge to monitor the bus status and with one LED (red/green) installed on the communications board for debugging, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 90: Position of indicator LEDs on the board
The red/green LED mounted on the board relates to all interface models, whereas the LEDs mounted on the board column have different meanings based on the type of fieldbus being used.
11.4.1. LEDs for Fieldbus Interface CPU Diagnostics
The LED located on the printed circuit of any version of the interface board indicates the status of the CPU dedicated to communication. The table below shows the possible type of signals.
N. & Name
5. Board diagnostics
Function
Red – Unknown internal error, or module operating in bootloader mode
1 Hz Red blinker – RAM fault
2 Hz Red blinker – ASIC or FLASH fault
4 Hz Red blinker – DPRAM fault
2 Hz Green blinker – Module not initialized
1 Hz Green blinker – Module initialized and operating.
182/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
11.4.2. LEDs for PROFIBUS-DP ® Board Diagnostics
In the PROFIBUS-DP board, LED 1 is inactive; the remaining LEDs are described below:
N. & Name
2.
On-Line
3.
Off-Line
4. Fieldbus
Diagnostics
Off – The module is not on-line.
Function
It indicates that the inverter is on-line on the fieldbus:
Green – The module is on-line; data exchange is allowed.
It indicates that the inverter is off-line on the fieldbus:
Red – The module is off-line; data exchange is not allowed.
Off – The module is not off-line.
It indicates some possible errors:
1 Hz Red blinker – Configuration error: the length of IN messages and OUT messages set while initializing the module does not match with the message length set while initializing the network.
2 Hz Red blinker – User Parameter error: the data length and/or contents for the User
Parameters set while initializing the module does not match with the data length and/or contents set while initializing the network.
4 Hz Flash blinker – Error while initializing the Fieldbus communications ASIC.
Off – No error found.
11.4.3. LEDs for DeviceNet ® Board Diagnostics
In the DeviceNet ® board, LEDs 1 and 4 are not used; the remaining LEDs are described below:
N. & Name
2. Network status
3.
Module status
Function
It indicates the status of the DeviceNet communications:
Off – The module is not On-Line
Green – DeviceNet communications in progress and correct
Flashing green – The module is ready for communication but is not connected to the network
Red – A critical error occurred (too erroneous data items) and the module switched to the
“link failure” status
Flashing red – A timeout occurred when exchanging data
It indicates the status of the communication module:
Off – The module is off
Green – The module is operating
Flashing green – The length of the two data packets exceeds the preset value
Red – An unresettable event error occurred
Flashing red – A resettable event error occurred
183/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
11.4.4. LEDs for CANopen ® Board Diagnostics
USER MANUAL
In the CANopen board, LED 1 is not used; the remaining LEDs are described below:
N. & Name
2. Run
3. Error
4. Power
Function
It indicates the status of the CANopen interface of the module:
Off – The interface is off
One flash – The interface status is STOP
Flashing – The interface is being initialized
On – The interface is operating
It indicates the error status of the CANopen interface:
Off – No error
One flash – The frame error counter has reached the warning limit
Two flashes – A Control Error event (guard event or heartbeat event) occurred
Three flashes – A synchronisation error event occurred: the SYNC message was not received within the time-out
On – The bus is disabled due to an unresettable event error
Off – The module is off
On – The module is on
The word “Flashing” in the table indicates a LED that comes on for 200ms every 200ms; “One flash”, “Two flashes” and “Three flashes” indicate a LED that comes on one, twice or three times for 200ms every 200ms and with an inactivity time of 1000ms.
11.4.5. LEDs for Ethernet Board Diagnostics
In the Ethernet board, the diagnostics LEDs indicate the status of the connection to the LAN:
N. & Name
1. Link
2.
Module status
3.
Function
Off – The module has not detected any legal carrier signal and is not in the LINK status
On – The module has detected a legal carrier signal and is in the LINK status
Off – The module is off
Green – The module is properly operating
Flashing green – The module was not configured and communication is in stand-by
Flashing red – the module has detected a resettable event error
Red – the module has detected an unresettable event error
Flashing red/green – the module is performing a self-test at power on
Off – The IP address has not yet been assigned
Green – At least one active Ethernet/IP connection is in progress Network status Flashing green – No active Ethernet/IP connection is in progress
Flashing red – “Timeout” of one or more links performed directly to the module
Red – The module has detected that its IP is used by another device in the LAN
Flashing red/green – The module is performing a self-test at power on
4. Activity Flashing green – A data packet is being transmitted or received
184/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
11.5. B40 Series Board for PROFIBUS-DP®
PROFIBUS-DP ® is a registered trademark of PROFIBUS International.
The B40 series Profibus® communications board allows interfacing between a drive and an external control unit, such as a PLC, using a PROFIBUS-DP communications interface.
The drive operates as a Slave device and is controlled by a Master device (PLC) through command messages and reference values which are equivalent to the ones sent via terminal board. The Master device is also capable of detecting the operating status of the inverter. More details about Profibus communications
are given in the Programming Guide.
The Profibus® communications board has the following features:
Type of fieldbus: PROFIBUS-DP EN 50170 (DIN 19245 Part 1) with protocol version 1.10
Automatic detection of the baud rate ranging from 9600 bits/s to 12 Mbits/s
Communications device: PROFIBUS bus link, type A or B as mentioned in EN50170
Type of fieldbus: Master-Slave communications; max. 126 stations in multidrop connection
Fieldbus connector: female, 9-pin, DSUB connector
Wire: copper twisted pair (EIA RS485)
Max. length of the bus: 200m @ 1.5Mbits/s (can be longer if repeaters are used)
Isolation: the bus is galvanically isolated from the electronic devices via a DC/DC converter
The bus signals (link A and link B) are isolated via optocouplers
Status indicators: indicator Led for board status and indicator Led for fieldbus status
Figure 91: PROFIBUS-DP ® fieldbus communications board
185/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
11.5.1. PROFIBUS® Fieldbus Connector
Female, 9-pin, D-sub connector.
Pin layout:
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
N. Name
– Shield
Description
Connector frame connected to PE
1 N.C.
2 N.C.
3 B-Line
4 RTS
5
6
7
GND
+5V
N.C.
8 A-Line
9 N.C.
Positive RxD/TxD according to RS 485 specifications
Request To Send – active high level when sending
Bus ground isolated from control board 0V
Bus driver supply isolated from control board circuits
Negative RxD/TxD according to RS 485 specifications
USER MANUAL
11.5.2. Bus Configuration
The figure shows a common configuration where the first device is the Master (PLC, Bus Bridge or
Repeater), but this device can be connected also in central position. Anyway, the rule stating that termination should always be connected to first or last device, is always valid.
Figure 92: Example of a Profibus network (the correct setting of the line terminators is highlighted)
The termination is inserted directly by the switch on the loose male connector specific to the Profibus® cable.
186/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
11.5.3. Connection to the Fieldbus
Make sure that wiring is correct, especially if the fieldbus operates at high baud rates (higher than or equal to
1.5Mb/s).
Figure 92 is an example of a Profibus
® link connecting multiple devices.
Use special Profibus cables (“Profibus Standard Bus Cable”, Type A); do not exceed the max. allowable connection length based on the baud rate; use proper connectors.
The table below shows the standard baud rate values and the corresponding max. length of the bus if cables of Type A are used.
Allowable Baudrate
9.6 kbit/s
19.2 kbit/s
45.45 kbit/s
93.75 kbit/s
187.5 kbit/s
500 kbit/s
1.5 Mbit/s
3 Mbit/s
Max. Length for Cable of Type A
1.2 km
1.2 km
1.2 km
1.2 km
1 km
400 m
200 m
100 m
6 Mbit/s
12 Mbit/s
100 m
100 m
We recommend that Profibus
®
FC (FastConnect) connectors be used. They offer the following benefits:
No soldering required for the connections inside the cable
One ingoing cable and one outgoing cable can be used, so that connections of intermediate nodes can be stubless, thus avoiding signal reflections
The internal resistors can be connected through a switch located on the connector frame
Profibus FC connectors are provided with an internal impedance adapting network to compensate for the connector capacity.
Figure 93: Profibus® FC (FastConnect) connector with line termination settings
187/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
NOTE
NOTE
A more comprehensive overview of the Profibus is given at http://www.profibus.com/ . In particular, you can download the “Installation
Guideline for PROFIBUS DP/FMS”, containing detailed wiring information, and the document named “Recommendations for Cabling and Assembly” containing important guidelines to avoid the most common wiring errors.
Please refer to the Programming Guide for details on Profibus board settings:
addresses, baudrate, etc.
11.6. B40 Series Boards Featuring Ethernet Interface (Profinet IRT,
Modbus/TCP, EtherCAT, Ethernet/IP)
All the Fieldbus communications boards, B40 series featuring Ethernet interface share the same construction principles and installation/wiring procedure.
Four different part numbers are available for these boards. They allow interfacing a drive with an external control unit featuring one of the following comms protocols:
Profinet IRT,
Modbus/TCP,
EtherCAT,
Ethernet/IP.
The communications board performs automatic negotiation with the mains if the baud rate is set to 10 or 100
Mbits/s.
The main features of the interface board are the following:
Autonegotiation of the baud rate and the type of cable (Auto MDI/MDIX)
-
Configuration of the Ethernet parameters from the drive display (please refer to the Programming
Ethernet interface galvanically isolated through a transformer
188/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 94: B40 series Fieldbus comms board with Ethernet interface
NOTE
The Ethernet connectors shown in the figure are equivalent for any protocols except for the EtherCAT protocol, where the right-hand connector is INPUT only and the left-hand connector is OUTPUT only.
11.6.1. Ethernet Connector
The board is provided with a standard RJ-45 connector (IEEE 802) for Ethernet connection 10/100
(100Base-T, 10Base-T).
The yellow LED indicates the Link/Operation with 10Mbps baud rate, whereas the green LED indicates the
Link/Operation with 100Mbps baud rate.
The pin layout is the same as the one used for each network board computers are equipped with.
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
1
N.
2
3
4
5
Name
TD+
TD –
RD+
Term
Description
Positive signal transmission line
6
7
8
Term
RD –
Term
Term
Negative signal transmission line
Line receiving positive signals
Terminated pair – not used
Terminated pair – not used
Line receiving negative signals
Terminated pair – not used
Terminated pair – not used
11.6.2. Connection to the Network
The Ethernet interface board can be connected to a master device (PC or PLC) either through a LAN
(Ethernet business network) or a direct point-to-point connection.
The board connection through a LAN is similar to a computer connection. Use a standard cable for a Switch or Hub connection or a Straight-Through Cable TIA/EIA-568-B of class 5 UTP (Patch cable for LAN).
189/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
NOTE
NOTE
The inverter is typically installed with other electric/electronic devices inside a cubicle. Normally, the electromagnetic pollution inside the cubicle is remarkable and is due to both radiofrequency disturbance caused by the inverters and to bursts caused by the electromechanical devices. To avoid propagating disturbance to Ethernet cables, they must be segregated and kept as far as possible from the other power cables and signal cables in the cubicle.
Disturbance propagation to Ethernet cables may affect the correct operation of the inverter and the other devices (computers, PLCs, Switches, Routers) connected to the same LAN.
The maximum length of the LAN cable, cat. 5 UTP allowed by IEEE 802 standards results from the max. transit time allowed from the protocol and is equal to 100m. The longer the cable length, the higher the risk of communications failure.
NOTE
For Ethernet wiring, only use cables certified for LAN cables of 5 UTP category or higher. For standard wiring, avoid creating your own cables;
Straight-Through or Cross-Over cables should be purchased from an authorised dealer.
NOTE
For a proper configuration and utilisation of the communications board, the user should know the basics of the TCP/IP protocol and should get familiar with the MAC address, the IP address and the ARP (Address Resolution
Protocol). The basic document on the Web is “RFC1180 – A TCP/IP Tutorial”.
11.6.3. Configuring B40 Series Boards with Ethernet Interface
Default: At first power on, the drive is allocated to the following IP address
192.168.0.2 IP
255.255.255.0 subnet mask
0.0.0.0
DHCP disable gateway
disable and connect an Ethernet cable from the board to the PC.
Open the browser and enter http:\\192.168.0.2 in the address bar.
The window below appears, showing the details of the comms module:
190/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
191/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES USER MANUAL
ACCESSORIES
Choose Configuration and enter the IP address. 10.100.120.4 with 255.255.255.0 netmask is set in the figure below.
Afterwards, c lick on “Save Settings” and send a Reset command.
The configuration of any address is done via this interface, except for the following address:
CAUTION
0.0.0.0\0.0.0.0\0.0.0.0 DHCP disable.
In that case, the address is overwritten by
192.168.0.2\255.255.255.0\0.0.0.0 DHCP disable.
In case the board IP address is not known and the DHCP is not enabled, it is possible to resume control of the board by restoring the default IP address.
To restore the default address, write parameter I080 to the drive from Modbus RTU serial interface.
Write I080 = 1 and reset the drive to restore the TCP/IP to 192.168.0.2\255.255.255.0\0.0.0.0 DHCP disable.
Unlike the Modbus RTU connection through the serial link, the Modbus/TCP connection with B40 board series is characterised by an offset of 800h (2048) for read variables.
NOTE
This is because the Ethernet board dialogues with the inverter and splits a buffer shared for two segments of 2 kbytes; one segment is dedicated to the messages sent from the inverter to the Fieldbus, the other is dedicated to the messages sent from the
Fieldbus to the inverter. For instance, in order to read Word 1 Status+Alarms from
Sinus Penta (refer to the Programming Guide), the Modbus/TCP transaction must be
addressed to log 2049, not to log 1.
On the other hand, writing occurs without any offset.
192/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
11.7. B40 Series Board for DeviceNet ®
The DeviceNet ® communications board allows interfacing a drive with an external control unit through a
more details on the inverter control modes through the DeviceNet fieldbus board.
The main features of the interface board are the following:
CIP Parameters Object Support
Explicit messages
Cyclic I/O or polling management
Automatically detectable baud rate
Optically isolated CAN interface
DIP-Switch for line termination insertion
Figure 95: DeviceNET Fieldbus Comms Board
11.7.1. Fieldbus DeviceNET Terminal Board
The DeviceNet Fieldbus communications board is provided with a removable, screwable terminal board
(pitch 5.08). The bus interface circuitry has an external supply of 24VDC ±10%, as prescribed from the CAN
DeviceNet specifications.
Terminal layout as stated in the table:
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
N.
1
Name
GND
Description
Common of the CAN driver circuit
2
3
CAN_L
CAN_SH
CAN_L link
Cable shielding
4
5
CAN_H
V_BUS
CAN_H link
24V
±
10% power supply for bus driver circuit input
The cross-sections of the allowable conductors ranges from 0.25mm
2 to 1.5mm
2 (AWG 22..14). A special terminal is required for the cable shielding conductor, so it is not necessary to connect the cable shielding to the drive earth through the tightening conductor collar.
193/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
11.7.2. Connection to the Fieldbus
The wiring quality is fundamental for the best reliability of the bus operation. For CANopen wiring, a shielded twisted pair with known resistance and impedance is recommended. The conductor unit is also fundamental for the quality of the signal. The higher the baud rates, the shortest the bus lengths allowed. The maximum length of the bus is also affected by the number of nodes. The tables below indicate the cable specifications based on the cable length and the variation features of the max. length based on the number of nodes and the cross-section of the conductors.
Tables refer to copper wires with a characteristic impedance of 120
and a typical propagation delay of
5ns/m.
Bus length [m]
Max. specific resistance of the cable [m
/m]
Recommended cross-section for conductors [mm 2 ]
Recommended terminator resistance [
]
Max. baud rate
[Kbit/s]
0÷40
40÷300
300÷600
600÷1000
70
60
40
26
0.25÷0.34
0.34÷0.60
0.50÷0.75
0.75÷0.80
124
150÷300
150÷300
150÷300
1000 kbit/s
500 kbit/s (max 100m)
100 kbit/s (max 500m)
50 kbit/s
The total resistance of the cable and number of nodes determine the max. allowable length for the cable as per static features, not for dynamic features. Indeed, the max. voltage delivered by a node with a dominant bus is reduced by the resistive divider consisting of the cable resistor and the terminator resistors. The residual voltage must exceed the dominant voltage of the receiving node. The table below indicates the max. length values based on the cable cross-section, i.e. the cable resistance, and the number of nodes.
Cross-section of the conductors [mm 2 ]
Max. wiring length [m] based on the number of nodes n. nodes < 32 n. nodes < 64 n. nodes < 100
0.25
0.50
200
360
170
310
150
270
0.75 550 470 410
The B40 Fieldbus DeviceNET board is equipped with a DIP-switch allowing inserting the termination resistor on the bus. This DIP-switch is to be inserted only in the first and last device in a DeviceNET trunk.
Each DeviceNET trunk line must meet some geometric requirements and must
NOTE provide two terminator nodes provided with suitable resistors. Consult document
PUB00027R1 “Planning and Installation Manual - DeviceNetTM Cable System” and all the application notes available from ODVA web site
( http://www.odva.org
).
194/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
11.8. Anybus-S PROFIBUS-DP ® Board
PROFIBUS-DP ® is a registered trademark of PROFIBUS International.
The Profibus communications board allows interfacing between a drive and an external control unit, such as a PLC, using a PROFIBUS-DP communications interface.
The drive operates as a Slave device and is controlled by a Master device (PLC) through command messages and reference values which are equivalent to the ones sent via terminal board. The Master device is also capable of detecting the operating status of the inverter. More details about Profibus communications
are given in the Programming Guide.
Profibus communications board has the following features:
•
Type of fieldbus: PROFIBUS-DP EN 50170 (DIN 19245 Part 1) with protocol version 1.10
•
Automatic detection of the baud rate ranging from 9600 bits/s to 12 Mbits/s
•
Communications device: PROFIBUS bus link, type A or B as mentioned in EN50170
•
Type of fieldbus: Master-Slave communications; max. 126 stations in multidrop connection
•
•
Fieldbus connector: female, 9-pin, DSUB connector
Wire: copper twisted pair (EIA RS485)
•
Max. length of the bus: 200m @ 1.5Mbits/s (can be longer if repeaters are used)
•
Isolation: the bus is galvanically isolated from the electronic devices via a DC/DC converter
•
The bus signals (link A and link B) are isolated via optocouplers
•
PROFIBUS –DP communications ASIC: chip Siemens SPC3
•
Hardware configurability: bus terminator switch and rotary-switch assigning the address to the node
•
Status indicators: indicator Led for board status and indicator Led for fieldbus status.
Figure 96: PROFIBUS-DP ® fieldbus communications board
195/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
11.8.1. Profibus® Fieldbus Connector
Female, 9-pin, D-sub connector.
Pin layout:
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
-
N.
1
2
Name
Shield
N.C.
N.C.
Description
Connector frame connected to PE
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
B-Line
RTS
GND
+5V
N.C.
N.C.
A-Line
Positive RxD/TxD according to RS 485 specifications
Request To Send – active high level when sending
Bus ground isolated from control board 0V
Bus driver supply isolated from control board circuits
Negative RxD/TxD according to RS 485 specifications
USER MANUAL
11.8.2. Configuration of the Profibus-DP Communications Board
PROFIBUS-DP communications board is provided with one DIP-switch and two rotary-switches used to set the operating mode.
The DIP-switch located next to the fieldbus connector allows activating the line terminator. The terminator is activated by pushing the lever downwards, as shown below.
Fieldbus terminator on Termination of Fieldbus line cut out
ON ON
The termination of the fieldbus line should be cut in only with the first and last device of a chain, as illustrated
The figure shows a common configuration where the first device is the Master (PLC, Bus Bridge or
Repeater), but this device can be connected also in central position. Anyway, the rule stating that termination should always be connected to first or last device, is always valid.
196/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 97: Example of a Profibus network (the correct setting of the line terminators is highlighted)
Each device in the network must have its own Profibus address. The addresses of the drives are set through the rotary-switches installed in the interface board. Each rotary-switch is provided with a pin that can be turned to position 0-9 using a small screwdriver.
The rotary-switch on the left sets the tenths of the Profibus address, while the rotary switch on the right sets
shows an example of the correct position to set address “19”.
Figure 98: Example of the rotaryswitch position to set Profibus address “19”
NOTE
The rotary-switches allow setting Profibus addresses ranging from 1 to 99.
Addresses exceeding 99 are not yet allowed.
197/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
11.8.3. Connection to the Fieldbus
Make sure that wiring is correct, especially if the fieldbus operates at high baud rates (higher than or equal to
1.5Mb/s).
Figure 97 is an example of a Profibus link connecting multiple devices.
Use special Profibus cables (“Profibus Standard Bus Cable”, Type A); do not exceed the max. allowable connection length based on the baud rate; use proper connectors.
The table below shows the standard baud rate values and the corresponding max. length of the bus if cables of Type A are used.
Allowable Baudrate
Max. Length for Cable of Type A
9.6 kbits/s 1.2 km
19.2 kbits/s
45.45 kbits/s
93.75 kbits/s
187.5 kbits/s
500 kbits/s
1.5 Mbits/s
3 Mbits/s
6 Mbits/s
1.2 km
1.2 km
1.2 km
1 km
400 m
200 m
100 m
100 m
12 Mbits/s 100 m
We recommend that Profibus FC (FastConnect) connectors be used. They offer the following benefits:
No welding required for the connections inside the cable
One ingoing cable and one outgoing cable can be used, so that connections of intermediate nodes can be stubless, thus avoiding signal reflections
The internal resistors can be connected through a switch located on the connector frame
Profibus FC connectors are provided with an internal impedance adapting network to compensate for the connector capacity.
NOTE
NOTE
If you use Profibus FC connectors with internal terminators, you can activate either the connector terminal or the board terminals (in the first/last device only).
Do not activate both terminators at a time and do not activate terminators in intermediate nodes.
A more comprehensive overview of the Profibus is given at http://www.profibus.com/ . In particular, you can download the “Installation
Guideline for PROFIBUS DP/FMS”, containing detailed wiring information, and the document named “Recommendations for Cabling and Assembly” containing important guidelines to avoid the most common wiring errors.
198/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
11.9. Anybus-S PROFIdrive ® Board
PROFIdrive® is a registered trademark of PROFIBUS International.
Any detail is given in the PROFIdrive COMMUNICATIONS BOARD – .
section.
11.10. Anybus-S DeviceNet ® Board
DeviceNet is a registered trademark of open DeviceNet Vendor Association.
The DeviceNet ® communications board allows interfacing a drive with an external control unit through a communications interface using a CAN protocol of the DeviceNet 2.0 type. The baud rate and the MAC ID can be set through the on-board DIP-switches. Max. 512 bytes for input/output data are available; some of
inverter control modes through the DeviceNet fieldbus board.
The main features of the interface board are the following:
Baud Rate: 125, 250, 500 kbits/s
DIP-switch for baud rate and MAC ID selection
Optically isolated DeviceNet interface
Max. 512 bytes for input & output data
Max. 2048 bytes for input & output data through mailbox
DeviceNet Specification version: Vol 1: 2.0, Vol 2: 2.0
Configuration test version: A-12
Figure 99: DeviceNet ® Fieldbus communications board
199/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
11.10.1. DeviceNet ® Fieldbus Terminals
USER MANUAL
The DeviceNet Fieldbus communications board is provided with a removable, screwable terminal board
(pitch 5.08). The bus interface circuitry has an external supply of 24VDC ±10%, as prescribed from the CAN
DeviceNet specifications.
Terminal arrangement as stated in the table:
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
N.
1
2
3
Name
V-
CAN_L
Negative voltage for bus supply
CAN_L bus line
Cable shielding
Description
4
5
SHIELD
CAN_H
V+
CAN_H bus line
Positive voltage for bus supply
11.10.2. Board Configuration
The on-board DIP-switches allow setting the baud rate and the MAC ID identifying the device in the
DeviceNet network.
DIP-switches 1 and 2 allow setting the baud rate, that must be the same for all the related devices. The
DeviceNet standard allows three baud rates: 125, 250 and 500 kbits/s. Possible settings are the following:
Baudrate
125 kbits/s
250 kbits/s
500 kbits/s
Setting of SW.1 & SW.2 sw.1=OFF sw.2=OFF sw.1=OFF sw.1=ON sw.2=ON sw.2=OFF
The MAC ID can be set between 0 and 63 by entering the configuration of the binary number for six DIPswitches, from sw.3 to sw.8. The most significant bit (MSB) is set through sw.3, while the least significant bit
(LSB) is set through sw.8.
Some possible settings are shown in the table below:
MAC ID
0
1
2
3
…..
SW.3 (MSB)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
…..
SW.4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
…..
SW.5
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
…..
SW.6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
…..
62
63
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
If multiple devices are connected to the same bus, different MAC IDs are to be set.
SW.7
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
…..
ON
ON
SW.8 (LSB)
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
…..
OFF
ON
200/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
11.10.3. Connection to the Fieldbus
The wiring quality is fundamental for the best reliability of the bus operation. The higher the baud rates, the shortest the bus lengths allowed.
Reliability is strongly affected by the type of wiring and the wire topology. The DeviceNet standard allows four types of wires based on the type of related devices. It also allows connecting signal dispatching nodes, line terminators and supply couplers. Two types of lines are defined: the trunk line and the drop lines. The figure below illustrates the topology of a typical DeviceNet trunk line.
Figure 100: Outline of the topology of a DeviceNet trunk line
The inverter equipped with a DeviceNet interface board is typically connected through a drop line consisting of a 5-conductor shielded cable. The DeviceNet standard defines three shielded cables based on their diameter: THICK, MID, and THIN cables. The maximum electric length between two DeviceNet devices depends on the baud rate and the type of cable being used. The table below shows the maximum lengths that are recommended based on these variables. The FLAT cable can be used for the main trunk line if drop lines are connected through a system that does not require welding.
Baud Rate
Max. length with
FLAT cable
Max. length with
THICK cable
Max. length with
MID cable
Max. length with
THIN cable
125 kbits/s
250 kbits/s
500 kbits/s
420m
200m
75m
500m
250m
100m
300m
250m
100m
100m
100m
100m
201/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
NOTE
NOTE
Each DeviceNet trunk line must meet some geometric requirements and must provide two terminator nodes and at least one supply node, because devices can be totally or partially powered via the bus. The type of the cable being used also determines the max. supply current available for the bus devices.
For a more comprehensive overview of the DeviceNet standard, go to ODVA’s home page ( http://www.odva.org
).
In particular, you can refer to the “Planning and Installation Manual” document.
NOTE
In case of failures or disturbance in the DeviceNet communications, please fill in the “DeviceNet Baseline & Test Report” form in the Appendix C of the “Planning and Installation Manual ” before contacting the After-sales service.
11.11. Anybus-S CANopen ® Fieldbus Board
CANopen ® and CiA ® are registered trademarks of CAN in Automation e.V.
The CANopen communications board allows interfacing a drive with an external control unit using communications interface operating with a CAN protocol of the CANopen type complying with the CIA DS-
301 V3.0 specifications. The baud rate and the Device Address can be set through the on-board rotary
on the inverter control modes through the CANopen fieldbus board.
The main features of the interface board are the following:
Unscheduled data exchange support
Synch & Freeze operating mode
Possibility of setting Slave Watch-dog time
Eight baud rate levels, from 10kbits/s to 1Mbit/s
Possibility of setting different Device Addresses up to max. 99 nodes
Optically isolated CAN interface
CANopen conformity: CIA DS-301 V3.0
202/ 312
Figure 101: CANopen ® fieldbus communications board
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
11.11.1. CANopen ® Fieldbus Connector
The CANopen ® communications board is provided with a 9pin male “D” connector. The bus interface circuitry is internally supplied, as prescribed by the CANopen ® specifications.
Pins are arranged as follows:
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
Description N. Name
Shell CAN_SHLD Cable shielding
1
2
-
CAN_L CAN_L line
7
8
9
3
4
5
6
CAN_GND Common terminal of the CAN driver circuit
-
CAN_SHLD Cable shielding
GND
CAN_H
-
Option common terminal internally connected to pin 3
CAN_H line
(reserved) do not use
CAUTION
The CANopen connector is the same type as the connector fitted in all the drives series for the Modbus serial communications, but the pin layout and the internal circuitry are totally different. Make sure that connectors are not mismatched! A wrong connection of the CANopen connector to the Modbus interface or vice versa can damage the inverter and the other devices connected to the Modbus and CANopen networks.
11.11.2. Board Configuration
The CANopen communications board shall be used with three rotary-switches for configuration, which are required to set up the inverter operating mode. The rotary-switches also allow setting the baud rate and the
Device Address. The figure below shows the position of the rotary-switches and a setting example with a baud rate of 125kbits/s and a Device Address equal to 29.
Figure 102: Example of the position of the rotary-switches for 125kbits/s and Device Address 29
NOTE
Device Address = 0 is not allowed by the CANopen specifications. Values ranging from 1 to 99 can be selected.
203/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES USER MANUAL
ACCESSORIES
The table below shows the possible settings of the rotary-switches for the baud rate selection.
Rotary-switch setting Baudrate
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
8
9 setting not allowed
10 kbits/s
20 kbits/s
50 kbits/s
125 kbits/s
250 kbits/s
500 kbits/s
800 kbits/s
1000 kbits/s setting not allowed
11.11.3. Connection to the Fieldbus
High quality wiring is fundamental for the correct operation of the bus. For CANopen wiring, a shielded twisted pair with known resistance and impedance is recommended. The conductor unit is also fundamental for the quality of the signal. The higher the baud rates, the shortest the bus lengths allowed. The maximum length of the bus is also affected by the number of nodes. The tables below indicate the cable specifications based on the cable length and the variation features of the max. length based on the number of nodes and the cross-section of the conductors.
Tables refer to copper wires with a characteristic impedance of 120
and a typical propagation delay of
5ns/m.
Bus length [m]
Max. specific resistance of the cable [m
/m]
70
Recommended cross-section for conductors [mm 2 ]
Recommended terminator resistance [
]
124
Max. baud rate
[Kbit/s]
0÷40
40÷300 60
0.25÷0.34
0.34÷0.6 150÷300
1000 kbits/s
500 kbits/s
(max. 100m)
300÷600 40 0.5÷0.75 150÷300
100 kbits/s
(max. 500m)
50 kbits/s 600÷1000 26 0.75÷0.8 150÷300
The total resistance of the cable and number of nodes determine the max. allowable length for the cable as per static features, not for dynamic features. Indeed, the max. voltage delivered by a node with a dominant bus is reduced by the resistive divider consisting of the cable resistor and the terminator resistors. The residual voltage must exceed the dominant voltage of the receiving node. The table below indicates the max. length values based on the cable cross-section, i.e. the cable resistance, and the number of nodes.
Cross-section of the conductors [mm 2 ]
0,25
0,5
0,75
Max. wiring length [m] based on the number of nodes number of nodes < 32
200
360
550 number of nodes < 64
170
310
470 number of nodes < 100
150
270
410
NOTE
Each CANopen trunk line shall meet particular geometric requirements and shall be equipped with two terminator nodes provided with adequate resistors. Refer to the document CiA DR-3031 “CANopen Cabling and Connector Pin Assignment” and to all the application notes available from http://www.can-cia.org
.
204/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
11.12. Anybus-S Ethernet Board for Modbus/TCP
Ethernet communications board allows interfacing a drive to an external control unit with a communications interface operating with a Modbus/TCP Ethernet (IEEE 802) protocol complying with the Modbus-IDA V1.0 specifications. The IP rating for the communications board can be configured both through the on-board DIPswitches and automatically (network assignation through a DHCP protocol).
The communications board performs automatic negotiation with the mains if the baud rate is set to 10 or 100
Mbits/s.
The main features of the interface board are the following:
Parameter configuration for Ethernet connection through DIP-switches, DHCP/BOOTP, ARP or internal Web server
Modbus/TCP slave functions of class 0, class 1 and partially class 2
Transparent socket interface for potential implementation of “over TCP/IP” dedicated protocols
Ethernet interface galvanically isolated through a transformer
Figure 103: Ethernet Fieldbus Communications Board
205/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
11.12.1. Ethernet Connector
The board is provided with a standard RJ-45 connector (IEEE 802) for Ethernet connection 10/100
(100Base-T, 10Base-T). The pin arrangement is the same as the one used for each network board computers are equipped with.
Pinout:
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
4
5
6
7
8
1
N.
2
3
Name
TD+
TD-
RD+
Term
Term
RD-
Term
Term
Description
Positive signal transmission line
Negative signal transmission line
Line receiving positive signals
Terminated pair – not used
Terminated pair – not used
Line receiving negative signals
Terminated pair – not used
Terminated pair – not used
11.12.2. Connection to the Network
Ethernet interface board can be connected to an Ethernet control device with a Modbus/TCP master protocol
(computer or PLC) through a LAN (Ethernet business network) or a direct point-to-point connection.
The board connection through a LAN is similar to a computer connection. Use a standard cable for a Switch or Hub connection or a Straight-Through Cable TIA/EIA-568-B of class 5 UTP (Patch cable for LAN).
NOTE
The Ethernet interface board cannot be connected to old LANs using Thin Ethernet
(10base2) coaxial cables. Connection to this type of LANs is possible using a Hub provided with both Thin Ethernet (10base2) connectors and 100Base-T or 10Base-T connectors. The LAN topology is a star one, with each node connected to the Hub or the Switch through its cable.
The figure below shows the pair arrangement in a 5 UTP cable and the standard colour arrangement to obtain the Straight-Through cable.
Figure 104: Cable of Cat. 5 for Ethernet and standard colour arrangement in the connector
206/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Direct point-to-point connection is obtained with a Cross-Over Cable TIA/EIA-568-B, cat. 5. This type of cable performs a cross-over of the pairs so that the TD+/TD – pair corresponds to the RD+/RD– pair, and vice versa.
The table below shows the colour matching on the connector pins for the Cross-Over Cable and the crossover diagram of the two pairs used from 100Base-T or 10Base-T connection.
Pin and wire colour (first part of the connector)
1 white/orange
2 orange
3 white/green
4 blue
5 white/blue
6 green
7 white/brown
8 brown
1
Pin and wire colour (last part of the connector) white/green
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 green white/orange white/brown brown orange blue white/blue
NOTE
The inverter is typically installed with other electric/electronic devices inside a cubicle.
Normally, the electromagnetic pollution inside the cubicle is remarkable and is due to both radiofrequency disturbance caused by the inverters and to bursts caused by the electromechanical devices. To avoid propagating disturbance to Ethernet cables, they must be segregated and kept as far as possible from the other power cables and signal cables in the cubicle.
Disturbance propagation to Ethernet cables may affect the correct operation of the inverter and the other devices (computers, PLCs, Switches, Routers) connected to the same LAN.
NOTE
The maximum length of the LAN cable, cat. 5 UTP allowed by IEEE 802 standards results from the max. transit time allowed from the protocol and is equal to 100m. The longer the cable length, the higher the risk of communications failure.
NOTE
NOTE
For Ethernet wiring, only use cables certified for LAN cables of 5 UTP category or higher. For standard wiring, avoid creating your own cables; Straight-Through or Cross-
Over cables should be purchased from an authorised dealer.
For a proper configuration and utilisation of the communications board, the user should know the basics of the TCP/IP protocol and should get familiar with the MAC address, the IP address and the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol). The basic document on the
Web is “RFC1180 – A TCP/IP Tutorial”.
207/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
11.12.3. Configuration of the Ethernet Board for Modbus/TCP
The first step in configuring the Ethernet interface board consists in communicating with the board through a computer in order to update the configuration file (etccfg.cfg) stored to the non-volatile memory of the board.
The configuration procedure is different if you use a point-to-point connection to the computer, if the board is connected to a LAN that is not provided with a DHCP server and if the board is connected to a LAN that is provided with a DHCP server. The section below covers these types of connection:
•
Point-to-point connection to the PC,
•
A board connected to a LAN that does not require a DHCP server and
•
A board connected to a LAN that requires the DHCP server.
Those connection modes are detailed below.
NOTE
For the connection to the LAN, consult your network administrator, who can tell if the
LAN is provided with a DHCP server. If this is not the case, your network administrator will assign the static IP addresses for each inverter.
Point-to-point connection to the computer
If a point-to-point connection to the computer is used, first configure the network board of the computer by setting a static IP address as 192.168.0.nnn, where nnn is any number ranging from 1 to 254.
To set the static IP address with Windows 7, open the Network Properties folder (for example typing “LAN” in
value, e.g. 192.168.0.1.
similar for computers running on other Windows versions.
208/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 105: Windows 7 - Accessing directly to the network configuration folder
209/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
210/ 312
Figure 106: Setting a computer for a point-to-point connection to the inverter
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
After configuring your computer as described above, in the DIP-switches of the communications board set a binary number different from 0, different from 255 and different from the number set in the low portion of the
IP address of the computer. For example, number 2 can be set by lowering (logic 1) only switch 7 as shown in the figure below.
Figure 107: Setting the DIP-switches to set the IP address 192.168.0.2.
If the computer is connected to the inverter through a Cross-Over Cable, a local network is created, which is composed of two participant nodes (the computer and the inverter), with 192.168.0.1 and 192.168.0.2 as IP addresses respectively. When the inverter is powered on, the LINK LED (see below) in the interface board should turn on. The following command: ping 192.168.0.2 launched by a command line window of the computer performs the correct connection to the board.
If the advanced configuration is required, the internal web server may be used. Enter the board IP address in the proper field from a popular browser. A configuration page opens, where different TCP/IP configuration
parameters of the board can be set, as shown in Figure 108.
This procedure also allows setting other different IP addresses instead of the default addresses (the format is
192.168.0.nnn).
211/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
Figure 108: Internal webserver
Connection with a computer through a LAN without any DHCP server
The network administrator will assign a static IP address for each inverter to be connected to the LAN.
Suppose that the IP address assigned from the administrator to an inverter is 10.0.254.177 and proceed as follows:
Set all the DIP-switch es in the Ethernet interface board to 0 (“up” position)
Connect the board to a switch in the LAN using a Straight-Through cable and power on the inverter
Make sure that the green light of the LINK LED (see below) comes on
Note down the MAC address of the Ethernet board that is written on a label placed at the bottom of the printed circuit.
Suppose that the MAC address of the interface board is 00-30-11-02-2A-02
In a computer connected to the same LAN (connected to the same sub-network, i.e. with an IP address equal to 10.0.254.xxx), open the command interpreter window and enter the following commands:
arp – s 10.0.254.177 00-30-11-02-2A-02 ping 10.0.254.177
arp – d 10.0.254.177
In the ARP table of the computer, the first command will create a static entry assigning the matching between the MAC address of the board and the static IP address.
The ping command queries the interface board to check the connection and returns the transit time of the
data packet between the computer and the board through the network, as shown in Figure 109.
212/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 109: Example of the ping command to the IP address of the inverter interface board
When the interface board is sent the data packet, it gets the MAC address-IP address match as a permanent match, then it compiles and saves an “ethcfg.cfg” file, where the IP address 10.0.254.177 is stored as its own address each time the inverter is turned on.
Command number 3 is optional and removes the static match IP-MAC related to the inverter Ethernet board from the ARP table of the inverter.
Connection with a computer through a LAN equipped with a DHCP server
If an inverter equipped with an Ethernet board is connected to the LAN and if all the DIP-switches are set to zero (“up” position), when the inverter is powered on, automatic negotiation with the DHCP server takes place and the inverter is assigned an IP address chosen among the available ones. This configuration is then stored to the “ethcfg.cfg” file.
The “Anybus IP config” utility, available for donwload from santerno.com
, Software tab of the product sheet concerned, can be used to query all the inverters with an Ethernet interface in the LAN from the same computer and, if required, the network access parameters can be reconfigured. The figure below shows the page of the programme when an inverter is acknowledged. Multiple inverters can be identified from the same network through their own value of the MAC address.
Figure 110: Anybus IP config utility
Query of the inverter data through the ModScan programme
Once configuration is achieved and the IP address of the interface board is available, you can query the inverter variables through the Modbus/TCP protocol. WinTECH’s ModScan application ( http://www.wintech.com/ ) allows displaying the variables read with the Modbus.
The figure below shows the setting shield of ModScan for the connection of a board with the IP address
10.0.254.177. For the Modbus/TCP connection, port 502 is provided by the Ethernet interface. Port 502 is to be used for all the Modbus transactions.
213/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
Figure 111: Setting ModScan for a Modbus/TCP connection
acquired in real time and are provided by the Modbus/TCP protocol. Refer to the Programming Guide,
Fieldbus Configuration menu, for any detail about the map and the meaning of the input/output variables.
Figure 112: Display of the output variables of the inverter through the Modbus/TCP protocol
214/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
NOTE
Unlike the Modbus RTU connection through the serial link, the Modbus/TCP connection is characterised by an offset of 400h (1024) for write variables, because the Ethernet board dialogues with the inverter and splits a buffer shared for two segments of 1kbyte each. One segment is dedicated to the messages sent from the inverter to the
Fieldbus, the other is dedicated to the messages sent from the Fieldbus to the inverter.
In order to write Word 1 M042 -Speed Reference from FIELDBUS (integer part) (refer to
the Programming Guide), the Modbus/TCP transaction must be addressed to log 1025,
not to log 1.
On the other hand, reading usually occurs without any offset.
11.13. Environmental Requirements Common to All Boards
Operating temperature
Relative humidity
Max. operating altitude
–10 to +55°C ambient temperature (contact Enertronica Santerno
S.p.A. for higher ambient temperatures)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
2000 m a.s.l. For installation above 2000 m and up to 4000 m, please contact Enertronica Santerno S.p.A..
215/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
12. ES919 COMMUNICATIONS BOARD (SLOT B)
USER MANUAL
Product-Accessory Compatibility
Product
Sinus Penta
Penta Marine
Iris Blue
Solardrive Plus
ES919 Communications
Board
√
√
√
√
Comments
Table 13: Product – ES919 Communications board compatibility
ES919 communications board makes other communications protocol available in addition to the
protocols described in Option Boards For Fieldbus (Slot B). These communications boards allow
Metasys N2- and BACnet-based systems.
Metasys ® N2,
BACnet ® .
12.1.
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
When ES919 board is fitted into slot B, no other board (ES847, ES861, ES870,
ES950, ES966, ES988) can be fitted into slot C.
ES919 board behaves as a serial gateway and makes all the Mxxx measurements and the Ixxx inputs available to the addresses given in the
The “Fieldbus” section in the Programming Guide does not apply to ES919
comms board.
Identification Data
Description
BACnet/RS485 Module
BACnet/Ethernet Module
Metasys N2 Module
Part Number
ZZ0102402
ZZ0102404
ZZ0102406
12.2. Environmental Requirements Common to All Boards
Operating temperature
Relative humidity
Max. operating altitude
–10 to +55°C ambient temperature (contact Enertronica Santerno
S.p.A. for higher ambient temperatures)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
2000 m a.s.l. For installation above 2000 m and up to 4000 m, please contact Enertronica Santerno S.p.A..
216/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
12.3. Electrical Features Common to All Boards
CAUTION
ES919 is enabled through switch SW1 (factory setting).
If enabled (LED L1 ON), the RS485 serial port located on the inverter (serial link
0 – CN9 in the control board) is automatically disabled.
The operation of ES919 control board is as follows:
SW1
OFF
ON
(default)
L3(EN)
L1(TX)
L2(RX)
L3(EN)
L1(TX)
L2(RX)
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
FLASHING (IF COMMUNICATION IS OK)
FLASHING (IF COMMUNICATION IS OK)
12.4. Installing the ES919 Board on the Drive (Slot B)
DANGER
CAUTION
NOTE
Before gaining access to the components inside the inverter, remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes. Wait for a complete discharge of the internal capacitors to avoid any electric shock hazard.
Electric shock hazard: do not connect/disconnect the signal terminals or the power terminals when the inverter is on. This also prevents the inverter from being damaged.
All the screws used to fasten removable parts (terminals cover, serial interface connector, cable plates, etc.) are black, round-head, cross-head screws.
When wiring the inverter, remove only this type of screws. If different screws or bolts are removed, the inverter warranty will be no longer valid.
NOTE
If ES919 board is configured as BACnet Ethernet, one of the three fixing screws is located beneath the Ethernet module.
1. Remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes.
2. Remove the inverter cover for accessing the control terminals. The fixing spacers and the signal connector are located on the right.
217/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
Figure 113: Position of the slot for ES919 board
3. Fit ES919 board and make sure that all contacts enter the relevant housing in the signal connector.
Fasten the encoder board to the fixing spacers using the screws supplied.
4. Enable the communication port with switch SW1.
5. Close the inverter frame by reassembling the cover allowing gaining access to the inverter control terminals.
12.4.1. ES919 Board for Metasys ® N2
ES919 board for Metasys ® N2 uses RS485 serial port to communicate with the system via the communication protocol “Metasys N2” by Johnson Controls ( http://www.johnsoncontrols.com
).
Metasys is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls Inc.
Please visit www.johnsoncontrols.com
.
ES919 board includes the ProtoCessor ASP-485 module.
218/ 312
Figure 114: ES919 Board for Metasys ® N2
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
12.4.2. Configuration
Protocol
Default Baud
Default Station ID
Fieldbus Port
Inverter Port
MetasysN2 MODBUS RTU
9600 8N1
11
38400 8N2
1
12.4.3. RS485 Connector
The communications port includes a positive pole (+), a negative pole (-) and the ground (G).
Figure 115: RS485 connector for Metasys ® N2
12.4.4. LEDs on the ASP485 ProtoCessor Module
BLUE
[L8] [L7]
COMMS
ORANGE
[L6]
RUN
[L5]
YELLOW
[L4] [L3]
NO DEFAULT
RED
[L2] [L1]
ERROR
LED COLOUR DESCRIPTION
L8
L7
L6
BLUE
BLUE
ORANGE
ON: Field Port packet received
OFF: Field Port response sent
ON: Inverter Port Send Poll
OFF: Inverter Port Receive Valid Response
ON (flashing 2Hz) : ProtoCessor is running normally
OFF: ProtoCessor is not running
L5 ORANGE Not Used
L4
L3
L2
L1
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED
ON: MODBUS Slave address set by DIP-switch
OFF: MODBUS Default Address at factory default = 11
ON: Baud Rate set by DIP-switch
OFF: Baud Rate at factory default = 9600
ON: Bad Poll, No Map Descriptor found
OFF: Once Exception response has been sent [*]
ON: Panic
OFF: No Panic has occurred
[*] If you receive a poll for data that does not exist, you turn that LED on briefly.
Basically, the system received a valid poll, but could not find a corresponding data point.
219/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
12.4.5. Baud Rate DIP-switches
B1
0 Use factory default Baud Rate = 9600 (L3 = OFF)
1 Use Baud from Switches as per table below (L3 = ON)
B2 B3 B4 Baud Rate
0 0 0 1200
1 0 0 2400
0 1 0 4800
1 1 0 9600
0 0 1 19200
1 0 1 38400
0 1 1 57600
1 1 1 115200
12.4.6. Address DIP-Switches
A1-A8
Corresponds to the Metasys N2 Address
L4 will indicate that the DIP-switch address is being used
12.5. ES919 Board for BACnet/Ethernet
USER MANUAL
The Module BACnet/Ethernet board uses the Ethernet port to communicate with the system using the
BACnet communications protocol.
BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks . Developed under the auspices of the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE), BACnet is an American national standard, a European standard, a national standard in more than 30 Countries, and an ISO global standard ( ISO 16484-5 ). The protocol is supported and maintained by
ASHRAE Standing Standard Project Committee 135 (SSPC 135).
Please see http://www.bacnet.org
.
This board is composed of the ProtoCessor FFP-485 communications module.
220/ 312
Figure 116: ES919 Board for BACnet/Ethernet
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
12.5.1. Ethernet Connector
The standard RJ45 connector (IEEE 802) located on the module can be used only for an Ethernet 10/100
(100Base-T, 10Base-T) connection. Pins are located as in any computer card.
Pins are as follows:
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
1
2
3
N. Name
TD+
TD –
Description
Positive signal transmission line
Negative signal transmission line
Positive signal reception line
4
5
6
7
8
RD+
Term
Term
RD –
Term
Term
Terminated pair - not used
Terminated pair - not used
Negative signal reception line
Terminated pair - not used
Terminated pair - not used
12.5.2. LEDs on the FFP485 ProtoCessor Module
LED
PWR
LA
LB
GP105
Rx
Tx
COLOUR DESCRIPTION
YELLOW
ON: Module powered
OFF: Module not powered
RED
ON (flashing 1Hz): Normal operation
OFF: PANIC
ON (flashing 1Hz): Normal operation
RED
OFF: PANIC
ON (goes solid after 45-60s): Normal operation
RED
OFF: during the first 45-60s
YELLOW Flashing when a message is received on the field port
YELLOW Flashing when a message is sent on the field port
Figure 117: BACnet LEDs
221/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
12.5.3. Troubleshooting Tips
USER MANUAL
If PWR LED does not come on and LA and LB do not flash, please contact ENER TRONICA SANTERNO’s
Customer Service.
If PWR LED does not come on but the LA and LB flash, then the PWR LED is faulty.
If LA and LB do not start flashing, this may indicate a problem with the ProtoCessor. Contact
ENER TRONICA SANTERNO’s Customer Service.
If GP105 never comes on, please contact ENER TRONICA SANTERNO’s Customer Service.
If TX and or RX do not flash, this may indicate a problem with the field wiring; the configuration in the
ProtoCessor on the field side; incorrect polling parameters (such as COMM properties like baud, parity, etc).
222/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
12.5.4. Board Configuration
The BACnet configuration software is available for download from santerno.com
, Software tab of the product sheet concerned. To install the software, just run the “Sinus Penta BacNet Setup.exe” file.
After installation, run the “Sinus Penta BACnet configurator.exe” file, which will load the BACnet configuration software.
Figure 118: BACnet IP Configuration
To configure and download the settings follow the steps below:
1. Set up a connection on IP address 192.168.1.X from the host PC (Default IP address of the BACnet fieldbus card is 192.168.1.24). DISABLE ANY OTHER NETWORK CARD, ANY FIREWALL OR
ANITIVIRUS programs.
2. Connect the host PC to the BACnet device using an Ethernet crossover cable or straight-through cable if connecting from a Hub/Switch.
3. Ping the BA Cnet device using the “Ping BACnet gateway” button within the BACnet configurator software to ensure communication has been achieved. A command window will appear, containing the
IP address of any BACnet fieldbus devices that the host PC can detect.
4. Select your choice of BACnet IP within the BACnet configuration software.
5. Enter a desired IP address, Subnet mask and BACnet port, and select DHCP if required.
6. Enter the BACnet device instance and the Network Number.
7. Click on “Create Files”.
8. Click on “Download config file” to configure the BACnet fieldbus network card.
9. Click on “Download IP data file” to configure the BACnet fieldbus network card.
10. Click on “Restart BACnet Device” after the download has completed.
223/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
12.6. ES919 Board for BACnet/RS485
USER MANUAL
The BACnet/RS485 Module card uses RS485 serial port to communicate with the system via the BACnet
MSTP communications protocol.
The card is composed of the ProtoCessor FFP-485 module (see LEDs on the FFP485 ProtoCessor Module
and Troubleshooting Tips) and of support/interface board ES919.
Figure 119: ES919 Board for BACnet/RS485
CAUTION
Although communication is made through RS485 serial port, the board shall be
configured through the Ethernet port, as explained in the Board Configuration
section.
12.6.1. RS485 Connector
The communications port includes the positive pole, the negative pole and the ground.
Figure 120: RS485 connector for BACnet/RS485
224/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
12.6.2. Board Configuration
The BACnet fieldbus communication kit contains BACnet configuration software. This software allows the user to set parameters for a specific BACnet installation
After installation, run the “Sinus Penta BACnet configurator.exe” file which will load the BACnet configuration software.
Figure 121: BACnet MSTP Configuration
To configure and download the settings follow the steps below:
1. Mount the BACnet device in the way shown in Figure 116.
2.
In order to configure a BACnet MSTP network, you need to configure each module through Ethernet interface.
3.
Set up a connection on IP address 192.168.1.X from the host PC (the default IP address of the BACnet fieldbus card is 192.168.1.24). DISABLE ANY OTHER NETWORK CARD, ANY FIREWALL OR
ANITIVIRUS program.
4. Connect the host PC to the BACnet device using an Ethernet crossover cable or straight through cable if connecting from a Hub/Switch.
5. Ping the BACnet device using the “Ping BACnet gateway” button within the BACnet configurator software to ensure communication has been achieved. A command window will appear, containing the
IP address of any BACnet fieldbus devices that the host PC can detect.
6. Select your choice of BACnet MSTP within the BACnet configuration software.
7. Enter the MAC address, baud rate, parity, # stop bits, # data bits and highest MAC address on the network.
8. Enter the BACnet device instance and the Network Number.
9. Click on “Create Files”.
10. Click on “Download config file” to configure the BACnet fieldbus network card.
11. Click on “Restart BACnet Device” after the download has completed.
12. Mount the BACnet device in the way shown in Figure 119.
13. Connect the device to the BACnet MSTP network and test if the device can be achieved.
225/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
13. BRIDGE MINI (SLOT B)
USER MANUAL
Accessory-Product Compatibility
Product
Sinus Penta
Penta Marine
Iris Blue
Solardrive Plus
Bridge Mini
√
√
√
√
Comments
Table 14: Product – Bridge Mini compatibility
The Bridge Mini is a product designed for remote monitoring and remote servicing: its easy-to-use interface running on any Web browser allows you to straightforwardly acquire measurements and operation indicators, display the main trends, upgrade the inverter firmware and download data logs.
The Bridge Mini is able to control devices of any brand and model both via IoT standard protocols and via industrial protocols.
Compact yet highly-performing, it comes in two versions:
▪ Embedded: installed inside the equipment and powered directly by the inverter for optimum convenience and ease of installation.
▪ Stand-alone: featuring DIN support for in-cabinet installation.
The Bridge Mini interconnects to the system devices via serial links on two RS485 ports, called COM1 and
COM2, and one Ethernet port. USB flash drives may be connected to the Bridge Mini to download data logs.
It is connected to Santerno Cloud via secure and encrypted Internet connections for remote monitoring and remote servicing.
226/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 122: Bridge Mini Embedded
Figure123: Bridge Mini Stand alone
13.1. Identification Data
Description
Bridge Mini Embedded
Bridge Mini Stand alone
13.2. Installing the Board on the Inverter (Slot B)
Please refer to the BRIDGE MINI – User Manual .
13.3. Connectivity
Please refer to the BRIDGE MINI – User Manual .
Part Number
ZZR1007A0
ZZ4600600
227/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
14. ES847 I/O EXPANSION BOARD (SLOT C)
USER MANUAL
Product-Accessory Compatibility
Product
Sinus Penta
Penta Marine
Iris Blue
Solardrive Plus
ES847 I/O Expansion board
√
√
√
√
Comments
Table 15: Product - ES847 I/O Expansion board compatibility
ES847 Board allows implementing an additional I/O set for any product compatible with this accessory.
Additional functionality includes:
-
-
XAIN4: One “fast” sampling analog input, 12 bit ±10V f.s;
XAIN5: One “fast” sampling analog input for 0-20mA f.s. sensor measurement, resolution 11 bits
-
XAIN7: One “fast” sampling analog input for ±160mA f.s. sensor measurements; resolution: 12 bits
-
(Energy Counter option);
XAIN8/9/10/11: Four “slow” sampling inputs, 12-bit, configurable as 0-10V f.s., 0-20 mA f.s., 0-100
mV f.s., temperature acquisition via two-wire thermistor PT100;
XAIN12/13: Two “slow” sampling analog inputs, 12-bit, 0-10V f.s.;
VAP/VBP/VCP: Three voltage inputs for ADE (Energy Counter option);
-
IAP/IBP/ICP: Three current inputs for ADE (Energy Counter option);
XMDI1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8: Eight PNP, 24V multifunction digital inputs; three of them are “fast propagation”
inputs and can be used for the acquisition of a PUSH-PULL, 24V encoder;
XMDO1/2/3/4: Six multifunction digital outputs, OC outputs free from potential to be used both as
PNP and NPN inputs, Vomax=48V, Iomax=50mA, providing short-circuit protection through a resettable fuse.
CAUTION
Not all I/Os are controlled from all the products. Please refer to the DIP-
switch/Note column in ES847 Board Terminals and to the Guide to the
CAUTION
If ES847 board is mounted in slot C, ES919 cannot be mounted in slot B (see ES919
Communications Board (Slot B)).
228/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
14.1.
Figure 124: Signal conditioning and additional I/Os board (ES847)
Identification Data
Description
ES847/1 Signal conditioning
Part Number
ZZ0101814
Installing ES847 Board on the Inverter (Slot C) 14.2.
DANGER
CAUTION
NOTE
CAUTION
Before gaining access to the components inside the inverter, remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes. Wait for a complete discharge of the internal capacitors to avoid any electric shock hazard.
Electric shock hazard: do not connect/disconnect the signal terminals or the power terminals when the inverter is on. This also prevents the inverter from being damaged.
All the screws used to fasten removable parts (terminals cover, serial interface connector, cable plates, etc.) are black, round-head, cross-head screws.
When wiring the inverter, remove only this type of screws. If different screws or bolts are removed, the inverter warranty will be no longer valid.
1. Remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes.
2. Remove the whole inverter covering by loosening the four hexagonal screws located on the top side
and bottom side of the inverter to reach the fixing spacers and the signal connector (Figure 125
–
Slot C.)
Before removing the inverter cover, draw out the keypad and disconnect the cable connecting the keypad to the control board to avoid damaging the link between the keypad and the control board.
229/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
Figure 125: Removing the inverter cover; location of slot C
3. Insert the two contact strips supplied in the bottom part of ES847 board; make sure that each contact enters its slot in the connector. Insert ES847 board over the control board of the drive; make sure that each contact enters its slot in the signal connector. Use the screws supplied to fasten board
ES847 to the fixing spacers (Figure 126).
Figure 126: Fitting the strips inside ES847 board and fixing the board on slot C
4. Configure the DIP-switches located on board ES847 based on the type of signals to be acquired
(see relevant section).
5. For the terminal board wiring, follow the instructions given in the section below.
6. Close the inverter frame by reassembling the cover allowing gaining access to the inverter control terminals.
230/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
14.3. ES847 Board Terminals
Screwable terminal board including 12 sections (each section can be individually removed) for 0.08 to
1.5mm
2 (AWG 28-16) cables.
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1.
N. Name Description I/O Features
DIPswitch/Notes
1-2
3
XAIN1+
XAIN1
–
CMA
“Fast” differential auxiliary analog input, ±10V f.s., number 1
0V for analog inputs (common to control 0V)
Vfs = ±10V, Rin= 10k
;
Resolution: 12 bits
Control board zero Volt n.u.
4-5
6
7-8
9-10
11-12
13
14
15
16
17
18
+15VM
–
15VM
CMA
XAIN2+
XAIN2
–
XAIN3+
XAIN3
–
XAIN4+
XAIN4 –
XAIN5
CMA
XAIN6
CMA
XAIN7
CMA
19 VAP
20 VBP
21 VCP
22 CMA
23 IAP
24 IBP
25 ICP
26 CMA
Stabilized, bipolar output protected from shortcircuits for auxiliary circuits.
0V for analog inputs (common to control 0V)
“Fast” differential auxiliary analog input, ±10V f.s.
number 2
“Fast” differential auxiliary analog input, ±10V f.s.
number 3
“Fast” differential auxiliary analog input, ±10V f.s.
number 4
“Fast” auxiliary analog input (current input), number 5
0V for analog inputs for XAIN5 return
“Fast” auxiliary analog input (current input), number 6
0V for analog inputs for XAIN6 return
“Fast” auxiliary current analog input, number 7
(Energy Counter option)
0V for analog inputs (common with control 0V)
Voltage analog input from ES917 – phase R
(Energy Counter Option)
Voltage analog input from ES917 – phase S
(Energy Counter Option)
Voltage analog input from ES917 – phase T
(Energy Counter Option)
0V for analog inputs (common with control 0V)
Current analog input from CT – phase R
(Energy Counter Option)
Current analog input from CT – phase S
(Energy Counter Option)
Current analog input from CT – phase T
(Energy Counter Option)
0V for analog inputs (common with control 0V)
+15 V, –15V; Iout max: 100mA
Control board zero Volt
Vfs = ±10V, Rin= 10k
;
Resolution: 12 bits
Vfs = ±10V, Rin= 10k
;
Resolution: 12 bits
Vfs = ±10V, Rin= 10k
;
Resolution: 12 bits
Ifs = ±20mA, Rin= 200
;
Resolution: 12 bits
Control board zero Volt
Ifs = ±20mA, Rin= 200
;
Resolution: 12 bits
Control board zero Volt
Ifs = ±160mA, Rin= 33
;
Resolution: 12 bits
Control board zero Volt
Vfs = ±10V, Rin= 50k
;
Resolution: 12 bits
Vfs = ±10V, Rin= 50k
;
Resolution: 12 bits
Vfs = ±10V, Rin= 50k
;
Resolution: 12 bits
Control board zero Volt
Ifs = ±150mA, Rin= 33
;
Resolution: 12 bits
Ifs = ±150mA, Rin= 33
;
Resolution: 12 bits
Ifs = ±150mA, Rin= 33
;
Resolution: 12 bits
Control board zero Volt n.u.
n.u.
PD
PD n.u.
PR
PR
PR
PR
PR
PR
PR
PD : Used by the firmware of all the products compatible with this accessory.
PR : Used by the Sinus Penta/Penta Marine featuring the Regenerative application when the Energy Counter option is installed.
231/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
N.
27
Name
XAIN8/T1+
Description
“Slow” configurable auxiliary analog input, number 8
I/O Features
Vfs = 10V, Rin = 30k
Vfs = 100mV, Rin = 1M
Ifs = 20mA, Rin = 124.5
DIPswitch/Notes
SW1.3 = ON
SW1.1-2-4 = OFF
SW1.4 = ON
SW1.1-2-3 = OFF
SW1.2 = ON
SW1.1-3-4 = OFF
28
29
CMA/T1
–
XAIN9/T2+
Thermistor temperature measurement, number 1
0V for analog inputs for XAIN8 return
“Slow” configurable auxiliary analog input, number 9
Temperature measurement with PT100
Compliant with IEC 60751 or
DIN 43735
Control board zero Volt
Vfs = 10V, Rin = 30k
Vfs = 100mV, Rin = 1M
Ifs = 20mA, Rin = 124.5
SW1.1-4 = ON
SW1.2-3 = OFF
(default)
SW1.7 = ON
SW1.5-6-8 = OFF
SW1.8 = ON
SW1.5-6-7 = OFF
SW1.6 = ON
SW1.5-7-8 = OFF
30
31
CMA/T2
–
Thermistor temperature measurement, number 2
0V for analog inputs for XAIN9 return
Temperature measurement with PT100
Compliant with IEC 60751 or
DIN 43735
Control board zero Volt
Vfs = 10V, Rin = 30k
XAIN10/T3+
“Slow” configurable auxiliary analog input, number
10
Vfs = 100mV, Rin = 1M
Ifs = 20mA, Rin = 124.5
SW1.5-8 = ON
SW1.6-7 = OFF
(default)
SW2.3 = ON
SW2.1-2-4 = OFF
SW2.4 = ON
SW2.1-2-3 = OFF
SW2.2 = ON
SW2.1-3-4 = OFF
32
33
CMA/T3
–
Thermistor temperature measurement, number 3
0V for analog inputs for XAIN10 return
XAIN11/T4+
“Slow” configurable auxiliary analog input, number
11
Vfs = 100mV, Rin = 1M
Ifs = 20mA, Rin = 124.5
Thermistor temperature measurement, number 4
34 CMA/T4
–
0V for analog inputs for XAIN11 return
35 XAIN12
36 CMA
37 XAIN13
38 CMA
“Slow” voltage auxiliary analog input, number 12
0V for analog inputs for XAIN12 return
“Slow” voltage auxiliary analog input, number 13
0V for analog inputs for XAIN13 return
Temperature measurement with PT100
Compliant with IEC 60751 or
DIN 43735
Control board zero Volt
Vfs = 10V, Rin = 30k
SW2.1-4 = ON
SW2.2-3 = OFF
(default)
SW2.7 = ON
SW2.5-6-8 = OFF
SW2.8 = ON
SW2.5-6-7 = OFF
SW2.6 = ON
SW2.5-7-8 = OFF
Temperature measurement with PT100
Compliant with IEC 60751 or
DIN 43735
Control board zero Volt
Vfs = 10V, Rin = 30k
Control board zero Volt
Vfs = 10V, Rin = 30k
Control board zero Volt
SW2.5-8 = ON
SW2.6-7 = OFF
(default) n.u.
n.u. n.u. n.u.
232/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
N. Name
39 XMDI1
40 XMDI2
41 XMDI3
42 XMDI4
43 CMD
44 +24V
45 XMDI5
XMDI6 /
46 ECHA /
FINA (*)
47
48
XMDI7 /
ECHB (*)
XMDI8 /
FINB
49 +24V
50 CMD
51 XMDO1
52 CMDO1
53 XMDO2
54 CMDO2
55 XMDO3
56 CMDO3
57 XMDO4
58 CMDO4
59 XMDO5
60 CMDO5
61 XMDO6
62 CMDO6
Description I/O Features
DIPswitch/Notes
Multifunction auxiliary digital input 1
Multifunction auxiliary digital input 2
Multifunction auxiliary digital input 3
Multifunction auxiliary digital input 4
0 V digital input isolated to control 0 V
Auxiliary supply output for opto-isolated multifunction digital inputs
Auxiliary multifunction digital input 5
Auxiliary multifunction digital input 6 / Single-ended, push-pull 24V encoder input, phase A / Frequency input
A
Auxiliary multifunction digital input 7 / Single-ended, push-pull 24V encoder input, phase B
Auxiliary multifunction digital input 8 / Frequency input B
24Vdc Opto-isolated digital inputs; positive logic (PNP): active with high level signal in respect to CMD
(terminals 43 and 50).
In compliance with EN
61131-2 as type 1 digital inputs (24Vdc rated voltage).
Maximum response time to processor:
500
s
Maximum response time to processor:
600ns
Auxiliary supply output for opto-isolated multifunction digital inputs
0 V digital input isolated to control 0 V
+24V±15%; Imax: 200mA
Protected by resettable fuse
Opto-isolated digital input zero volt
Multifunction auxiliary digital output 1 (collector)
Multifunction auxiliary digital output 1 (emitter)
Multifunction auxiliary digital output 2 (collector)
Multifunction auxiliary digital output 2 (emitter)
Multifunction auxiliary digital output 3 (collector)
Multifunction auxiliary digital output 3 (emitter)
Multifunction auxiliary digital output 4 (collector)
Multifunction auxiliary digital output 4 (emitter)
Multifunction auxiliary digital output 5 (collector)
Multifunction auxiliary digital output 5 (emitter)
Multifunction auxiliary digital output 6 (collector)
Multifunction auxiliary digital output 6 (emitter)
Open collector isolated digital outputs, Vomax =
48V; Iomax = 50mA
14.4.
NOTE
(*)
CAUTION
All digital outputs are inactive under the following conditions:
inverter off;
inverter initialization stage after power on;
firmware updating.
Consider this when choosing the inverter application.
Terminals MDI6/ECHA/FINA and MDI7/ECHB on the control board are no longer active when ES847 is fitted and are automatically replaced by the relevant XMDI6 and XMDI7 terminals.
Configuration DIP-switches
the table below.
SW1 Sets the operating mode for “slow” analog inputs XAIN8 and XAIN9
SW2 Sets the operating mode for “slow” analog inputs XAIN10 and XAIN11
SW3
Factory-setting: SW3.2=SW3.5=SW3.7=ON; the other DIP-switches are OFF factory-setting –
–
Do not change
233/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
14.5. Possible Settings for DIP-switches SW1 and SW2
Mode: 0-10V f.s.
(Default configuration)
SW1
ON
Configuring Slow Analog Channel XAIN8
Mode: 0-100mV f.s. Mode: 0-20mA f.s.
SW1
ON
SW1
ON
1 2 3 4
Mode: 0-10V f.s.
(Default configuration)
SW1
ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Setting Slow Analog Channel XAIN9
Mode: 0-100mV f.s.
SW1
ON
Mode: 0-20mA f.s.
SW1
ON
USER MANUAL
Temperature Reading with Thermistor PT100
(default)
SW1
ON
1 2 3 4
Temperature Reading with Thermistor PT100
(default)
SW1
ON
5 6 3 8
Mode: 0-10V f.s.
(Default configuration)
SW2
ON
5 6 7 8 5 3 7 8
Setting Slow Analog Channel XAIN10
Mode: 0-100mV f.s.
SW2
ON
Mode: 0-20mA f.s.
SW2
ON
1 2 3 4
Mode: 0-10V f.s.
(Default configuration)
SW2
ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Setting Slow Analog Channel XAIN11
Mode: 0-100mV f.s.
SW2
ON
Mode: 0-20mA f.s.
SW2
ON
5 6 7 8
Temperature Reading with Thermistor PT100
(default)
SW2
ON
1 2 3 4
Temperature Reading with Thermistor PT100
(default)
SW2
ON
5 6 3 8 5 6 7 8 5 3 7 8 5 6 7 8
(see table below).
234/ 312
USER MANUAL
Type of Preset
Acquisition
Voltage: 0÷10V
Voltage: 0÷100mV
Current: 0÷20 mA
Current: 4÷20 mA
Temperature
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Mode Set for SW1 and
SW2
Mode: 0-10V f.s.
Mode: 0-100mV f.s.
Mode: 0-20mA f.s.
Mode: 0-20mA f.s.
Temperature Reading with Thermistor PT100
(default)
Full-scale Values and Notes
0÷10V
0÷100mV
0mA ÷ 20mA
4mA ÷ 20mA. Alarm for measurement < 2mA (cable disconnection) or for measurement > 25mA.
–50°C ÷ 125°C. Disconnection alarm or short-circuit sensor if resistance measurement is lower/higher than the preset range.
NOTE
NOTE
CAUTION
Parameter settings must be consistent with DIP-switch settings. Otherwise, unpredictable results for real acquisition are produced.
A voltage/current value exceeding the input range will be saturated at minimum or maximum value.
Inputs configured as voltage inputs have high input impedance and must be closed when active. The disconnection of the conductor relating to an analog input configured as a voltage input does not ensure that the channel reading is
“zero”. Proper “zero” reading occurs only if the input is connected to a lowimpedance signal source or is short-circuited. Do not series-connect relay contacts to inputs to obtain “zero” reading.
235/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
14.6. Wiring Diagrams
USER MANUAL
14.6.1.
Connection of “Fast” Differential Analog Inputs
A differential input allows weakening disturbance due to “ground potentials” generated when the signal is acquired from remote sources. Disturbance is weaker only if wiring is correct.
Each input is provided with a positive terminal and a negative terminal of the differential amplifier. They are to be connected to the signal source and to its ground respectively. Common voltage for the signal source ground and the ground of the CMA auxiliary inputs must not exceed the maximum allowable value.
To reduce noise for a differential input, do the following:
ensure a common path for the differential torque
connect the source common to CMA input in order not to exceed the common mode input voltage
use a shielded cable and connect its braiding to the terminal located next to the inverter terminal boards.
ES847 Board is also provided with an auxiliary supply output protected by a fuse which can be used to power external sensors. Do not exceed the max. current ratings.
Wiring is shown in the figure below:
Figure 127: Connection of a bipolar voltage source to a differential input
NOTE
NOTE
Connecting terminal CMA to the signal source ground ensures better acquisition standards. Wiring can be external to the shielded cable or it can consist of the optional common connection of the auxiliary supply.
Auxiliary supply outputs are electronically protected against temporary shortcircuits. After wiring the inverter, check output voltage, because a permanent short-circuit can damage the inverter.
236/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
14.6.2. Connection of “Fast” Current Inputs
Three “fast” low-impedance analog inputs are available, which are capable of acquiring sensors with current output.
The correct wiring is shown in the diagram below.
Figure 128 : Connection of 0÷20mA (4÷20mA) sensors to “fast” current inputs
NOTE
Do not use +24V power supply, available on terminals 44 and 49 in ES847 board, to power 4÷20mA sensors, because it is to be used for the common of the digital inputs (CMD – terminals 43 and 50), not for the common of the analog inputs (CMA). Terminals 44 and 49 are galvanically isolated and must be kept galvanically isolated.
14.6.3. Connecting “Slow” Analog Inputs to Voltage Sources
Use a shielded pair data cable and connect its braiding to the side of ES847 board. Connect the cable braiding to the inverter frame using the special conductor terminals located next to the terminal boards.
Although “slow” acquisition analog channels have a cut-off frequency slightly exceeding 10Hz and the mains frequency, which is the main disturbance source, is weakened, make sure that wiring is correct, particularly if the full-scale value is 100mV and if wires are longer than 10 m. The figure below shows a wiring example for the acquisition of a voltage source.
Properly set the DIP-switches for the configuration of the analog channel being used: set the full-scale value to 10V or to 100mV. The setting of the programming parameter must be consistent with the hardware setting.
Voltage analog
output
OUT
Voltage analog input
XAINx 27,29,31,33,35,37
ADC
GND CMA 28,30,32,34,36,38
0V control board
P000273-B
Figure 129 : Connecting a voltage source to a “slow” analog input
237/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
14.6.4. Connecting “Slow” Analog Inputs to Current Sources
USER MANUAL
shows how to connect “slow” analog inputs to current sources. Channels XAIN8, XAIN9, XAIN10,
XAIN11 —corresponding to terminals 27, 29, 31, 33—are capable of acquiring current signals with a full-scale value of 20mA. Properly set the DIP-switches for the configuration of the analog channel being used: set the full-scale value to 20mA and set the relevant programming parameter to 0÷20mA or 4÷20mA.
14.6.5. Connecting “Slow” Analog Inputs to Thermistor PT100
ES847 board allows reading temperatures directly from the connection of standard thermistors PT100 complying with DIN EN 60751. Two-wire connection is used for easier wiring. Use relatively short cables and make sure that cables are not exposed to sudden temperature variations when the inverter is running.
frame through the special conductor terminals.
If a cable longer than approx. 10 metres is used, measurement calibration is required. For example, if a
1mm 2 (AWG 17) shielded pair data cable is used, this results in a reading error of approx. +1°C every 10 metres.
To perform measurement calibration, instead of the sensor connect a PT100 sensor emulator set to 0°C (or a 100
0.1% resistor) to the line terminals, then zeroing the measurement offset. More details are given in
PT100 emulator allows checking the measurement before connecting the sensor.
Figure 130: Connecting thermoresistors PT100 to analog channels XAIN8 –11 / T1–4
NOTE
NOTE
CAUTION
Parameter settings must be consistent with DIP-switch settings. Otherwise, unpredictable results for real acquisition are produced.
A voltage/current value exceeding the input range will be saturated at minimum or maximum value.
Inputs configured as voltage inputs have high input impedance and must be closed when active. The disconnection of the conductor relating to an analog input configured as a voltage input does not ensure that the channel reading is zero. Proper “zero” reading occurs only if the input is connected to a lowimpedance signal source or is short-circuited. Do not series-connect relay contacts and inputs to obtain “zero” reading.
238/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
14.6.6. Connecting Isolated Digital Inputs
All digital inputs are galvanically isolated from zero volt of the inverter control board. To activate isolated digital inputs, use either isolated supply delivered to terminals 44 and 49 or 24Vdc auxiliary supply.
of a control device, such as a PLC. Internal supply (+24 Vdc, terminals 44 and 49) is protected by a 200mA resettable fuse.
Figure 131: PNP input wiring
A: PNP Command (active to +24V) sent via a voltage free contact
B: PNP Command (active to +24V) sent from a different device (PLC, digital output board, etc.)
239/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
14.6.7. Connection to an Encoder or a Frequency Input
Auxiliary digital inputs XMDI6, XMDI7, XMDI8 may acquire fast digital signals and may be used for the connection to a push-pull single-ended incremental encoder or for the acquisition of a frequency input.
Important: When ES847 board is fitted, encoder B functions are no more implemented by the basic terminal board of the control board, but are implemented by ES847 board.
NOTE
When installing ES847 board, encoder B functions are to be shifted from the basic terminal board of the control board to the terminal board of ES847 board.
P000701-B
XMDI6 46
R
XMDI7 47
R
Encoder power supply 24V
EncEEncod ernoder
CMD
24V
50
0V isolated
49
Fuse
200mA
+24V isolated
Figure 132: Connecting the incremental encoder to fast inputs XMDI7 and XMDI8
The encoder shall have PUSH-PULL outputs; its 24V power supply is delivered directly by the isolated supply internal to the inverter —terminals +24V (49) and CMD (50). The maximum allowable supply current is 200mA and is protected by a resettable fuse.
Only encoders described above can be acquired directly by the terminal board of the SINUS PENTA/PENTA
MARINE; encoder signals shall have a maximum frequency of 155kHz, corresponding to 1024 pulse/rev at 9000 rpm.
Input XMDI8 can also acquire a square-wave frequency signal ranging from 10kHZ to 100kHz, which is converted into an analog value to be used as a reference. Frequency values corresponding to the min. and max. reference can be set up as parameters. Do not exceed the allowable duty-cycle ratings for the frequency inputs.
240/ 312
Figure 133: Signal sent from a 24V, Push-pull frequency output
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
14.6.8. Connection to Isolated Digital Outputs
Multifunction outputs XMDO1..8 (terminals 51..62) are all provided with a common terminal (CMDO1..8) which is isolated from the other outputs. They can be used to control both PNP and NPN loads, based on the
wiring diagrams shown in Figure 134 and Figure 135.
Electrical conductivity (similar to a closed contact) is to be found between terminal MDO2 and CMDO2 when the output is active, i.e. when the symbol is displayed next to the output. Loads connected as PNP or as
NPN are activated.
Outputs can be powered by the inverter isolated power supply or by an external source (24 or 48V – see dashed lines in the figure below).
Figure 134: XMDOx output connection as PNP for relay command with internal power supply
Figure 135: XMDOx output connection as PNP for relay command with external power supply
241/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
Figure 136: XMDOx output connection as NPN for relay command with internal power supply
Figure 137: XMDOx output connection as NPN for relay command with external power supply
CAUTION
NOTE
NOTE
When inductive loads (e.g. relay coils) are connected, always use the freewheel diode, which is to be connected as shown in the figure.
Do not simultaneously connect the isolated internal supply and the auxiliary supply to power the isolated digital outputs. Dashed lines in the figures are alternative to standard wiring.
Digital outputs XMDO1..8 are protected from a temporary short-circuit by a resettable fuse. After wiring the inverter, check the output voltage, as a permanent short-circuit can cause irreversible damage.
14.7. Environmental Requirements
Operating temperature
Relative humidity
Max. operating altitude
–10 to +55°C ambient temperature (contact Enertronica Santerno
S.p.A. for higher ambient temperatures)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
2000 m a.s.l. For installation above 2000 m and up to 4000 m, please contact Enertronica Santerno S.p.A..
242/ 312
USER MANUAL
14.8. Electrical Ratings
14.8.1. Analog Inputs
Fast Sampling Analog Inputs, ±10V f.s.
Input impedance
Offset cumulative error and gain in respect to full-scale value
Temperature coefficient of the gain error and offset
Digital resolution
Value of voltage LSB
Common mode maximum voltage over differential inputs
Permanent overload over inputs with no damage
Input filter cut-off frequency (2nd order Butterworth filter)
Sampling time (depending on the software being used)
Fast Sampling Analog Inputs for Current Measurement
Input impedance
Offset cumulative error and gain in respect to full-scale value
Temperature coefficient of the gain error and offset
Digital resolution
Value of current LSB
Equivalent resolution in 0-20mA acquisition mode
Permanent overload over inputs with no damage
Input filter cut-off frequency (2nd order Butterworth filter)
Sampling time (depending on the software being used)
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
–15
–30
0.2
Value
Min. Type Max. Unit
10 k
0.5 %
200 ppm/°C
5.22
12
5.1
+15
+30
1.2 bit mV/LS
B
V
V kHz ms
Value
Min. Type Max. Unit
200
–5
0.2
0.5
13
5.1
200
12
10.5
+5
1.2
% ppm/°C bit
A/LSB bit
V kHz ms
243/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Slow Sampling Analog Inputs Configured in 0-10V mode
Input impedance
Offset cumulative error and gain in respect to full-scale value
Temperature coefficient of the gain error and offset
Digital resolution
Value of voltage LSB
Permanent overload over inputs with no damage
Input filter cut-off frequency (1st order low pass filter)
Sampling time (depending on the software being used)
Slow Sampling Analog Inputs Configured in 0-20mA mode
Input impedance
Offset cumulative error and gain in respect to full-scale value
Temperature coefficient of the gain error and offset
Digital resolution
Value of current LSB
Permanent overload over inputs with no damage
Input filter cut-off frequency (1st order low pass filter)
Sampling time (depending on the software being used)
Slow Sampling Analog Inputs Configured in 0-100mV mode
Input impedance
Offset cumulative error and gain in respect to full-scale value
Temperature coefficient of the gain error and offset
Digital resolution
Value of voltage LSB
Permanent overload over inputs with no damage
Input filter cut-off frequency (1st order low pass filter)
Sampling time (depending on the software being used)
244/ 312
USER MANUAL
Value
Min. Type Max. Unit
40 k
–30
10
0.5
2.44
13
200 ppm/°C
12
+30
1000
% bit mV/LS
B
V
Hz ms
–3.7
10
Value
Min. Type Max. Unit
124.5
0.5
4.90
%
200 ppm/°C
12 bit
A/LSB
13
+3,7
1000
V
Hz ms
–30
10
24.7
Value
Min. Type Max. Unit
1 M
0.2 %
50 ppm/°C
12 bit
V/LSB
13
+30
1000
V
Hz ms
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Slow Sampling Analog Inputs Configured in PT100 Temperature
Measurement Mode
Type of probe
Measurement range
Polarization current for PT100
Measurement temperature coefficient
Digital resolution
Measurement max. cumulative error for temperature ranging from –40 to
+55°C
Mean value of temperature LSB (linearization SW function)
Permanent overload over inputs with no damage
Input filter cut-off frequency (1st order low pass filter)
Sampling time (depending on the software being used)
14.8.2. Digital Inputs
Value
Min Type Max Unit .
Two-wire PT100 Thermistor
–50 260 °C
0.49
50 mA ppm/°C
11 bit
0.5 1.5 °C
–10
0.135
10
13
+10
1000
°C/LSB
V
Hz ms
Features of the Digital Inputs
Input voltage for XMDIx in respect to CMD
Voltage corresponding to logic level 1 between XMDIx and CMD
Voltage corresponding to logic level 0 between XMDIx and CMD
Current absorbed by XMDIx at logic level 1
Input frequency over “fast” inputs XMDI6..8
Allowable duty-cycle for frequency inputs
Min. time at high level f or “fast” inputs XMDI6..8
Isolation test voltage between terminals CMD (43 and 50) in respect to terminals CMA (3-6-14-16-18-28-30-32-34-36-38)
Value
Min. Type Max. Unit
–30 30 V
15
–30
24
0
30
5
V
V
5
30
9
50
12
155
70
4.5 mA kHz
%
s
500Vac, 50Hz, 1min.
245/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
14.8.3. Digital Outputs
USER MANUAL
Value
Features of the Digital Outputs
Working voltage range for outputs XMDO1..6
Max. current that can be switched from outputs XMDO1..6
Voltage drop of outputs XMDO1..6, when active
Leakage current of outputs XMDO1..6, when active
Isolation test voltage between terminals CMDO1..6 and CMA
14.8.4. Supply Outputs
Features of the Analog Supply Outputs
Min. Type Max. Unit
20 24 50
50
V mA
2
4
V
A
500Vac, 50Hz, 1min.
Value
Min. Type Max. Unit
Voltage available on terminal +15V (4) in respect to CMA (6)
Voltage available on terminal –15V (5) in respect to CMA (6)
Max. current that can be delivered from +15V output and that can be absorbed by output –15V
14.25 15 15.75 V
–15.75 –15 –14.25 V
100 mA
Features of the Digital Supply Outputs Value
NOTE
Min. Type Max. Unit
Voltage available on +24V terminals (44, 49) in respect to CMD (43, 50) 21
Max. current that can be delivered from +24V output
CAUTION
24 27
200
V mA
Irreversible faults occur if the min./max. input/output voltage ratings are exceeded.
The isolated supply output and the analog auxiliary output are protected by a resettable fuse capable of protecting the power supply unit inside the inverter against short-circuits. Nevertheless, in case of short-circuit, it can happen that the inverter does not temporarily lock and does not stop the motor.
246/ 312
USER MANUAL
15. ES870 RELAY I/O EXPANSION BOARD (SLOT C)
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Product-Accessory Compatibility
Product
Sinus Penta
Penta Marine
Iris Blue
Solardrive Plus
ES870 I/O Expansion board
√
√
√
√
Comments
Table 16: Product – ES870 I/O Expansion board compatibility
The ES870 board is an expansion board for the digital I/Os of all the products compatible with this accessory. The ES870 board includes:
XMDI1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8: Eight 24V multifunction digital inputs, type PNP . Three inputs are “fast propagation” inputs that can be used also for PUSH-PULL 24V encoder acquisition;
XMDO1/2/3/4/5/6: Six multifunction relay digital outputs (Vomax = 250 VAC, Iomax = 5A, Vomax = 30
VDC, Iomax = 5A).
15.1.
Figure 138: Relay I/O expansion board ES870
CAUTION
If ES870 board is fitted into slot C, ES919 cannot be mounted in slot B (see
ES919 Communications Board (Slot B)).
Identification Data
Description
Relay I/O Board
Part Number
ZZ0101840
247/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
15.2. Installing ES870 Board on the Inverter (Slot C)
USER MANUAL
DANGER
CAUTION
NOTE
CAUTION
Before gaining access to the components inside the inverter, remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes. Wait for a complete discharge of the internal capacitors to avoid any electric shock hazard.
Electric shock hazard: do not connect/disconnect the signal terminals or the power terminals when the inverter is on. This also prevents the inverter from being damaged.
All the screws used to fasten removable parts (terminals cover, serial interface connector, cable plates, etc.) are black, round-head, cross-head screws.
When wiring the inverter, remove only this type of screws. If different screws or bolts are removed, the inverter warranty will be no longer valid.
1. Remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes.
2. Remove the whole inverter covering by loosening the four hexagonal screws located on the top side
and bottom side of the inverter to reach the fixing spacers and the signal connector (Figure 139
–
Slot C.)
Before removing the inverter cover, draw out the keypad and disconnect the cable connecting the keypad to the control board to avoid damaging the link between the keypad and the control board.
Figure 139: Removing the inverter cover; location of slot C
248/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
3. Insert the two contact strips supplied in the bottom part of ES870 board; make sure that each contact enters its slot in the connector. Insert ES870 board over the control board of the drive; make sure that each contact enters its slot in the signal connector. Use the screws supplied to fasten board
ES870 to the fixing spacers.
4. For the terminal board wiring, follow the instructions given in the section below.
5. Close the inverter frame by reassembling the cover allowing gaining access to the inverter control terminals.
15.3. ES870 Board Terminals
Screwable terminal board in two extractable sections suitable for cross-sections 0.08 ÷ 1.5mm
2 (AWG
28-16)
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1.
N.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Name Description I/O Features
XMDI1 Multifunction auxiliary digital input 1 Opto-isolated digital inputs 24 VDC; positive logic
XMDI2 Multifunction auxiliary digital input 2
XMDI3
XMDI4
Multifunction auxiliary digital input 3
Multifunction auxiliary digital input 4
(PNP): active with positive input in respect to 0VE
(terminals 6 or 12).
In compliance with EN 61131-2 as type-1 digital inputs with rated voltage equal to 24 VDC.
+24VE
0VE
Auxiliary supply output/input for opto-isolated multifunction digital inputs/relay coils (*)
0V for digital inputs isolated in respect to control 0V
+24V±15% ; Imax output: 125mA; I max input:
75mA
Protected with resettable fuse.
Opto-isolated zero volt for digital inputs; test voltage 500Vac 50Hz 1’ in respect to inverter CMA inputs
XMDI5 Multifunction auxiliary digital input 5
XMDI6 /
ECHA /
FINA (*)
Multifunction auxiliary digital input 6
/Push-pull 24V single-ended phase A encoder input/Frequency input A
XMDI7 /
ECHB (*)
XMDI8 /
FINB
+24VE
Multifunction auxiliary digital input 7/
Push-pull 24V single-ended phase B encoder input
Multifunction auxiliary digital input 8/
Frequency input B
Auxiliary supply output/input for opto-isolated multifunction digital inputs/relay coils (**)
0VE
0V for digital inputs isolated in respect to control 0V
Opto-isolated digital inputs 24 VDC; positive logic
(PNP): active with positive input in respect to 0VE
(terminals 6 or 12).
In compliance with EN 61131-2 as type-1 digital inputs with rated voltage equal to 24 VDC.
+24V±15% ; Imax output: 125mA; I max input:
75mA
Protected with resettable fuse.
Opto-isolated zero volt for digital inputs; test voltage 500Vac 50Hz 1’ in respect to inverter CMA inputs
Notes
Maximum response time to microprocessor:
500
s
…500 s
Maximum response time to microprocessor:
600ns
(*)
CAUTION
(**)
NOTE
Terminals MDI6/ECHA/FIN A and MDI7/ECHB on the control board are no longer active when ES847 is fitted and are automatically replaced by the relevant
XMDI6 and XMDI7 terminals.
The total load on +24VE inverter connection must not exceed 200mA. The total load is referred to all +24VE connections available on the main terminal board and the option terminal board. The relay coils fitted on ES870 option board can sink up to 75mA from +24VE. Coil consumption must be subtracted from the
200mA rated current capability.
By opening jumper J1, terminal n. 5 and 11 can be used as +24Vdc supply input for relay coils, unloading the inverter internal power supply.
249/ 312
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
MOTOR DRIVES USER MANUAL
ACCESSORIES
Screwable terminal board in three extractable sections suitable for cross-sections 0.2 ÷ 2.5mm
2
(AWG 24-12)
Decisive voltage class C according to EN 61800-5-1
N. Name Description
13 XDO1-NC Multifunction, relay digital output 1 (NC contact)
I/O Features
Change-over contact: with low logic level, common terminal is closed with NC terminal; with high logic level, common terminal is open with NO;
14 XDO1-C Multifunction, relay digital output 1 (common)
15 XDO1-NO Multifunction, relay digital output 1 (NO contact)
Resistive load capability:
Vomax = 250 VAC, Iomax = 5A
Vomax = 30 VDC, Iomax = 5A
16 XDO2-NC Multifunction, relay digital output 2 (NC contact)
Inductive load capability (L/R=7ms):
17 XDO2-C Multifunction, relay digital output 2 (common) Vomax = 250 VAC, Iomax = 1.5A
Vomax = 30 VDC, Iomax = 1.5A
18 XDO2-NO Multifunction, relay digital output 2 (NO contact)
19 XDO3-NC Multifunction, relay digital output 3 (NC contact)
Isolation test voltage between contacts and coil 2500Vac
50Hz, 1’
20 XDO3-C Multifunction, relay digital output 3 (common)
Min. load: 15mA, 10Vdc
21 XDO3-NO Multifunction, relay digital output 3 (NO contact)
XDO4-NC
XDO4-C
XDO4-NO
XDO5-NC
XDO5-C
XDO5-NO
XDO6-NC
XDO6-C
Multifunction, relay digital output 4 (NC contact)
Multifunction, relay digital output 4 (common)
Multifunction, relay digital output 4 (NO contact)
Multifunction, relay digital output 5 (NC contact)
Multifunction, relay digital output 5 (common)
Multifunction, relay digital output 5 (NO contact)
Multifunction, relay digital output 6 (NC contact)
Multifunction, relay digital output 6 (common)
30
15.4.
XDO6-NO Multifunction, relay digital output 6 (NO contact)
Connection to an Encoder or a Frequency Input
Auxiliary digital inputs XMDI6, XMDI7, XMDI8 may acquire fast digital signals and may be used for the connection to a push-pull single-ended incremental encoder or for the acquisition of a frequency input.
NOTE
When ES847 board is fitted, encoder B functions are no more implemented by the basic terminal board of the control board, but are implemented by ES847 board.
The electrical ratings of the aux digital inputs above are the same as the corresponding inputs in optional control board ES847.
For more details, please refer to Connection to an Encoder or a Frequency Input and ES847 Board
250/ 312
USER MANUAL
16. I/O EXPANSION BOARD 120/240VAC ES988 (SLOT C)
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Product-Accessory Compatibility
Product
Sinus Penta
Penta Marine
Iris Blue
Solardrive Plus
ES988 I/O Expansion board
√
√
√
√
Comments
Table 17: Product – ES988 I/O Expansion board compatibility
The ES988 option board 120/240Vac allows incrementing the digitaI I/O set of all the products compatible with this accessory.
The additional functions made available by ES988 option board are the following:
-
N. 8 multifunction opto-isolated digital inputs. Each input features:
120 Vac ÷ 240 Vac +10% / –15% supply voltage; 50 / 60 Hz frequency
-
N. 4 relay multifunction digital outputs. Each output features:
N.1 changeover contact (Vomax = 250 VAC, Iomax = 6 A, Vomax = 30 VDC, Iomax = 6 A)
The digital inputs are divided into four groups; each group features three terminals: two terminals as the inputs and one terminal as the common for the whole group.
The two inputs of each group are to be powered by a single-phase circuit, with the neutral connected to the common of the group.
The four groups are isolated from each other, so that they can be powered also by four different power supply sources.
All digital inputs and relay outputs are programmable. For the programming parameters related to ES988
option board, please refer to the Programming Guide.
Figure 140 shows ES988 option board including the description of the terminal blocks:
Figure 140: ES988 option board, DIGITAL I/O 120/240 Vrms
251/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
16.1. Identification Data
USER MANUAL
Description
ES988 DIGITAL I/O 120/240 Vrms
Part Number
ZZR0988A0
16.2. Installing the ES988 Option Board on the Drives (SLOT C)
1. Remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes.
2. The electronic components of the inverter and the board are sensitive to the electrostatic discharges.
Take all the necessary safety measures before accessing the inverter and handling the board. The board should be installed in a workstation equipped with proper grounding and provided with an antistatic surface. If this is not possible, the installer must wear a ground bracelet properly connected to the PE conductor.
3. Loosen the two front screws located in the lower part of the inverter cover to remove the covering of the terminal board. You can then reach slot C in the control board where the ES988 is to be
installed, as shown in Figure 141.
252/ 312
Figure 141: Location of slot C inside the terminal board cover
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
4. Insert the communications board into slot C. Make sure that the terminal strips with the two
connectors in slot C (CN7A and CN7B) are correctly aligned See Figure 142. If the board is correctly
installed, the four fastening holes will match with the housings of the fastening screws for the fixing
spacers. Tighten the board fixing screws as shown in Figure 177.
Figure 142: Terminal strips inserted into SLOT C
253/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
Figure 143: Fastening ES988 option board inside the inverter
5. Apply voltage to the inverter and check if LED L1 (
+
5V voltage correctly applied to board ES988) comes on. Program the parameters related to auxiliary board ES988 following the instructions given
DANGER
CAUTION
NOTE
Before gaining access to the components inside the inverter, remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes. Wait for the complete discharge of the internal capacitors to avoid electric shock hazard.
Do not connect or disconnect signal terminals or power terminals when the inverter is powered to avoid electric shock hazard and to avoid damaging the inverter and/or the connected devices.
All fastening screws for removable parts (terminal cover, serial interface connector, cable path plates, etc.) are black, rounded-head, cross-headed screws.
Only these screws may be removed when connecting the equipment. Removing different screws or bolts will void the product guarantee.
254/ 312
USER MANUAL
16.3. Digital Input Terminals and Relay Output
Loose terminal blocks, 5.08 mm pitch.
Figure 144 shows the pin layout seen from the cable entry.
M1 M2 M3
Figure 144: Input-output signal terminal blocks
4
5
6
7
Decisive voltage class C according to EN 61800-5-1
1
N.
2
3
Name
COM1
NC1
NO1
Relay output 1 common
NC Relay output 1
NO Relay output 1
Relay output 2 common COM2
NC2
NO2
COM3
NC Relay output 2
NO Relay output 2
Relay output 3 common
NC Relay output 3 8
9
10
11
NC3
NO3
COM4
NC4
NO Relay output 3
Relay output 4 common
NC Relay output 4
NO Relay output 4 12
13
14
15
NO4
MDI1
COM1-2
MDI2
Digital input 1
Digital inputs 1-2 common
Digital input 2
Digital input 3 16
17
18
19
MDI3
COM3-4
MDI4
MDI5
Digital inputs 3-4 common
Digital input 4
Digital input 5
Digital inputs 5-6 common 20
21
22
23
24
COM5-6
MDI6
MDI7
COM7-8
MDI8
Digital input 6
Digital input 7
Digital inputs 7-8 common
Digital input 8
Description
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
M4
255/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
CAUTION
CAUTION
NOTE
USER MANUAL
The cable cross-section required for wiring the digital inputs is 0.5
÷
2.5 mm 2 .
The operating voltage must not be lower than the digital input supply voltage.
The cable cross-section required for wiring the relay outputs is 0.5
÷
2.5 mm 2 .
The operating voltage must not be lower than the relay output supply voltage.
The cable cross-section required for the relay outputs is based on the operating current in the relay output contacts.
The cable path of the digital input cables must not be parallel to the motor cables and must not be close to disturbance sources (relays, motors, inverters, solenoids): the minimum clearance required is over 100 mm.
16.4. ES988 Operating Mode
activation of the relay digital outputs to the field and the interface to the control board.
Figure 145 shows the position of LED L1 indicating that
+
5 V supply voltage is present.
MDO1 Output Relay RL1
MDO2 Output Relay RL2
MDO3 Output Relay RL3
MDO4 Output Relay RL4
COM1
NC1
NO1
COM2
NC2
NO2
COM3
NC3
NO3
COM4
NC4
NO4
RL1
RL2
RL3
RL4
L1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
•
•
•
•
•
•
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
•
•
•
•
•
•
M1
M2
MDI1-2 Digital Inputs 1-2
MDI3-4 Digital Inputs 3-4
MDI5-6 Digital Inputs 5-6
MDI7-8 Digital Inputs 7-8
MDI1
COM1-2
MDI2
MDI3
COM3-4
MDI4
MDI5
COM5-6
MDI6
MDI7
COM7-8
MDI8
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
•
•
•
•
•
•
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
•
•
•
•
•
•
M3
M4
ES988B
1
Figure 145: Block diagram for ES988 interfacing
OP1
OP2
OP3
OP4
CN2
256/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
240 Vrms single-phase source.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
•
•
•
•
•
•
M1
COM1
NC1
NO1
COM2
NC2
NO2
RL1
RL2
L1
CN1
Voltage Source
120
÷
240 Vrms
~
SWITCH 1
SWITCH 2
SWITCH 3
SWITCH 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
M3
MDI1
COM1-2
MDI2
MDI3
COM3-4
MDI4
OP1
CN2
OP2
ES988B
1
Figure 146: Utilization example of digital inputs on ES988 option board
257/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
16.5. Main Features
USER MANUAL
Santerno drives compatible with this accessory equipped with ES988 option board meet the requirements of
EMC Directive 2004/108/CE and LVD 2006/95/CE issued by the European Union. They also comply with the relevant Harmonized Standards.
ES988 option board is made of ‘UL approved’ materials and components.
The installer is responsible for the observance of all the local regulations in force
NOTE concerning wiring, health and safety and electromagnetic compatibility.
Carefully consider the conductor cross-sections, the fuses or other safety devices to be installed, as well as the Protective Earthing connection.
16.6. Environmental Conditions
Operating temperature
Relative humidity
Max. operating altitude
–10 to +55°C ambient temperature (contact Enertronica Santerno S.p.A. for higher ambient temperatures)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
2000 m a.s.l. For installation above 2000 m and up to 4000 m, please contact Enertronica Santerno S.p.A..
258/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
16.7. Electrical Specifications
Decisive voltage class C according to EN 61800-5-1
Value
Digital Input Static Specs
Min. Typ. Max. Unit
Type of input signal
MDI1-2 (MDI1, MDI2 in respect to COM1-2)
MDI3-4 (MDI3, MDI4 in respect to COM3-4)
MDI5-6 (MDI5, MDI6 in respect to COM5-6)
MDI7-8 (MDI7, MDI8 in respect to COM7-8)
Input voltage range
Voltage level for signal “1”
Voltage level for signal “0”
Input current range @ 50 Hz
Input current range @ 60 Hz
CAUTION
90
1.5
1.8
Digital inputs from the field
120/240
1.8 / 3.6
2.2 / 4.4
265
20
4
4.8
V AC
V AC
V AC mA AC mA AC
Exceeding the maximum allowable input voltage ratings will result in irreparable damage to the apparatus.
Digital Input Electrical Isolation Value
Isolation of digital inputs MDI1-2 (MDI1, MDI2 in respect to COM1-2)
Isolation of digital inputs MDI3-4 (MDI3, MDI4 in respect to COM3-4)
Isolation of digital inputs MDI5-6 (MDI5, MDI6 in respect to COM5-6)
Isolation of digital inputs MDI7-8 (MDI7, MDI8 in respect to COM7-8)
Isolation between contiguous sets of digital inputs:
MDI1-2 in respect to MDI3-4
MDI3-4 in respect to MDI5-6
MDI5-6 in respect to MDI7-8
Isolation between digital inputs and Protective Earthing
MDI1-2 in conjunction with MDI3-4, MDI5-6, MDI7-8 in respect to
Hole H4 for fixing Protective Earthing to control board
Isolation between digital inputs and control logics
MDI1-2 in conjunction with MDI3-4, MDI5-6, MDI7-8 in respect to
GND
Isolation between digital inputs and relay outputs
MDI1-2 in conjunction with MDI3-4, MDI5-6, MDI7-8 in respect to
MDO1 in conjunction with MDO2, MDO3, MDO4
NO galvanic isolation
NO galvanic isolation
NO galvanic isolation
NO galvanic isolation
1.5 kV AC @ 50 Hz, 60 s
1.5 kV AC @ 50 Hz, 60 s
2.5 kV AC @ 50 Hz, 60 s
2.5 kV AC @ 50 Hz, 60 s
259/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
Relay Output Static Specs
Min.
Value
Typ. Max. Unit
Type of output signals
MDO1 - MDO2 - MDO3 - MDO4
AC voltage range / continuous AC current applicable to the contacts (resistive load)
Relay digital signal to field
250 / 6 V/A
AC1 Nominal load applicable to contacts (resistive load)
AC15 Nominal load applicable to contacts (inductive load)
DC1 Breaking capacity applicable to the contacts (resistive load)
1500
300
30 / 6
110 / 0.2
220 / 0.12
500
(12 / 10)
VA
VA
V/A mW
V/A
DC switchable minimum load
CAUTION
Exceeding the maximum allowable output current and voltage will result in irreparable damage to the apparatus.
Relay Output Electrical Isolation Value
Isolation between contiguous sets of relay outputs
MDO1 in respect to MDO2
MDO2 in respect to MDO3
MDO3 in respect to MDO4
Isolation between relay outputs and Protective Earthing
MDO1 in conjunction with MDO2, MDO3, MDO4 in respect to
Hole H3 for fixing Protective Earthing to control board
Isolation between relay outputs and control logics
MDO1 in conjunction with MDO2, MDO3, MDO4 in respect to
GND
1.5 kV AC @ 50 Hz, 60 s
1.5 kV AC @ 50 Hz, 60 s
2.5 kV AC @50 Hz, 60 s
260/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
17. ES861 RESOLVER AND INCREMENTAL ENCODER BOARD (SLOT C)
Product-Accessory Compatibility
Product
Sinus Penta
Penta Marine
Iris Blue
ES861 Resolver and
Encoder board
√
√
-
Comments
Solardrive Plus -
Table 18: Product – ES861 Resolver and incremental encoder board compatibility
The ES861 board acquires resolver signals and converts them into 12-bit digital signals that can be used as speed and/or position feedback for the products compatible with this accessory.
NOTE
Please refer to the Programming Guide and the Guide to the Synchronous Motor
Application to check the available control algorithms.
The ES861 board also generates the sinusoidal signal for the resolver excitation and features dedicated logics for the acquisition of differential signals sent from incremental encoders and for the control of optoisolated digital inputs and outputs.
Main features of the ES861 board:
-
Resolver to Digital (RtD) conversion allowing selecting motor position readout or speed readout.
-
Configurable frequency and amplitude of the excitation signal to acquire the Resolver encoder with different voltage ratios between excitation and sin/cos signals.
Encoder input compatible with opto-isolated line-driver (TIA/EIA-422) encoders.
-
Line Driver (TIA/EIA-422) incremental encoder output compatible with opto-isolated line-driver
(TIA/EIA-422) encoders. It is possible to program the input for encoder repetition or the Resolver input at 1024 pulse/rev.
Possibility of enabling a frequency divider (by 2, 4, 8) for incremental encoder signals coming from line-driver encoders, or for signals obtained from RtD conversion.
Configurable encoder supply output (5V, 12V, 24V) allowing output voltage fine-tuning.
-
Acquisition of No.3 opto-isolated digital inputs.
Control of No.3 opto-isolated digital outputs.
-
Segregated sections of individually repeated encoder input and encoder output.
261/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
Figure 147: ES861 Incremental Encoder and Resolver expansion board
CAUTION
If ES861 board is fitted into slot C, ES919 board cannot be fitted into slot B (see
ES919 Communications Board (Slot B)).
Features of the encoder inputs:
-
77kHz (1024pls @ 4500rpm) for max. input frequency with digital filter enabled
155kHz (1024pls @ 9000rpm) for max. input frequency with digital filter disabled
-
Input with differential or single-ended signals
-
Input signal error detection.
Features of the resolver inputs:
-
Configurable excitation frequency ranging from 10kHz to 20 kHz
-
Maximum 30 mA RMS current at excitation output
Maximum 14.4 Vpp (5 VRMS) voltage at excitation output
-
Detection of the PTC signal from the Resolver
-
12-bit RtD for positioning (0.0879° x LSB) or speed acquisition range [ –60000 ÷ 60000] rpm.
17.1. Identification Data
Description
ES861 Resolver and Incremental
Encoder Interface
Part
Number
ZZ0101860
RESOLVER and COMPATIBLE ENCODERS
•
Sin/Cos resolver inputs, 3.6Vpp ± 10% ranging from 10 kHz to 20 kHz.
•
Incremental encoders with signals on balanced line according to standard TIA/EIA-422 and power supply ranging from 5 to 24V.
262/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
17.2. Installing ES861 Board on the Inverter (Slot C)
1. Remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes.
2. The electronic components of the inverter and the board are sensitive to electrostatic discharges.
Take any safety measure before operating inside the inverter and before handling the board. The board should be installed in a workstation equipped with proper grounding and provided with an antistatic surface. If this is not possible, the installer must wear a ground bracelet properly connected to the PE conductor.
3. Remove the protective cover of the inverter terminal board by unscrewing the two screws on the front lower part of the cover. Slot C where ES861 board will be installed is now accessible, as shown in the figure below.
4. Insert the ES861 board into Slot C. Make sure that the terminal strips with the two connectors in slot
C (CN7A and CN7B) are correctly aligned. If the board is properly installed, the four fixing holes are aligned with the housing of the relevant fixing spacers screws. Check if alignment is correct, then fasten the four fixing screws as show in the figure below.
Figure 148: Location of slot C inside the terminal board cover of the drives
263/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
Figure 149: Terminal strips inserted into SLOT C
Figure 150: Fitting the ES861 board inside the drive
5. Configure the supply voltage for the incremental encoder (please refer to the relevant User Manual) by setting the configuration jumper accordingly.
6. Power the inverter and check if the supply voltage delivered to the encoder is appropriate. Set up the parameters relating to ”Encoder A” as described in the
7. Remove voltage from the inverter, wait until the inverter has come to a complete stop and connect the encoder/resolver cable.
264/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
DANGER
CAUTION
NOTE
Before gaining access to the components inside the inverter, remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes. Wait for the complete discharge of the internal capacitors to avoid electric shock hazard.
Do not connect or disconnect signal terminals or power terminals when the inverter is powered to avoid electric shock hazard and to avoid damaging the inverter.
All fastening screws for removable parts (terminal cover, serial interface connector, cable path plates, etc.) are black, rounded-head, cross-headed screws.
Only these screws may be removed when connecting the equipment. Removing different screws or bolts will void the product guarantee.
17.2.1. Resolver Connector
D-sub 9-pin female connector. The figure shows a front view of the PIN layout.
Figure 151: Pin layout on the D-sub 9-pin female connector
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
Name
1
N.
2
3
4
5
6
7
EXC+
EXC –
SIN+
SIN –
COS+
COS –
PTC1
Resolver excitation output (complementary signal)
Sine signal input (direct)
Sine signal input (complementary)
Cosine signal input (direct)
Cosine signal input (complementary)
Terminal 1 of the Resolver PTC
Description
Resolver excitation output (direct signal)
8
9
PTC2
0V
Terminal 2 of the Resolver PTC
Board logics power supply common
265/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
17.2.2. Incremental Encoder and Digital Lines Connectors
USER MANUAL
Figure 152: Input-output signal terminal boards
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2
3
4
5
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
1
N. Name Description
+VEOUT Incremental encoder power supply output (referred to 0VE)
0VE
0VE
0VE
+5V_EXT
Isolated power supply common
Isolated power supply common
Isolated power supply common
Input for external power supply for repeated encoder output* (referred to 0V_EXT)
+5VE_INT Isolated 5V power supply generated internally (referred to 0VE)
0V_EXT External power supply common for repeated encoder output*
0VE
CHA
/CHA
CHB
/CHB
Isolated 5V power supply
Channel A input for positive incremental encoder
Channel A input for inverted incremental encoder (negated)
Channel B input for positive incremental encoder
Channel B input for inverted incremental encoder (negated)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CHZ
/CHZ
CHA_U
/CHA_U
CHB_U
/CHB_U
CHZ_U
/CHZ_U
Zero index signal
Zero index signal (negated)
Incremental encoder A signal output from resolver conversion or from encoder input
(CHA pin 9) – asserted signal
Incremental encoder A signal output from resolver conversion or from encoder input
(/CHA pin 10) – negated signal
Incremental encoder B signal output from resolver conversion or from encoder input
(CHB pin 11) – asserted signal
Incremental encoder B signal output from resolver conversion or from encoder input
(/CHB pin 12) – negated signal
Incremental encoder Z signal output from resolver conversion or from encoder input
(CHZ pin 13) – asserted signal
Incremental encoder Z signal output from resolver conversion or from encoder input
(/CHZ pin 14) – negated signal
Digital input
Digital input
Digital input
21
22
23
XMDI1
XMDI2
XMDI3
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31 n.c. n.c.
CMD
XMDO1
CMDO1
XMDO2
CMDO2
XMDO3
Common for digital inputs
Digital output 1 (collector)
Digital output 1 (emitter)
Digital output 2 (collector)
Digital output 2 (emitter)
Digital output 3 (collector)
32 CMDO3 Digital output 3 (emitter)
(*) In order to get internal power supply of the repeated encoder output, link together terminals 5-6
(+5V_EXT) and 7-8 (0V_EXT).
266/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
17.3. ES861 Configuration and Operating Modes
The ES861 board may power both 5V to 24V encoders and allows acquiring signals coming from the
Resolver in order to convert the position/speed data into a 12-bit word.
17.4. Configuring and Adjusting the Encoder Supply Voltage
The ES861 board may power encoders having different power supply voltage ratings. A selection jumper and a power supply voltage regulation trimmer are available as shown in the figure below. The jumpers and the trimmer are located on the top side of the board. The possible configurations are given in the table below:
Incremental encoder power supply: VE OUT No VE OUT
J1
J2
J3
24V
X
2-3
ON
12V
OFF
1-2
ON
5V
ON
1-2
ON
X
X
OFF
In 24V mode, the output voltage is fixed and cannot be adjusted. In 5 and 12V mode, the output voltage can be fine-tuned: in 5V mode, the no-load voltage may range from 4.5 to 7V by adjusting each individual trimmer accordingly; in 12V mode, the no-load voltage may range from 10.5 to 17V.
Turn the trimmer clockwise to increase output voltage.
Power supply voltage is to be measured at the encoder supply terminals, thus taking account of cable voltage drops, particularly if a long cable is used.
Figure 153: Jumpers and trimmer for power supply configuration
267/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
CAUTION
CAUTION
NOTE
Supplying the encoder with inadequate voltage may damage the component.
Before connecting the cable and after configuring the ES861 board, always use a tester to check the voltage supplied by the board itself.
The repeated encoder output section must be power supplied ONLY with
5V±10% voltage to terminals 5 (+5V_EXT) and 7 (0V_EXT). It is recommended that the supply voltage generated by the board is applied. That voltage is available at terminals 6 (+5VE_INT) and 8 (0VE). This configuration is obtained by linking terminals 5-6 and 7-8 together. If the signal receiver of the repeated encoder requires a potential-free signal source, an external power supply source is required (5V±10% rated).
The encoder power supply circuit is provided with an electronic current limiter and a resettable fuse. Should a short-circuit occur in the supply output, shut down the inverter and wait a few minutes to give the resettable fuse time to reset.
268/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
17.5. Connecting the Resolver Cable
State-of-the-art connections are imperative. Use shielded cables approved by the Resolver and correctly connect cable shielding.
The recommended connection diagram consists in a multipolar, dual shielded cable with four internal pairs individually shielded and isolated external shield. The inner shields are to be connected to the connector case (SH) connected to ES861 board, while the outer shield shall be connected to the encoder frame, usually in common with the motor case.
The motor must always be earthed as instructed with a dedicated conductor attached directly to the inverter earthing point and routed parallel to the motor power supply cables.
It is not advisable to route the encoder cable parallel to the motor power cables. It is preferable to use a dedicated signal cable conduit.
The figure below illustrates the recommended connection method.
Figure 154: Recommended dual shielded connection for resolver cable
NOTE
CAUTION
The encoder supply output and the encoder signal common are isolated in respect to the common of the analog signals fitted in the inverter terminal board
(CMA). Do not connect any conductors in common between the encoder signals and the signals in the inverter terminal board. This prevents isolation from being adversely affected.
The connector of ES861 board shall be connected exclusively to the encoder using one single cable. Do not feed back the cable on terminal boards or DC-link connectors.
Correctly fasten the cable and the connectors both on the encoder side and on
ES860 board side. The disconnection of one cable or even a single conductor may lead to inverter malfunction and may cause the motor to run out of control.
269/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
17.6. Environmental Requirements
USER MANUAL
Operating temperatures
Relative humidity
Max. allowable operating altitude
17.7.
–10 to +55°C ambient temperature (contact Enertronica Santerno
S.p.A. for higher ambient temperatures)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
2000 m a.s.l. For installation above 2000 m and up to 4000 m, please contact Enertronica Santerno S.p.A..
Electrical Ratings
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
Incremental encoder power supply output
Encoder output current, +24V configuration
Encoder output current, +12V configuration
Encoder output current, +5V configuration
24VE Short-circuit protection level
Encoder supply voltage adjusting range in 5V mode (no-load voltage)
Encoder supply voltage adjusting range in 12V mode (no-load voltage)
Value
Min Typ Max
4.5 5.3
150
200
500
300
7
10.5 12.0 17
Static characteristics for signal inputs
Type of input signals, SIN, COS
Differential input voltage (between SIN+ and SIN-; between COS+ and COS-)
Input common mode voltage range in respect to AGND
Input impedance
Type of input signals, CHA, CHB, CHZ
Differential input voltage range
Input common mode voltage range
Input impedance
Type of input signals MDI1, MDI2, MDI3 in respect to COM_MDI
Input voltage range
Value
Min Typ Max
Resolver signals
Unit
3.6 V
0.2
1
V
Mohm
Standard TIA/EIA-422
±7 V
150
5
±7 V ohm
Digital signals from the field
15 24 30 V
Unit mA mA mA mA
V
V
270/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Max. absolute values
Value
Min Typ Max Unit
Maximum allowable common mode voltage amplitude for channels CHA,
CHB, CHZ
CAUTION
–25 +25 V
Exceeding the maximum differential input or common mode voltages will result in irreparable damage to the apparatus.
Value
Dynamic characteristics of the Resolver to Digital converter
Min Typ Max Unit
Band (signal amplitude modulating frequency)
Tracking Rate
CAUTION
1.5 1.7 2
60000 kHz rpm
Exceeding the input signal frequency limits will result in a wrong measurement of the encoder position and speed. Depending on the control method selected for the inverter, it may also cause the motor to run out of control.
Static characteristics of the digital outputs and the encoder outputs
Type of input signals CHA_U, CHB_U, CHZ_U
High logic level voltage
Min Typ
Value
Max Unit
Standard TIA/EIA-422
2.5 V
Low logic level voltage
Limited common mode voltage
Maximum current
Type of output signals, MDOC-E1, MDOC-E2, MDOC-E3
Voltage applicable to MDOC without static absorption in “open” configuration
Maximum current that can be absorbed in “closed” configuration
CAUTION
±5.6
0.5 V
V
50 mA
“Open Collector” switch
5 V
50 mA
Exceeding the range in the table may cause irreparable damage to the equipment.
Static and dynamic characteristics for resolver signal excitation
EXC, /EXC Output Voltage (load max. 30 mA, self-adjusted)
EXC, /EXC Frequency
Value
Min Typ Max
14.4
10, 12, 15, 20
Unit
Vpp kHz
271/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
18. ES950 BISS/ENDAT ENCODER BOARD (SLOT C)
Product-Accessory Compatibility
Product
Sinus Penta
Penta Marine
ES950 BISS/EnDat Encoder board
√
√
Comments
Iris Blue
Solardrive Plus
-
-
Table 19: Product – ES950 BISS/EnDat Encoder board compatibility
USER MANUAL
The ES950 BiSS/EnDat encoder board allows connecting absolute encoders with digital serial interface using mutually exclusive BiSS and EnDat 2.2 protocols and allows using them to provide speed feedback and/or position feedback for the products compatible with this accessory.
NOTE
Please refer to the Programming Guide and the Guide to the Synchronous Motor
The absolute measurement allows detecting the exact position of the motor as soon as the inverter is started, thus avoiding demanding alignment checks.
The ES950 board also features control logics for additional functions, such as the acquisition of differential incremental signals from external encoders and the control of opto-isolated digital inputs/outputs.
272/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 155: ES950 encoder BiSS/EnDat board
CAUTION
If ES950 board is fitted into slot C, ES919 board cannot be fitted into slot B (see
ES919 Communications Board (Slot B)).
Features of the ES950 board:
-
Acquisition of absolute position from SingleTurn/MultiTurn Encoder with balanced digital output
(TIA/EIA-485) according to EnDat 2.2 protocol, up to max. 8MHz transmission frequency and variable resolution depending on the type of encoder.
-
Acquisition of absolute position from SingleTurn/MultiTurn Encoder with balanced digital output
(TIA/EIA-485) according to BiSS protocol, up to max. 10MHz transmission frequency and variable resolution depending on the type of encoder.
Acquisition of differential incremental encoder signals compatible with opto-isolated line-driver
(TIA/EIA-422) encoders.
Galvanic isolation on all the lines.
Configurable 5V, 12V, 24V output for BiSS/EnDat encoder supply allowing fine-tuning, isolated from the control logics.
Configurable 5V, 12V, 24V output for external incremental encoders allowing fine-tuning, isolated from the control logics.
Possibility to repeat the acquired incremental signals over line-driver (TIA/EIA-422) standard.
Possibility to enable a frequency divider (by 2, 4, 8) for incremental encoder signals coming from line-driver encoders.
Acquisition of No.3 opto-isolated digital inputs.
Control of No.3 opto-isolated digital outputs.
The features for the incremental encoder inputs are as follows:
273/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
77kHz (1024pls @ 4500rpm) max. input frequency when the digital filter is enabled
155kHz (1024pls @ 9000rpm) max. input frequency when the digital filter is disabled
Input with differential or single-ended signals
Input signal error detection.
USER MANUAL
18.1. Identification Data
Description
ES950 EnDat
Encoder Interface
ES950 BiSS
Encoder Interface
Part
Number
ZZ0101880
ZZ0101890
COMPATIBLE ENCODERS
•
Absolute encoders with balanced digital EnDat interface according to TIA/EIA-485 standard and power supply voltage ranging from 5 to 24V.
•
Incremental encoders with balanced line signals according to TIA/EIA-422 standard and power supply voltage ranging from 5 to 24V
•
Absolute encoders with balanced digital BiSS interface according to TIA/EIA-485 standard and power supply ranging from 5 to 24V.
•
Incremental encoders with balanced line signals according to TIA/EIA-422 standard and power supply voltage ranging from 5 to 24V.
274/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
18.2. Installing ES950 Board on the Inverter (Slot C)
1. Remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes.
2. The electronic components in the inverter and the communications board are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Take any safety measure before operating inside the inverter and before handling the board. The board should be installed in a workstation equipped with proper grounding and provided with an antistatic surface. If this is not possible, the installer must wear a ground bracelet properly connected to the PE conductor.
3. Remove the protective cover of the inverter terminal board by unscrewing the two screws on the front lower part of the cover. Slot C housing the control board of the inverter where ES950 board will be installed is now accessible, as shown in the figure below.
4. Insert ES950 board into Slot C. Make sure that the terminal strips with the two connectors in slot C
(CN7A and CN7B) are correctly aligned If the board is properly installed, the three fixing holes are aligned with the housing of the relevant fixing spacers screws. Check if alignment is correct, then fasten the three fixing screws as show in the figure below.
Figure 156: Location of slot C inside the terminal board cover in the drives
275/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
Figure 157: Terminal strips inserted into SLOT C
Figure 158: Fitting the ES950 board inside the inverter
5. Configure the supply voltage for the incremental encoder (please refer to the relevant User Manual) by setting the configuration jumper accordingly.
6. Power the inverter and check if the supply voltage delivered to the encoder is appropriate. Set up the
parameters relating to the encoder as described in the Programming Guide.
7. Remove voltage from the inverter, wait until the inverter has come to a complete stop and connect the encoder cable.
276/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
DANGER
CAUTION
NOTE
Before gaining access to the components inside the inverter, remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes. Wait for the complete discharge of the internal capacitors to avoid electric shock hazard.
Do not connect or disconnect signal terminals or power terminals when the inverter is powered to avoid electric shock hazard and to avoid damaging the inverter.
All fastening screws for removable parts (terminal cover, serial interface connector, cable path plates, etc.) are black, rounded-head, cross-headed screws.
Only these screws may be removed when connecting the equipment. Removing different screws or bolts will void the product guarantee.
18.2.1. BiSS/EnDat Encoder Connector
D-sub 15-pin female connector (two rows). The figure shows a front view of the pin layout.
Figure 159: Pin layout on CN7 D-sub 15-pin female connector
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
1
N.
2
3
Name
0VE
0VE
Description
Common for power supply and signals
Common for power supply and signals
+VEOUT_EB Encoder power supply output
+VEOUT_EB Encoder power supply output
DATA+ Positive data signal
Earth n.c.
TCLK+ reserved reserved n.c.
12
13
14
15 n.c.
DATA – n.c.
TCLK –
Shell PE
Earth connection (PE conductor) if J7 is closed
Positive clock signal
Negative data signal
Negative clock signal
Connector shield connected to PE conductor of the inverter
277/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
18.2.2. Incremental Encoder and Digital Line Connectors
USER MANUAL
Figure 160: Input-output signal terminal board
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
30
31
32
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
2
3
4
5
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
1
N. Name Description
+VEOUT Incremental encoder power supply output
0VE
0VE
0VE
+5V_EXT
Isolated power supply common
Isolated power supply common
Isolated power supply common
External power supply input for incremental encoder
+5V_INT Isolated 5V power supply generated from ES950 board
+0V_EXT External power supply common
0VE
CHA
/CHA
CHB
/CHB
CHZ
Isolated power supply common
Channel A input for positive incremental encoder
Channel A input for negative incremental encoder
Channel B input for positive incremental encoder
Channel B input for negative incremental encoder
Positive zero index signal
/CHZ
CHA_U
/CHA_U
CHB_U
/CHB_U
CHZ_U
/CHZ_U
XMDI1
XMDI2
XMDI3 n.c. n.c.
CMD
XMDO1
CMDO1
XMDO2
CMDO2
XMDO3
CMDO3
Negative zero index signal
Encoder simulation (CHA pin 9) - positive signal
Encoder simulation (/CHA pin 10) - negative signal
Encoder simulation (CHB pin 11) - positive signal
Encoder simulation (/CHB pin 12) - negative signal
Encoder simulation (CHZ pin 13) - positive signal
Encoder simulation (/CHZ pin 14) - negative signal
Digital input
Digital input
Digital input
Common for digital inputs
Digital output 1
Common for digital input 1
Digital output 2
Common for digital output 2
Digital output 3
Common for digital output 3
278/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
18.3. ES950 Configuration and Operating Modes
The ES950 encoder interface board may power both 5V to 24V encoders and allows absolute encoders readout via two different protocols based on the same types of signals: one data line and one clock line.
1
2
BiSS mode
EnDat mode
Biss Encoder (differential lines DATA+/ DATA –, TCLK+/ TCLK–)
EnDat Encoder (differential lines DATA+/ DATA –, TCLK+/ TCLK–)
The figure shows the block diagram of the ES950 board for encoder interfacing (independently of whether using the Biss or EnDat protocol) and for interfacing with the control board. The figure also shows the acquisition logics for the digital lines from/to the field and the interface with external incremental encoders (if any).
Figure 161: Block diagram for ES950 board interface
BiSS/EnDat absolute encoders are power supplied via the ES950 board according to their own specifications. Power supply is isolated in respect to the control logics. BiSS/EnDat absolute encoders interface with a Master implemented on FPGA controlling the different protocols to send absolute position information to the control board via parallel interface.
Through the FPGA Master via parallel interface, the control board may read/write additional information internally to the encoder.
The states of the opto-isolated digital inputs/outputs can be accessed via parallel interface as well, whereas the incremental lines coming from the relevant encoder, even if going through the FPGA Master, reach the control board via dedicated lines.
The ES950 board also features an error detecting mechanism for the signals sent from the incremental encoder.
Dedicated outputs make it possible to repeat the acquired encoder signals possibly applying a frequency divider by 2, 4, 8.
The protocol is chosen by programming the board (in off-line mode) accordingly and by setting proper parameters in the control board software.
279/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
18.3.1. BiSS Operating Mode
BiSS is an open source serial protocol developed by IC-HAUS. The configuration adopted for the products compatible with this accessory uses the point-point version B allowing reading the encoder absolute position
(divided into SingleTurn and MultiTurn depending on the encoder being used) and allowing R/W of the logs internal to the encoder.
18.3.2. EnDat Operating Mode
EnDat is a serial protocol proprietary of Heidenhain. It is dedicated to point-to-point connections with absolute encoders (absolute position information divided by SingleTurn and MultiTurn depending on the encoder). In the products compatible with this accessory, the EnDat protocol allows reading the encoder absolute position and allows R/W of the logs internal to the encoder.
18.3.3. Configuring and Adjusting the Encoder Supply Voltage
The ES950 board may power encoders having different power supply voltage ratings. A selection jumper and
a power supply voltage regulation trimmer are available as shown in Figure 162. The jumpers and the
trimmer are located on the top side of the board. The possible configurations are given in the table below.
Incremental encoder supply: VE OUT No VE OUT
J1
J2
J3
24V
X
2-3
ON
12V
OFF
1-2
ON
5V
ON
1-2
ON
X
X
OFF
280/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 162: Jumpers and trimmer for power supply configuration
281/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
BiSS/EnDat encoder supply: VE OUT EB
No VE OUT EB
J6
J5
J3
24V
X
2-3
ON
12V
OFF
1-2
ON
5V
ON
1-2
ON
X
X
OFF
In 24V mode, the output voltage is fixed and cannot be adjusted. In 5 and 12V mode, the output voltage can be fine-tuned: in 5V mode, the no-load voltage may range from 4.5 to 7V by adjusting each individual trimmer accordingly; in 12V mode, the no-load voltage may range from 10.5 to 17V.
Turn the trimmer clockwise to increase output voltage.
This allows meeting the Biss/EnDat encoder requirements by taking account of voltage drops in cables and connector contacts.
Encoder EnDat (Heidenhain): power supply typically ranges from [3.6
14]V, [3.6
5.25]V, [5
±
5%]V depending on the type of encoder being used. The latest standard, EnDat 2.2, covers [3.6
14]V.
Encoder BiSS: [7
30]V, [10
30]V, [5
±
10%]V
Power supply voltage is to be measured at the encoder supply terminals, thus taking account of cable voltage drops, particularly if a long cable is used.
CAUTION
Supplying the encoder with inadequate voltage may damage the component.
Before connecting the cable and after configuring the ES950 board, always use a tester to check the voltage supplied by the board itself.
NOTE
The encoder power supply circuit is provided with an electronic current limiter and a resettable fuse. Should a short-circuit occur in the supply output, shut down the inverter and wait a few minutes to give the resettable fuse time to reset.
18.4. Connecting the Encoder Cable
State-of-the-art connections are imperative. Use shielded cables and correctly connect cable shielding.
Connect the external shielding directly to the connector plug (ES950 side) and to the connector or to a pin (if any) connected to the encoder frame (motor side). The CN7 connector plug is internally grounded.
If the cable has multiple shieldings, connect the internal shieldings to each other and connect them to the common 0V power supply and signals in ES950 (pin 1 or 2 in 15-pin CN7 connector). Do not connect the internal and external shieldings to each other, either along the cable or to the encoder.
The recommended connection diagram consists in a multipolar, dual shielded cable. The inner shield shall be connected to the connector case connected to ES950 board, while the outer shield shall be connected to the encoder frame, usually in common with the motor frame. If the inner shield is not connected to the encoder frame, this can be connected to the inner braid.
The motor must always be earthed as instructed with a dedicated conductor attached directly to the inverter earthing point and routed parallel to the motor power supply cables.
It is not advisable to route the Encoder cable parallel to the motor power cables. It is preferable to use a dedicated signal cable conduit.
The welding jumper J7 enables grounding pin 6 in CN7 connector:
J7
ON
OFF
Pin 6 connected to PE conductor through ES950
Pin 6 not connected to PE conductor through ES950
282/ 312
USER MANUAL
The figure below illustrates the recommended connection method.
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 163: Recommended dual shielded connection for encoder cable
NOTE
CAUTION
The encoder supply output and the encoder signal common are isolated in respect to the common of the analog signals fitted in the inverter terminal board
(CMA). Do not connect any conductors in common between the encoder signals and the signals in the inverter terminal board. This prevents isolation from being adversely affected.
The connector of ES950 board shall be connected exclusively to the encoder using one single cable.
Correctly fasten the cable and the connectors both on the encoder side and on
ES950 board side. The disconnection of one cable or even a single conductor can lead to inverter malfunction and may cause the motor to run out of control.
283/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
18.4.1. Environmental Requirements
Operating temperatures
Relative humidity
Max. allowable operating altitude
USER MANUAL
–10 to +55°C ambient temperature (contact Enertronica Santerno
S.p.A. for higher ambient temperatures)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
2000 m a.s.l. For installation above 2000 m and up to 4000 m, please contact Enertronica Santerno S.p.A..
18.4.2. Electrical Ratings
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
Value
Encoder supply output
Min Typ Max Unit
Encoder output current, +24V configuration
Encoder output current, +12V configuration
Encoder output current, +5V configuration
24VE Short-circuit protection level
Encoder supply voltage adjusting range in 5V mode (no-load voltage) 4.5 5.3
150
200
500
300
7 mA mA mA mA
V
Encoder supply voltage adjusting range in 12V mode (no-load voltage) 10.5 12.0 17 V
Static characteristics of the input signals
Type of input signals DATA+, DATA –, TCLK+, TCLK–
Differential input voltage range
Input common mode voltage range
Input impedance (termination)
Type of input signals CHA, CHB, CHZ
Differential input voltage range
Input common mode voltage range
Input impedance
Type of input signals MDI1, MDI2, MDI3 in respect to COM_MDI
Input voltage range
Min Typ
Value
Max Unit
Standard TIA/EIA-485
12/ –7
12/ –7
V
V
120 ohm
Standard TIA/EIA-422
±7
±7
V
V
150 ohm
Digital signals from the field
15 24 30 V
284/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Max. absolute values
Value
Min Typ Max Unit
Maximum allowable common mode voltage amplitude causing no damage on inputs DATA+, DATA –, TCLK+, TCLK–
–7 +12 V
Maximum allowable differential voltage amplitude on channels CHA, CHB,
CHZ
CAUTION
–25 +25 V
Exceeding the maximum differential input or common mode voltages will result in irreparable damage to the apparatus.
Dynamic characteristics of the input signals Value
Max. frequency of Biss protocol digital signals 10 MHz
Max. frequency of EnDat protocol digital signals 8 MHz
CAUTION
Exceeding the input signal frequency limits will result in a wrong measurement of the encoder position and speed. Depending on the control method selected for the inverter, it may also cause the motor to run out of control.
Value
Static characteristics of the digital outputs and the encoder outputs
Min Typ Max Unit
Type of input signals CHA_U, CHB_U, CHZ_U
High logic level voltage 2.5
Standard TIA/EIA-422
V
Low logic level voltage
Limited common mode voltage ±5.6
0.5 V
V
Maximum current 50
“Open Collector” mA
Type of input signals MDOC-E1, MDOC-E2, MDOC-E3
Voltage applicable to MDOC with no static absorption in “open” configuration
Maximum current that can be absorbed in “closed” configuration
CAUTION
5
50
V mA
Exceeding the maximum differential input or common mode voltages will result in irreparable damage to the apparatus.
285/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
19. ES966 ENCODER BOARD HIPERFACE (SLOT C)
Product-Accessory Compatibility
Product
Sinus Penta
Penta Marine
Iris Blue
ES966 Encoder Hiperface Board
√
√
-
Comments
Solardrive Plus -
Table 20: Product – ES966 Hiperface Encoder board compatibility
USER MANUAL
The encoder board Hiperface ES966 enables interfacing absolute encoders with digital serial outputs based on Hiperface protocol that can be used as speed feedback and/or position feedback on the products compatible with this accessory.
NOTE
Please refer to the Programming Guide and to the Guide to the Synchronous Motor
Application to check the available control algorithms.
The absolute measurement allows getting the exact position of the motor when the system is started; in addition, the current delivered at start is such as to ensure the maximum torque, with no need to perform complex alignment adjustments at start.
The ES966 encoder board features additional functions, such as the acquisition of differential incremental signals from external encoders and the control of opto-isolated digital inputs and outputs.
It is possible to use the ES966 encoder board for Sin/Cos 5ch absolute encoders or Sin/Cos 3ch incremental encoders.
ES966 board also features additional functions:
-
Acquisition of differential incremental signals from external encoders.
Acquisition/implementation of opto-isolated digital links from/to the field.
-
Acquisition of a temperature sensor.
The board features are given below:
Acquisition of absolute position of Hiperface Encoder (RS485 and Sin/Cos) and variable resolution depending on the encoder model.
Acquisition of differential, incremental encoder signals coming from external sources and compatible with opto-isolated, Line Driver (TIA/EIA-422) encoders.
Galvanic isolation on all lines from/to external sources.
Output for Hiperface encoder power supply configurable via hardware at 5V, 12V, 24V with finetuning option, isolated from the control logic.
Output for external incremental encoder power supply configurable at 5V, 12V, 24V with fine-tuning option, isolated from the control logics.
Possibility of re-addressing the acquired signals (even processed) from incremental encoders to external sources over Line Driver (TIA/EIA-422) standard.
Acquisition of 3 opto-isolated digital lines coming from the field.
Implementation of 3 opto-isolated digital lines to the field.
Acquisition of motor temperature sensor, type PTC, KTY84 or PT100, selectable via DIP-switch.
The features related to the incremental encoder inputs are as follows:
77KHz (1024imp @ 4500rpm): max. input frequency with digital filter enabled.
286/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
155KHz (1024imp @ 9000rpm): max. input frequency with digital filter disabled.
Input with Differential or Single-Ended signals.
Error detection over input signals.
The figure below shows the ES966 board including the description of the terminal boards and the components to be used for the board setting:
Fine Hiperface
Encoder Supply
Voltage Regulation
RV2
Hiperface Encoder
Supply Voltage
Selection Jumpers
J5-6
D-SUB 26 Female
Hiperface Encoder
Connector
CN4
Digital Input
Connector
M3-Up
Digital Output
Connector
M3-Low
Incremental
Encoder Input
M2-Up
Incremental
Encoder Output
M2-Low
Programming AS
Connector
CN3
Incremental Encoder
Supply Connector
M1
J1-2
Isolated Supply
Voltage Selection internal (+24VE) or external
J3
Fine Incremental
Encoder Supply
Voltage Regulation
RV1
Figure 164: ES966 Hiperface Encoder Board
SW1-2
287/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
19.1. Part Number
USER MANUAL
Description
ES966 Encoder
Hiperface
Part Number
ZZ0101895
19.2. Installing the ES966 Board on the Inverter (SLOT C)
1. Remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes.
2. The electronic components of the inverter and the board are sensitive to electrostatic discharges.
Take any safety measure before operating inside the inverter and before handling the board. The board should be installed in a workstation equipped with proper grounding and provided with an antistatic surface. If this is not possible, the installer must wear a ground bracelet properly connected to the PE conductor.
3. Remove the protective cover of the inverter terminal board by unscrewing the two screws on the front lower part of the cover. Slot C where the ES966 board will be installed is now accessible, as shown in the figure below.
4. Insert the ES966 board into Slot C. Make sure that the terminal strips with the two connectors in slot
C (CN7A and CN7B) are correctly aligned. See Figure 165, Figure 166 and following figures. If the
board is properly installed, the four fixing holes are aligned with the housing of the relevant fixing
spacers screws. Check if alignment is correct, then fasten the four fixing screws as show in Figure
288/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 165: Location of slot C inside the terminal board cover of the drive
Figure 166: Inserting terminal strips to slot C
289/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
Figure 167: Fixing the ES966 board inside the drive
5. Configure the supply voltage for the incremental encoder (please refer to the relevant User Manual) by setting the configuration jumper accordingly.
6. Power the inverter and check if the supply voltage delivered to the encoder is appropriate. Set up the
parameters relating to the encoder as described in the Programming Guide.
7. Remove voltage from the inverter, wait until the inverter has come to a complete stop and connect the encoder cable.
DANGER
CAUTION
NOTE
Before gaining access to the components inside the inverter, remove voltage from the inverter and wait at least 20 minutes. Wait for the complete discharge of the internal capacitors to avoid electric shock hazard.
Do not connect or disconnect signal terminals or power terminals when the inverter is powered to avoid electric shock hazard and to avoid damaging the inverter.
All fastening screws for removable parts (terminal cover, serial interface connector, cable path plates, etc.) are black, rounded-head, cross-headed screws.
Only these screws may be removed when connecting the equipment. Removing different screws or bolts will void the product guarantee.
290/ 312
USER MANUAL
19.3. HIPERFACE® Encoder Connector
High-density female D-sub 26 connector (three rows): Reference Designator CN4.
Figure 168 shows the location of the pins from the front side.
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 168: Pin layout on HD female D-sub 26 connector
The pin layout of High-density female D-sub 26 connector is given in the table below:
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
N. n.c.
Name
COS+
COS – n.c.
Description n.c.
DATA –
DATA+
CHB_5 –
CHB_5+
Inverted RS485 data signal
Positive RS485 data signal
Incremental encoder, inverted channel B (fast signal B for 5 CH encoder)
Incremental encoder, positive channel B (fast signal B for 5 CH encoder)
+VEOUT_EB Encoder supply output
Hiperface encoder, positive cosine (D+ slow signal for 5 CH encoder)
Hiperface encoder, inverted cosine (D+ slow signal for 5 CH encoder)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23 n.c. n.c. n.c.
CHA_5+
CHA_5 –
0VE
SIN+
SIN –
Earth n.c. n.c.
CHZ_5+
CHZ_5 –
24
25
26
0VE
PTC+
PTC
Shell PE
–
Incremental encoder, positive channel A (A fast signal for 5 CH encoder)
Incremental encoder, inverted channel A (A fast signal for 5 CH encoder)
Power supply and signal common
Hiperface encoder, positive sine (C+ slow signal for 5 CH encoder)
Hiperface encoder, inverted sine (C+ slow signal for 5 CH encoder)
Earth connector (PE conductor) if J7 closed
Incremental encoder positive index (fast signal Z for 5 CH encoder)
Inverted index incremental encoder (fast signal Z for 5 CH encoder)
Power supply and signal common
Motor temperature sensor, positive signal
Motor temperature sensor, negative signal
Connector shield connected to PE conductor of the inverter
291/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
19.4. Incremental Encoder Connectors and Digital Lines
Disconnection terminals, 3.81 mm pitch.
Figure 169 shows the pin layout of the terminals from the cable entry front side.
M2-Up M3-Up
M1
USER MANUAL
M2-Low
M3-Low
Figure 169: Input-output signal terminals
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
3
4
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
1
N. Name
+VEOUT
Description
Incremental encoder power supply output
+VEOUT
0VE
0VE
Incremental encoder power supply output
Isolated power supply output
Isolated power supply output
CHA
/CHA
CHB
/CHB
CHZ
/CHZ
Incremental encoder positive channel A input
Incremental encoder inverted channel A input
Incremental encoder positive channel B input
Incremental encoder inverted channel B input
Positive mark reference signal
Inverted mark reference signal
CHA_U
/CHA_U
CHB_U
/CHB_U
CHZ_U
/CHZ_U
Incremental encoder, positive channel A reproduction output
Incremental encoder, inverted channel A reproduction output
Incremental encoder, positive channel B reproduction output
Incremental encoder, inverted channel B reproduction output
Positive mark reference signal reproduction output
Inverted mark reference signal reproduction output
MDI1
MDI2
MDI3 n.c. n.c.
Digital input from the field
Digital input from the field
Digital input from the field
COM_MDI Digital input common from the field
MDOC1 Digital output 1
MDOE1
MDOC2
Digital output 1 common
Digital output 2
MDOE2
MDOC3
MDOE3
Digital output 2 common
Digital output 3
Digital output 3 common
292/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
19.5. Operating Mode and Configuration of Hiperface Encoder Board
The ES966 encoder board voltage range is from 5 to 24 V and allows the acquisition of Hiperface absolute encoders. It also acquires absolute Sin/Cos 5ch encoders or Sin/Cos 3ch encoders.
the control board. The acquisition logic of digital lines to/from the field and the interfacing with external incremental encoders.
Figure 170: Block diagram of ES966 interface board
The Hiperface absolute encoders are supplied by the ES966 control board (isolated in respect to the control logics) and are interfaced with a counterpart implemented onto FPGA controlling the serial protocol and the sin/cos signals decoding. The control board may read/write additional information internally to the encoder by way of the parallel interface through the FPGA.
The states of the opto-isolated digital outputs/inputs may be accessed via parallel interface as well, while the incremental lines coming from the relative encoder, although passing through the FPGA, reach the control board by way of dedicated lines.
The board also implements a mechanism detecting signal errors from the signals coming from the incremental encoder.
Dedicated outputs may re-send the encoder channels externally acquired, also processed by frequency divider (factor 2, 4 and 8).
The protocol is selected by downloading a special firmware to the board FPGA at an off line programming level and by setting up dedicated parameters in the control board software.
The implemented protocols are detailed in the sections below.
293/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
19.6. HIPERFACE® Operating Mode
USER MANUAL
Hiperface is a protocol developed by Sick-Stegmann for the transmission of information on the encoder position for motor control functionality. This protocol extends the ordinary sine/cosine operation through a slow RS485 interface.
During initialization, the slow serial link is used to detect the encoder absolute position; the sensor is then utilized as an ordinary sine/cosine sensor with two differential tracks 1Vpp.
The Hiperface systems offers different benefits, such as redundancy of the position information sent via serial link and unencrypted signal and the utilization of relatively slow signal bands. This makes the
Hiperface encoder a robust encoder suitable as a position feedback for brushless drives.
The serial protocol is a request/response one, and each packet includes a checksum allowing checking the integrity of the information contained. The RS485 comms baudrate is 9600bps by default.
When started, the drive sends a READ_POSITION command to the encoder: if no response is detected or a failure in data consistency is found, the drive triggers an encoder error alarm, otherwise, if the motor position is correctly detected, the drive switches to sine/cosine control starting from the initial position read by the
RS485 protocol.
The sine/cosine control consists in decoding the position starting from the arctangent of the angle represented by the sine and cosine signals. In order to ensure the correct operation of the sensor even at relatively high speed, the sine/cosine information is controlled at a digital level as well by way of a quadrature decoder.
The maximum allowable bandwidth controlled by the ES966 is 100 kHz, corresponding to 3000 rpm of an encoder at 2048 sinusoids/rev.
294/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
19.7. Configuring and Adjusting the Encoder Supply Voltage
The ES966 board may supply encoders with different voltage ratings.
For the incremental encoder, the voltage selection jumpers are J1-2-3 and the adjusting trimmer is RV1.
For encoder Hiperface, the voltage selection jumpers are J3-5-6 and the adjusting trimmer is RV2.
The possible configurations are given in the tables below:
Incremental encoder power supply: VE OUT
No VE OUT
J1
J2
J3
24V
X
2-3
ON
12V
OFF
1-2
ON
5V
ON
1-2
ON
Table 21: Configuration of incremental encoder power supply
X
X
OFF
Hiperface encoder power supply: VE OUT EB
No VE OUT EB
J6
J5
J3
24V
X
2-3
ON
12V
OFF
1-2
ON
5V
ON
1-2
ON
X
X
OFF
Table 22: Configuration of Hiperface encoder power supply
In 24V configuration, the output voltage is fixed and cannot be adjusted, while in 5V and 12V configuration, the output voltage may be fine-tuned: in 5V configuration, each trimmer allows adjusting the no-load voltage ranging from 4.5 to 7V; in 12V configuration, the no-load range is from 10.5 to 17V.
The voltage increase may be obtained by adjusting the trimmer clockwise.
In this way, the Hiperface encoders requirements may be met, also considering the voltage drops on the cable and the connector contacts; the typical power supply range is 7 to 12V.
The supply voltage is to be measured directly on the encoder power supply terminals, also considering the voltage drops in the connection cable, especially if this is rather long.
CAUTION
Inadequate voltage ratings for the encoder power supply may cause the encoder malfunction. Use a tester to check the voltage supplied by the ES966 board
NOTE once it has been configured and before connecting the power supply cable.
The power supply circuit of the encoder envisages an electronic current limiter and a resetting fuse. If accidental short-circuits occur on the power supply output, power off the drive and wait a few minutes so that the fuse may be reset.
295/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
The jumpers and trimmers are on the top side of the board, see Figure 171.
SW
2
SW
1
J
1
1 2
J
2
1 2 3
Trimmer
RV1
J5
1
2
3
1
2
J6 Trimmer
RV2
2 1
J
3
USER MANUAL
Figure 171: Location of the jumpers, trimmers and DIP-switches of ES966
296/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
19.8. Temperature Sensor Configuration
The ES966 encoder board may acquire the most popular temperature sensors in the electric motors. Two
NOTE
For a correct acquisition of the sensor, set the DIP-switches and the relative parameters accordingly.
The DIP-switches are on the top side of the board. See Figure 171.
The possible configurations are given in Table 23:
PTC KTY84 PT100
SW1.1
SW1.2
SW2.1
SW2.2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Table 23: DIP-switch configuration for the temperature sensor on ES966
19.9. Connecting the Encoder Cable
It is necessary to carefully connect the drive to the encoder, even if the bandwidths of the Hiperface encoders are typically low (particularly the sine/cosine signals).
Typically, shielded CAT 5 cables with twisted pair signal lines are used with capacities lower than 100 pF/m and length lower than 100 m.
It is recommended that double-shielded cables be used by connecting the internal shield to the case of CN4 type D-sub 26 connected to the ES966 board (pin 19) and the external shield to the encoder case, typically in common with the motor case. If the encoder is provided with an external shield that is not connected to the case, the external shield may be connected to the internal one.
In compliance with the applicable standards, the motor must always be earthed with a Y/G safety conductor directly to the earthing point of the drive. In order to meet the EMC requirements related to emissions and immunity for the whole equipment, it is advisable to use a shielded cable for the connection between the drive and the motor. The cable shield is to be connected to the earthing point of the drive. If no shielded cable is used, the Y/G safety conductor shall run in parallel to the motor power supply cables.
Do not run the encoder cable in parallel to the motor power supply cables and close to other disturbance sources (relays, motors, drives, solenoids): in particular, a minimum clearance exceeding 100 mm must be observed. If switching feeder inductors are located in proximity to the motor cable, the minimum allowable clearance must exceed 200 mm. Where possible, use a metal conductor dedicated to the signal cables and connected to earth.
Failure to observe the instructions above may lead to wrong reception of the position information sent from the encoder and encoder malfunction.
Figure 172 shows the recommended connection.
Drive/motor connection shielded cable (blue), with the shield connected to the drive earthing point
(shield orange in colour).
Drive/motor connection double shielded cable (red in colour): internal shield connected to the case of
CN4 connector, D-sub 26 connector on the ES966 board (pin 19); external shield to the encoder case, typically in common with the motor case.
297/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
ES966
USER MANUAL
Figure 172: Connection method recommended for the double-shield encoder cable on ES966
The welded jumper J7 (bottom side in the ES966 close to CN4 connector) allows connecting the internal and external shielding of the drive/encoder cable:
Internal shield of the drive/encoder cable connected to pin 19 in connector CN4.
External shield of the drive/encoder cable connected to the encoder case, typically in common with the motor case.
J7
ON Connection of the internal shielding of the drive/encoder cable to PE conductor via ES966
OFF NO Connection of the internal shielding of the drive/encoder cable to PE conductor via ES966
Table 24: Configuration of jumper J7
If J7 is OFF (default condition) the external shielding is connected to earth via the encoder case and the motor case, while the internal shield is connected to the case of the D-sub 26 connector but is not connected to the conductor by way of the ES966 board.
The encoder supply output and the encoder signal common are isolated in respect to the common of the analog signals fitted in the inverter terminal board
NOTE
CAUTION
(CMA). Do not connect any conductors in common between the encoder signals and the signals in the inverter terminal board. This prevents isolation from being adversely affected.
The connector of the ES966 board shall be connected exclusively to the encoder using one single cable.
Correctly fasten the cable and the connectors both on the encoder side and on the ES966 board side. The disconnection of one cable or even a single conductor can lead to inverter malfunction and may cause the motor to run out of control.
298/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
19.10. Environmental Requirements
Operating temperature
Relative humidity
Max. operating altitude
–10 to +55°C ambient temperature (contact Enertronica Santerno
S.p.A. for higher ambient temperatures)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
2000 m a.s.l. For installation above 2000 m and up to 4000 m, please contact Enertronica Santerno S.p.A..
19.11. Electrical Specifications
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
Encoder power supply output
Encoder power supply output current, +24V configuration
Encoder power supply output current, +12V configuration
Encoder power supply output current, +5V configuration
Short-circuit safety protection device trip level, 24VE
Adjusting range of encoder power supply, 5V mode (no-load mode)
Adjusting range of encoder power supply, 12V mode (no-load mode)
Value
Min Typ Max
4.5 5.3
10.5 12.0
150
200
500
300
7
17
Unit mA mA mA mA
V
V
Relay Output Static Specs
Type of input signals, DATA+, DATA –
Differential input voltage range
Input common mode voltage range
Input impedance (termination)
Type of input signals, SIN+/SIN –/COS+/COS–
Differential input voltage range
Input common mode voltage range
Input impedance (termination)
Type of input signals, CHA, CHB, CHZ
Differential input voltage range
Input common mode voltage range
Input impedance (termination)
Type of input signals, MDI1, MDI2, MDI3 in respect to COM_MDI
Input voltage range
Type of PTC input signals
Differential input voltage range
Value
Min Typ Max Unit
Standard TIA/EIA-485
12/ –7
12/ –7
120
Sincos 1Vpp
V
V
Ohm
0,9
1,5 2,5
1,1
3,5
V
V
120 Ohm
Standard TIA/EIA-422
±7
±7
V
V
150 Ohm
Digital from the field
10 34
Passive sensor
1.7
V
V
299/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
Maximum absolute values
Value
Min Typ Max Unit
Maximum allowable common mode failure-free voltage amplitude for inputs DATA+, DATA –
Maximum allowable common mode and differential mode voltage amplitude for inputs CHA, CHB, CHZ, CHA_5, CHB_5, CHZ_5,
Common mode voltage, PTC inputs
Common mode voltage, SIN/COS inputs
Incremental encoder output voltage
–7
–25
0
0
0
+12
+25
4
32
5
V
V
V
V
V
Incremental encoder output current (resettable fuse trip threshold)
CAUTION
0 500 mA
Exceeding the maximum differential input or common mode voltages will result in irreparable damage to the apparatus.
Dynamic characteristics of signal inputs Value
Maximum frequency of Sin/Cos Hiperface signals 100 kHz
Exceeding the input signal frequency limits will result in a wrong measurement of the encoder position and speed. Depending on the control method selected for the inverter, it may also cause the motor to run out of control.
CAUTION
Value
Static characteristics of the digital outputs and the encoder outputs
Min Typ Max Unit
Type of input signals, CHA_U, CHB_U, CHZ_U Standard TIA/EIA-422
High logic level voltage
Low logic level voltage
Limited common mode voltage
Maximum current
Type of output signals MDOC-E1, MDOC-E2, MDOC-E3
Voltage applicable to MDOC with no static absorption in “open” configuration
Maximum current that can be absorbed in “closed” configuration
5
50
V mA
Exceeding the input signal frequency limits will result in a wrong measurement of the encoder position and speed. Depending on the control method selected for the inverter, it may also cause the motor to run out of control.
CAUTION
2.5
±5.6
0.5
V
V
V
50 mA
“Open Collector” switch
300/ 312
USER MANUAL
20. ES914 POWER SUPPLY UNIT BOARD
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Product-Accessory Compatibility
Product
Sinus Penta
Penta Marine
Iris Blue
Solardrive Plus
ES914 Power Supply Unit board
√
√
√
√
Comments
Table 25: Product – ES914 Power Supply Unit board compatibility
Figure 173: ES914 Power supply unit board
Description of ES914 board
The ES914 board provides insulated power supply to the drives through the RS485 connector (see Auxiliary
for DIN rail type OMEGA 35mm. Width is 97mm. Cross dimensions are given in the figure below.
Figure 174: Dimensions of ES914 board
301/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES USER MANUAL
ACCESSORIES
The ES914 board also provides insulation of RS485 signals on the inverter connector. Using the ES914 board is recommended for galvanic insulation between the control circuits of the inverter and the external communication circuits.
3-zone insulation is provided: the 24Vdc supply input section, the RS485 section on the Master side and
RS485 + 9Vdc supply output on the inverter side are electrically isolated (see Figure 176).
The ES914 board transmits data in just one direction at a time (half-duplex transmission).
Transmission is typically started by the Master device, that transmits a poll packet. When receiving the start bit and the poll packet, the communication channel of the Master port opens towards the inverter port and it is kept open until the whole packet is received for a time over 4 byte-time at allowable minimum baud-rate.
When the transmission time is over, both ports go idle.
The inverter then transmits the response packet. When the start bit of the response packet is received, the communications channel opens on the inverter side towards the Master port; when a second delay time has elapsed, the transmission cycle is complete.
The ES914 board is equipped with two indicator LEDs indicating RS485 communication failures. Wiring mismatch (if any) is also detected.
The ES914 board is provided with transient voltage suppressors (TVS) for the suppression of surge transients caused by bad weather events affecting RS485 serial communication cable reaching the Master device (the external device dialoguing with the inverter via the ES914 board). ES914 board complies with EN
61000-4-5: Level 4, Criterion B.
SHIELDED CABLE FOR RS485 LINK
PE-SHIELD Connection:
•
•
Optional on inverter-side
On master-side, it makes the signal discharger totally ineffective
Figure 175: Basic wiring diagram for ES914 board
302/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Figure 176: Block-diagram with 3-zone insulation
20.1. Identification Data
Description
ES914 Adaptor for aux. power supply
Part Number
ZZ0101790
20.2. Wiring ES914 Board
ES914 board includes three terminal boards and two connectors.
The signal connections going to the RS485 Master and to the inverter are available both on the screwable terminals and to DB9 connectors. This allows maximum wiring flexibility.
The SHIELD and PE conductors are located on the power supply input terminals. The PE conductor is to be connected to the safety conductor of the cabinet where the equipment is installed. The SHIELD connector is the shield of the communication cable reaching the RS485 Master. You can then decide whether and where to connect the cable shield.
The specifications of the terminals and the connectors are given below.
•
M1 Terminals: power supply of ES914 board – separable terminals, 3.81mm pitch, suitable for 0.08
÷ 1.5mm
2 (AWG 28-16) cables.
303/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
Terminal N.
1
Name
+24VS
Description
ES914 Power supply input
2
3
4
0VS
SHD
PE
ES914 Power supply common
Shield of RS485 wire for external connections
Protective Earth
•
M2 Terminals: RS485 connection to the Master: separable terminals, 3.81mm pitch, suitable for 0.08
÷ 1.5mm
2 (AWG 28-16) cables.
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
Terminal N.
5
6
7
Name
RS485 Am
RS485 Bm
0VE
Description
RS485 signal (A) – Master
RS485 signal (B) – Master
Common for connections to the Master
8
9
SHD
PE
Shield of RS485 wire
Protective Earth
•
CN1 Connector: RS485 connection to the Master: male DB9 connector
Am
Bm
1 2 3 4 5
SHIELD
6 7 8 9
0VE
•
M3 Terminals: RS485 connection to the inverter: separable terminals, 3.81mm pitch, suitable for
0.08 ÷ 1.5mm
2 (AWG 28-16) cables.
Decisive voltage class A according to EN 61800-5-1
Terminal N.
10
11
12
13
Name
RS485 Ai
RS485 Bi
0VM
+9VM
Description
RS485 (A) signal – Inverter
RS485 (B) signal – Inverter
Common for connections to the inverter
Inverter power supply output
304/ 312
USER MANUAL
•
CN2 connector: RS485 connection to the inverter: female DB9 connector
Ai
Bi
1 2 3 4 5
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
6 7 8 9
+9VM 0VM
Recommended connection to the inverter
It is recommended that a shielded cable with DB9 connectors be used. Connect both ends of the cable shield so that it is the same PE voltage as the inverter. The shielded cable shall have at least one twisted pair for signals RS485 A and B. Two additional conductors and one additional twisted pair for the conductors of the inverter auxiliary power supply +9VM and 0VM are also required. Make sure that the cable length and cross-section are adequate, thus avoiding excessive voltage drop. For cable length up to 5m, the recommended minimum cross-section is 0.2mm
2 (AWG24) for the signal conductors and the power supply conductors.
Recommended connection to the Master
It is recommended that a shielded cable with at least one twisted pair be used. The cable shield shall be connected to the SHIELD terminal of the connector. The connection of the cable shield allows full exploitation of the suppressors located on the Master conductors.
The shielded cable shall have at least one twisted pair for signals RS485 A and B and shall propagate the common signal (0VE).
The following specifications are recommended for the shielded cable:
Type of cable Shielded cable composed of a balanced pair named D1/D0 + common conductor (“Common”).
Recommended cable model
Min. cross-section of the conductors
Max. cable length
Characteristic impedance
Standard colours
Belden 3106 (distributed from Cavitec)
AWG24 corresponding to 0.25mm
2 . For long cable length, larger crosssections up to 0.75mm
2 are recommended.
500 metres (based on the max. distance between two stations)
Better if exceeding 100
(120
is typically recommended)
Yellow/brown for D1/D0 pair, grey for “Common” signal
305/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
Power Supply LEDs
USER MANUAL
ES914 board is equipped with three indicator LEDs for indicating the status of the power supply voltage.
LED Colour Function
L1 Green Presence of power supply voltage (5V) in inverter-side RS485 circuits
L2 Green Presence of inverter power supply voltage (9V)
L3 Green Presence of power supply voltage (5V) in Master-side RS485 circuits
RS485 FAULT Signals
ES914 board is equipped with two LEDs indicating the fault status for the RS485 signals both on the inverter side and to the Master side. The FAULT indication is valid only when the line is properly terminated, i.e. DIPswitches SW1 and SW2 are “ON”.
LED Colour Function
L5 Red Inverter-side RS485 signal fault
L6 Red Master-side RS485 signal fault
The following faults can be detected:
•
Differential voltage between A and B lower than 450mV
•
A or B exceed the common mode voltage range [ –7V; 12V]
•
A or B connected to fixed voltage (this condition can be detected only when communication is in progress).
Diagnostic Display
Figure 177 shows the indicator LEDs and the configuration DIP-switches of ES914 board.
Configuration of ES914 board
ES914 board includes two 2-position DIP-switches. These DIP-switches allow RS485 line termination to be configured both on inverter-side and on master-side.
DIPswitch
Function Notes
SW1
SW2
Master-side RS485 termination
Inverter-side
RS485 termination
ON: 150Ω resistor between A and B; 430Ω resistor between A and
+5VE; 430Ω resistor between B and 0VE (default)
OFF: no termination and polarisation resistor
ON: 150Ω resistor between A and B; 430Ω resistor between A and
+5VM; 430Ω resistor between B and 0VM (default)
OFF: no termination and polarisation resistor
Value
Electrical Specifications
Min. Typ. Max. Unit
Operating temperature range of the components (standard version)
Max. relative humidity (non-condensing)
Environment pollution degree (according to EN 61800-5-1)
0 70
95
2
°C
%
306/ 312
USER MANUAL
Degree of protection of the plastic case
Insulation test voltage between the encoder signals and the power supply ground
Connection to the inverter
Input voltage
Power supply voltage to the inverter
Inverter power supply output current
Input lines
Type of input signals
Connection to the power supply line
+24V Power supply absorption
Compliance
EN 61000-4-5
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
IP20
500Vac 1’
Min.
19
8.5
Typ.
24
9.16
Value
Max.
30
11.1
Unit
V
V
830 mA
Two lines: signals A and B, RS485 bus
RS485 Standard
(from 4800bps to 115200bps)
Min. Typ.
Value
Max.
700
Level 4, Criterion B
Unit mA
Figure 177: Position of the LEDs and DIP-switches in ES914 board
307/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
USER MANUAL
21. “LOC-0-REM” KEY SELECTOR SWITCH AND EMERGENCY PUSH-
BUTTON FOR IP54 MODELS
Product-Accessory Compatibility
Product
Sinus Penta
Penta Marine
Iris Blue
Key selector switch and
Emergency push-button for
IP54 models
√
√
√
Comments
Solardrive Plus -
Table 26: Product – Key selector switch and Emergency push-button for IP54 models compatibility
The IP54 models can be provided with a key selector switch and an emergency push-button (optional devices supplied by request).
The key selector switch selects the following operating modes:
POSITION
LOC
OPERATING MODE
INVERTER IN LOCAL MODE
DESCRIPTION
The inverter operates in “Local” mode; the Start command and the frequency/speed reference are sent via display/keypad.
0
REM
INVERTER DISABLED
INVERTER IN REMOTE
MODE
Inverter disabled
The control mode is defined by programming in parameters
C140 ÷ C147 of the Control Method menu.
When pressed, the emergency push-button immediately stops the inverter.
308/ 312
USER MANUAL MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
An auxiliary terminal board with voltage-free contacts is provided for the selector switch status, the emergency push-button status and the Enable command.
Decisive voltage class C according to EN 61800-5-1
TERMINALS
1
FEATURES
Opto-isolated input digital
FUNCTION
ENABLE
2
3-4
5-6
7-8
0 V digital inputs voltage-free contacts
(230V - 3A, 24V - 2.5A) voltage-free contacts
(230V - 3A, 24V - 2.5A) voltage-free contacts
(230V - 3A, 24V - 2.5 A)
CMD
STATUS OF LOC-0-REM
SELECTOR SWITCH
STATUS OF LOC-0-REM
SELECTOR SWITCH
STATUS
EMERGENCY
BUTTON
OF
PUSH-
DESCRIPTION
Connect terminal 1 to terminal 2 to enable the inverter (terminals 1 and 2 are connected together —factorysetting) digital input ground contacts closed: selector switch in position LOC; contacts open: selector switch in position 0 or REM contacts closed: selector switch in position REM; contacts open: selector switch in position 0 or LOC contacts closed: emergency pushbutton not depressed contacts open: emergency pushbutton depressed
NOTE
When the key selector switch and the emergency push-button are installed, multifunction digital input MDI4 (terminal 12) cannot be used.
The ground of multifunction digital inputs is available also on terminal 2 in the auxiliary terminal board.
309/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
21.1.
USER MANUAL
Wiring IP54 Inverters with Optional “LOC-0-REM” Key Selector Switch and
Emergency Push-button
310/ 312
Figure 178: Wiring diagram for IP54 inverters
CAUTION
The wiring shown in this schematic does not allow to implement the STO function
(see the Safe Torque Off Function – Application Manual).
USER MANUAL
22. INDEX
A
Anybus-S .................................................................. 174
Auxiliary Power Supply .............................................. 85
B
B40 ........................................................................... 174
BACNet/Ethernet ..................................................... 220
BACNet/RS485 ......................................................... 224
BiSS .......................................................................... 272
Board
Encoder ........................................................ 142; 144
Fieldbus ................................................................ 173
I/O Expansion ................................................... 2; 228
I/O Expansion 120/240Vrms ................................ 251
Line Driver Encoder...................................... 153; 155
Power Supply Unit ............................................... 301
Relay I/O Expansion ............................................. 247
BRIDGE MINI ............................................................ 226
BU1440 ...................................................................... 86
BU200 ........................................................................ 47
BU600 ........................................................................ 61
D
DeviceNet ® ....................................................... 174; 199
E
Earth Bonding ............................................................ 96
Encoder ............................................................ 240; 250
Configuration ....................................................... 146
Configuration examples ....................................... 147
Terminals ............................................................. 145
Wiring .................................................................. 152
ES822 ....................................................................... 169
ES836 ....................................................................... 142
ES847 ....................................................................... 228
ES860 ....................................................................... 159
ES861 ....................................................................... 261
ES870 ....................................................................... 247
ES913 ....................................................................... 153
ES914 ....................................................................... 301
ES919 ....................................................................... 216
ES950 ....................................................................... 272
ES966 ....................................................................... 286
ES988 ....................................................................... 251
EtherCAT .................................................................. 188
Ethernet/IP .............................................................. 188
F
Feedback
Encoder ................................................................ 155
Speed ........................................................... 142; 153
Filteri toroidal ................................................................ 141
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
H
Hiperface .................................................................. 286
HTL .......................................................................... 153
I
I/O Expansion
Wiring ................................................................... 236
Input inductors .............................................................. 122
Inputs
Analog .......................................... 237; 238; 239; 243
Digital ................................................................... 245
K
Key selector switch .......................................... 308; 310
Keypad
Remoting .............................................................. 121
L
Line Driver Encoder
Configuration ....................................................... 157
Terminal board ..................................................... 156
LOC ................................................................... 308; 310
M
Metasys® N2 ............................................................ 218
MODBUS/TCP ® ................................................. 188; 205
N
NEMA 1 .................................................................... 118
O
Output
Inductors .............................................................. 125
Outputs
Digital ........................................................... 241; 246
P
Power
Cables ..................................................................... 30
Power Cables.................................................. 31; 56; 74
PROFIBUS-DP® ................................... 174; 185; 195
PROFIdrive ....................................................... 174; 199
Profinet IRT .............................................................. 188
R
REM .................................................................. 308; 310
Resolver ................................................................... 261
S
Scheduled Maintenance ............................................ 31
Serial board .............................................................. 169
Serial Communications .............................................. 82
311/ 312
MOTOR DRIVES
ACCESSORIES
SIN/COS Encoder ..................................................... 159
Sine filters ................................................................ 140
Slot A ........................................................ 144; 153; 155
USER MANUAL
Slot B ................................................ 171; 176; 217; 227
Slot C ................................................................ 229; 248
312/ 312
advertisement
Related manuals
advertisement